Agenda packet — Gardena City Council, August 12, 2025 (part 2 of 4)

VENDOR ESTIMATED

AMOUNTDESCRIPTION OF SERVICE FUNDING SOURCE DEPARTMENT
Aftermarket Parts 150,000 $ Budget Bus Replacement Parts Enterprise GTrans AT&T FirstNet 90,000Citywide Wireless Telecommunication Enterprise GTrans Copyland 60,000 Professional Copying and Printing ServicesEnterprise GTrans Department of Industrial Relations 54,161 Required Self-Insured Workers Compensation Assessment Enterprise GTrans
Merrimac Petroleum 250,000 Fuel - Unleaded Gasoline Enterprise GTrans N/S Corporation 50,000 Bus Wash Equipment Parts Enterprise GTrans Prudential Overall Supply 32,500 Uniform, Towel & Misc Rental Services Enterprise GTrans Race Communications 15,000 Fiber Internet Services Enterprise GTrans Trane U.S. Inc. 50,000 HVAC Support and Supplies Enterprise GTrans Wells Fargo Vendor Financial Services, LLC 4,700 Copier Lease Enterprise GTrans Total GTrans 756,361$

VENDOR ESTIMATED

AMOUNTDESCRIPTION OF SERVICE FUNDING SOURCE DEPARTMENT
CPAC, Inc 200,000 $ Computer Replacement/Firewall Internal Service Funds Administrative Services Dell Marketing L.P. 100,000 Microsoft Licenses Internal Service Funds Administrative Services Department of Industrial Relations 145,839 Required Self-Insured Workers Compensation Assessment Internal Service Funds Administrative Services Enterprise FM Trust 150,000 Patrol & City Lease Fleet Various Citywide Mariposa Landscapes 106,368 Landscape Maintenance Service Gas Tax Public Works Mariposa Landscapes 113,631 Tree Trimming Maintenance Service Gas Tax Public Works Micro Electronics, Inc 200,000 Computer Replacement Parts Internal Service Funds Administrative Services NMK Corporation 200,000 Computer Replacement Internal Service Funds Administrative Services Pinnacle Claims Management Inc 240,000 Third Party Administrator for Health Insurance Internal Service Funds Administrative Services Swarco McCain, Inc 85,000 Traffic Equipment Supplies Gas Tax Public Works Tustin Buick GMC 90,000 City Fleet Various Multi-Department Wells Fargo Vendor Financial Services, LLC 1,560 Copier Lease Various Citywide Total Other Funds 1,632,398$
TOTAL ALL FUNDS 20,498,357$
15% CONTINGENCY* 816,766
GRAND TOTAL WITH CONTINGENCY21,315,123$
*Excluding LA County Fire and SBRPCA

Page 2 of 2 ends

City of Gardena
Gardena City Council
Meeting

AGENDA REPORT

SUMMARY

Agenda Item No. 17A.

Section: DEPARTMENTAL

ITEMS - PUBLIC WORKS
Meeting Date: August 12,
2025

TO: THE HONORABLE MAYOR AND MEMBERS OF THE GARDENA CITY COUNCIL AGENDA TITLE: Award Construction Contract for the Nakaoka Community Center Electrical System and Civic Center Outdoor Lighting Upgrades Project, JN 528, to Waisman Construction Inc., in the amount of $1,387,000.00, Approve the Project Plans and Speciﬁcations, Budget Appropriation, Project Contingency, and Declare California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) Exemption.

COUNCIL ACTION REQUIRED:

Staff Recommendation:

Approve Construction Contract
Approve Project Plans and Speciﬁcations
Approve Budget Appropriation and Contingency
Approve Construction Support Services
Declare CEQA Exemption
RECOMMENDATION AND STAFF SUMMARY:

The Nakaoka Community Center encompasses approximately 17,137 square feet of building space, including classrooms, oﬃces, a kitchen, and an auditorium. The building’s electrical system is currently at full capacity, has experienced overloads, and cannot support the additional loads needed for planned outdoor lighting improvements. To address these deﬁciencies, the City hired David Volz Design Landscape Architects, Inc. to provide professional design services for the Nakaoka Community Center Electrical System and Civic Center Outdoor Lighting Upgrades.

The Electrical System Upgrade portion of the project includes installing a new electrical service, adding an optional standby generator to back up the entire system, installing new panels and a transformer to accommodate future building expansion, replacing the water heater, and adding outlets throughout the building. The Civic Center Outdoor Lighting Upgrade portion includes installing new up-lighting for existing trees, adding outdoor electrical outlets throughout the lawn area, enhancing security walkway lighting, adding color-changing lighting for existing signage, and installing new parking lot lighting.

In May of 2025, the design was completed and Public Works ﬁnalized the plans and speciﬁcations, then published a bid request in CR Planwell, Gardena Valley News, and the City website. The following ﬁve (5) bids were received on July 31, 2025.

Organization Bid Amount

1. Waisman Construction Inc., Canoga Park $1,387,000.00

2. GMJ Construction Services Inc., Azusa $1,728,004.10

3. High Volt Electric, Simi Valley $1,775,793.00

4. Minako American Corporation, dba Minco Construction, Gardena $1,887,337.10

5. CSI Services, San Pedro $2,067,004.10
The lowest responsive bidder, Waisman Construction Inc., is a state-licensed contractor with proven experience in this ﬁeld and will be required to meet all bonding and ﬁnancial standards. The construction duration is 60 working days; however, the start may be delayed due to long-lead material items.

Staff recommends that the City Council approve the award of the construction contract for the Nakaoka Community Center Electrical System and Civic Center Outdoor Lighting Upgrade Project, JN 528 to Waisman Construction Inc. in the amount of $1,387,000.00 and additionally:
a. Approve the project Plans and Speciﬁcations.
b. Approve a budget appropriation of $787,754 from Deferred Maintenance funds to supplement the existing budget and allocate 25% of the construction award amount ($350,000) as project contingency, considering the building's age and potential unforeseen conditions. c. Approve Construction Support Services with David Volz Design Landscape Architects, Inc., in the amount $20,000.
d. Declare this project to be categorically exempt under CEQA, Class 1, Section 15301, as rehabilitation of existing facilities.

FISCAL IMPACT/COST:

Source of Funds:

FY 2025-2026 CIP - Deferred Maintenance Fund $236,246.00 FY 2025-2026 CIP - Development Impact Fund $811,000.00
Budget Appropriation - Deferred maintenance Fund $787,754.00

Total$1,835,000.00
Estimated Expenditures:

Job Cost for in-house CMI services $78,000.00
Construction Support Services $20,000.00
Construction Contract Award $1,387,000.00
25% Construction Contingency $350,000.00

Total$1,835,000.00

APPROVED:
___________________________
Clint Osorio, City Manager
Attachments
JN 528 - Waisman Construction Inc. 7-31-2025.pdf
JN 528 Plans-compress.pdf
JN 528 Specs.pdf
JN 528_CEQA_NOE.pdf

5-2627
TITLE SHEET T.1

CITY OF GARDENA

CONSTRUCTION PLANS
FOR

NAKAOKA COMMUNITY CENTER ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

AND CIVIC CENTER OUTDOOR LIGHTING UPGRADES
J.N. 528
15 POWER LEGEND AND SYMBOLS

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

NOTE TO CONTRACTOR

CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY PLANS AND EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS ON THE JOB SITE AND SHALL

IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT IN WRITING OF ANY DISCREPANCIES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK OR BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SAME.

DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS

1. ALL MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP SHALL CONFORM TO THE LATEST CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR), NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE EDITION AND ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL CODES AND REGULATIONS.

2. ALL WORK IS NEW UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

3. ALL PANELS, SWITCHES, ETC. SHALL HAVE SUFFICIENT GUTTER SPACE AND LUGS IN COMPLIANCE TO UL REQUIREMENTS TO ACCOMMODATE CONDUC TORS SHOWN.

4. WHERE WIRE SIZES ARE INDICATED ON PLANS, FOR INDIVIDUAL CIRCUITS, THE WIRE SIZE INDICATED SHALL APPLY TO THE COMPLETE CIRCUIT, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

5. WHERE EXISTING CIRCUITS OR DEVICES ARE DEMOLISHED, MODIFIED, OR REUSED, ENSURE ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL UTILIZATION DEVICES T O REMAIN ARE ENERGIZED UPON COMPLETION OF WORK.

6. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE EXACT LOCATION OF MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND OTHER EQUIPMENT REQUIRING ELECTRICAL CONNECTION PRIOR TO ANY WORK.

7. CONTRACTOR SHALL EXTEND WIRING FROM ALL JUNCTION BOXES, SWITCHES, ETC. AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION AS REQUIRED TO ALL BUILDING EQUIPMENT REQUIRING ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS.

8. LOCATION OF LOCAL WALL SWITCHES ARE SUBJECT TO MODIFICATIONS. AT OR NEAR DOORS, INSTALL SWITCHES ON SIDE OPPOSITE TO DOOR HINGE. VERIFY FINAL HINGE LOCATION IN FIELD PRIOR TO ANY WORK.

9. DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND INDICATE GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OF SYSTEMS AND WORK INCLUDED. FOLLOW DRAWINGS IN LAYING OUT WORK AND CHECK DRAWINGS OR OTHER TRADES RELATING TO WORK TO VERIFY SPACE IN WHICH WORK WILL BE INSTALLED. MAINTAIN HEADROOM AND MINIMUM CODE REQUIRED WORKING CLEARANCES AT ALL TIMES.

10. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE LOCATION OF ALL WALL OUTLET BOXES FOR SWITCHES, BELL/STROBES, FIRE ALARM PULL STATIONS. RECEPTACLES ETC. WITH CABINETS, FURNITURE, EQUIPMENT ETC., TO AVOID CONFLICT.

11. WHERE ELECTRIC MOTORS OR HEATERS ARE INSTALLED IN HUNG CEILINGS, PROVIDE DISCONNECT SWITCH IN HUNG CEILING WITHIN REACH FROM ACCESS POINT.

12. FURNISH APPROVED EXPANSION FITTINGS WHERE RACEWAY CROSSES BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS.

13. FURNISH PULL STRING IN EACH RACEWAY RUN OVER 10' IN LENGTH, IN WHICH PERMANENT WIRING IS NOT INSTALLED.

14. NOT MORE THAN THREE LIGHTING OR CONVENIENCE OUTLET CIRCUITS ARE PERMITTED IN ONE CONDUIT, PROVIDE SEPARATE CONDUIT FOR EACH HOMERUN INDICATED ON THE DRAWING, UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE.

15. PROVIDE PULL BOXES WHEREVER NECESSARY TO FACILITATE PULLING OF CONDUCTORS. COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF BOXES WITH OTHER TRADES T O AVOID CONFLICT. PULL BOXES SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE.

THE SIZE OF PULL BOX SHALL COMPLY WITH N.E.C. REQUIREMENTS.

16. OUTLET BOXES FOR FIXTURES RECESSED IN HUNG CEILING SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE THROUGH OPENING CREATED BY REMOVAL OF FIXTURES.

17. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATION FOR ADDITIONAL CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS TO CONTROL PANELS, CONTROL TRANSFORMERS, PO WER FOR CONTROL SYSTEM EP AND PE SWITCHES, TIME CLOCKS, VALVES, STATS, RELAYS, DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR LOCATIONS, ETC. INDICATED ON CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAMS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY FINAL CONTROL WIRING REQUIREMENTS WITH MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING CONTRACTORS PRIOR TO ANY WORK AND PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY DEVICES AND CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED.

18. ALL EXTERIOR ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT INCLUDING THOSE THAT ARE EXPOSED TO OUTSIDE ENVIRONMENT SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF TYPE, NEMA 3R.

19. NO CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE ALLOWED IN CONCRETE SLABS. ALL CONDUITS WILL BE PLACED ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACES UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED TO BE UNDERGROUND.

20. LIGHTING, POWER, TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS SHALL NOT BE PLACED BACK-TO-BACK.

21. DISCONNECT SWITCHES SHALL BE MOUNTED ON INDIVIDUAL SUPPORTS, OR OTHERWISE DIRECTLY ON EQUIPMENT, PROVIDED NO MODIFICATION TO EQUIPMENT IS NECESSARY.

22. ALL ELECTRICAL POWER, LIGHTING, TELEPHONE OR SIGNAL WIRING IN FIRE RATED WALL IS TO BE INSTALLED IN A METALLIC CONDUIT SYSTEM.

23. ALL ELECTRIC MATERIAL SHALL BE LISTED BY "UL" FOR THE TYPE OF APPLICATION AND "UL" LABEL SHALL APPEAR ON ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT.

24. CONTACT UTILITY COMPANIES FOR SCOPE OF WORK PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID; INCLUDE UTILITY CHARGES IF ANY.

25. ALL DISTRIBUTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT (SUCH AS CB's, SWITCHES, CONTACTORS, ETC.), TERMINATIONS SHALL BE FULLY RATED PER UL AS FOLLOWS:
a. 100A OR LESS : 60°C OR MORE;
b. MORE THAN 100A : 75°C OR MORE.

26. ANY ERRORS, OMISSIONS, OR DESIGN DISCREPANCIES ON PLANS OR SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ELECTRICA L ENGINEER FOR CLARIFICATION OR CORRECTION PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND PREPARATION OF SUBMITTAL PACKAGES.

27. CONDUCTORS SHALL HAVE UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES, INC.(UL) LISTED, 600 VOLT INSULATION OF TYPE SPECIFIED BELOW OR ELSEWHERE IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. CONDUCTORS SHALL BE COPPER AND LISTED FOR 90 DEGREE APPLICATIONS.

1. BRANCH CIRCUITS - LIGHTING AND POWER.
a. #10 AWG AND SMALLER, SOLID WIRE TYPE THW OR THHN/THWN-2, THHW(THHN FOR DRY LOCATION ONLY). b. #8 AWG TO #2 AWG, STRANDED TYPE THW OR THHN/THHW.
c. #1 AWG AND LARGER, STRANDED TYPE XHHW-2.

2. FEEDERS : TYPE THW OR THHN/THWN-2, OR XHHW-2.

28. PROVIDE GREEN INSULATED GROUNDING CONDUCTOR IN EACH RACEWAY INCLUDING CONDUITS, PLUG STRIPS, WIREMOLD. SIZE OF GROUNDING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE ARTICLE 250.

29. WIRING METHOD SHALL BE EMT ABOVE GROUND AND MOUNTED IN CONCEALED SPACES AND SCHEDULE-40 PVC FOR UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION. USE RIGID WHEN ENCASED IN CONCRETE OR SUSCEPTIBLE TO DAMAGE.

30. ALL SWITCH LOCATIONS ARE REQUIRED TO HAVE A NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR PROVIDED AT THE SWITCH LOCATION PER NEC 404.2(C).

31. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, SHARING OF NEUTRAL/GROUNDED CONDUCTORS AMONG SINGLE PHASE BRANCH CIRCUITS OF DIFFERENT PHASES INSTALLED IN THE SAME RACEWAY IS NOT PERMITTED.

PROVIDE DEDICATED NEUTRAL/GROUNDED CONDUCTOR FOR EACH INDIVIDUAL BRANCH CIRCUIT.

32. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, PROVIDE A SEPARATE SWITCHED AND UNSWITCHED PHASE CONDUCTOR TO ALL CONTROLLED RECEPTACLES REGARDLESS OF RECEPTACLE CONFIGURATION.

33. BASIS OF ELECTRICAL DESIGN LIMITS VOLTAGE DROP TO 2% FOR FEEDERS AND 3% FOR BRANCH CIRCUITS. ANY CHANGES MADE IN THE FIELD S HALL LIMIT VOLTAGE DROP TO THESE PERCENTAGES.

34. BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUITS SHALL BE CONCEALED IN WALL OR CEILING SPACES. EXPOSED CONDUITS ARE NOT ALLOWED WHERE CONCEALED METHODS ARE AVAILABLE.

35. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CONDUCTORS AND CONDUITS REQUIRED FOR ALL BRANCH CIRCUITS AND FEEDERS. FOR CIRCUIT SIZES NOT SHOWN, REFER TO PANEL SCHEDULES FOR CONDUCTOR AND CONDUIT SIZES.

36. ALL EMERGENCY CIRCUITS SHALL BE ENTIRELY INDEPENDENT OF ALL OTHER WIRING AND EQUIPMENT AND SHALL NOT ENTER SAME RACEWAY, BOXES OR CABINETS WITH OTHER WIRING EXCEPT WHERE PROVIDED IN NEC 700.9B.

37. REFER TO LIGHTING CONTROL DETAILS FOR WIRING AND CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL WIRING AND CONDUITS REQU IRED BY MANUFACTURER TO FIXTURES AND CONTROLS.

38. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE WORK WITH OTHER TRADES. ANY COSTS TO INSTALL WORK TO ACCOMPLISH SAID COORDINATION, WHICH DIFFERS FROM THE WORK AS SHOWN ON THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, SHALL BE INCURRED BY THE CONTRACTOR. ANY DISCREPANCIES, AMBIGUITIES OR CONFLICTS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE CITY'S'S REPRESENTATIVE DURING BID TIME FOR CLARIFICATION. ANY SUCH CONFLICTS NOT CLARIFIED PRIOR TO BID SHALL BE SUBJECT TO THE INTERRUPTION OF THE CITY'S'S REPRESENTATIVE AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE CITY.

39. EXACT ROUTING METHOD AND LOCATION OF CONDUIT PENETRATION AND OPENINGS IN WOOD ROOF DECKS, WALL, FLOORS OR STRUCTURAL STEEL M EMBERS SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE CONTRACTOR IN FIELD. PERFORM CORING, SAWCUTTING, PATCHING AND REFINISHING OF EXISTING WALLS AND SURFACES WHEREVER IT IS NECESSARY TO PENETRATE. OPENINGS SHALL BE SEALED IN AN APPROVED METHOD TO MEET THE FIRE RATING AND WATER PROOFING REQUIREMENTS OF THE PARTICULAR WALL, FLOOR OR CEILING. ALL FIRE SEALS SHALL BE UL APPROVED. CONTRACTOR SHALL SCAN ALL CONCRETE WALLS AND SLABS FOR THE PRESENCE OF REBAR AND/OR UTILITIES PRIOR TO DRILLING OR CUTTING IF CONCRETE WORK IS INVOLVED. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CERTIFICATION OF CALIBRATION OF CONCRETE SCANNING EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO PERFORMING WORK.

40. STUB OUT (2)1" CONDUITS FROM ALL FLUSHED MOUNTED PANELBOARDS INTO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE AND CAP FOR FUTURE USE.

41. ALL 125 AND 250-VOLT, 15- AND 20-AMPERE NONLOCKING TYPE RECEPTACLES SHALL BE LISTED TAMPER RESISTANT RECEPTACLES IN AREAS SP ECIFIED IN NEC 406.12.

42. ALL 125-VOLT THROUGH 250-VOLT RECEPTACLES SUPPLIED BY SINGLE-PHASE BRANCH CIRCUITS RATED 150 VOLTS OR LESS TO GROUND, 50 AMPERES OR LESS, AND ALL RECEPTACLES SUPPLIED BY THREE-PHASE BRANCH CIRCUITS RATED 150 VOLTS OR LESS TO GROUND, 100 AMPERES OR LESS, INSTALLED IN THE LOCATIONS SPECIFIED BELOW SHALL HAVE GROUND-FAULT CIRCUIT-INTERRUPTER PROTECTION FOR PERSONNEL AND ANY OTHER AREAS SPECIFIED IN NEC 210.8 a. KITCHENS OR AREAS WITH A SINK AND PERMANENT PROVISIONS FOR EITHER FOOD PREPARATION OR COOKING b. OUTDOORS
c. SINKS — WHERE RECEPTACLES ARE INSTALLED WITHIN 6 FT FROM THE TOP d. INDOOR DAMP AND WET LOCATIONS
e. GARAGES, ACCESSORY BUILDINGS, SERVICE BAYS, AND SIMILAR AREAS OTHER THAN VEHICLE EXHIBITION HALLS AND SHOWROOMS

APPLICABLE CODES

ABBREVIATIONSGENERAL NOTES

1. 2022 BUILDING STANDARDS ADMINISTRATIVE CODE, PART 1, TITLE 24 C.C.R.

2. 2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE (CBC),PART 2, TITLE 24 C.C.R. (IBC WITH AMENDMENTS)

3. 2022 CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE (CEC), PART 3, TITLE 24 C.C.R. (NEC WITH AMENDMENTS)

4. 2022 CALIFORNIA MECHANICAL CODE (CMC), PART 4, TITLE 24 C.C.R. (UMC WITH AMENDMENTS)

5. 2022 CALIFORNIA PLUMBING CODE (CPC), PART 5, TITLE 24 C.C.R. (UPC WITH AMENDMENTS)

6. 2022 CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE, PART 9, TITLE 24 C.C.R. (IFC WITH AMENDMENTS)

7. 2022 CALIFORNIA REFERENCED STANDARDS, PART 12, TITLE 24 C.C.R.

8. TITLE 19 C.C.R., PUBLIC SAFETY, STATE FIRE MARSHAL REGULATIONS.

9. 2022 CALIFORNIA ENERGY CODE (PART 6, TITLE 24 C.C.R.)

10. 2022 CALIFORNIA GREEN BUILDING STANDARDS CODE (CGBSG), PART 11, TITLE 24 C.C.R. +96" OR 7'-6" AFF
MOUNTING HEIGHT FROM FINISHED FLOOR TO BOTTOM LINE OF OUTLET OR EQUIPMENT. FOR LIGHT FIXTURES, IT IS TO BOTTOM OF FIXTURE.

MAIN SWITCHBOARD, POWER OR LIGHT, FLOOR STANDING ENCLOSURE, (SEE SINGLE LINE

DIAGRAM AND LOAD SUMMARY)
BRANCH PANELBOARD, WALL MOUNTED, SEE PLANS AND SCHEDULE. (RECESSED MOUNTED) BRANCH PANELBOARD, WALL MOUNTED, SEE PLANS AND SCHEDULE. (SURFACE MOUNTED) CONDUIT STUBBED AND CAPPED, SIZE AND QUANTITIES PER PLANS.

CONDUIT CONCEALED IN OR UNDER FLOOR, 3/4" UON, COORDINATE WITH G.C.: OR, BURIAL CONDUIT UNDERGROUND. REFER TO PLANS, DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS.

SPECIALTY OUTLET. VERIFY NEMA CONFIGURATION AS NOTED ON PLANS.L5-30R HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCH H.P. AND 600 VOLTS RATED. "F" INDICATES FUSE TYPE. FUSES PER APPROVED EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS SHOP DRAWINGS. SUBSCRIPT INDICATES SWITCH AMPERE RATING. # OF POLES TO MATCH SUPPLY CIRCUIT.

MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER H.P. RATED (NUMBER INDICATES NEMA SIZE) #2
OR

ELECTRICAL UTILITY PRIMARY

ELECTRICAL UTILITY SECONDARY

EQUIPMENT
ID. No.

SHEET No.

DETAIL No.

EQUIPMENT REFERENCE

DETAIL REFERENCE

ABOVE CEILING, CONCEALED, JUNCTION BOX, WITH COVER, PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) TABLE 314.16(A)/(B), 4" SQUARE DEEP, WITH PLASTER RING. 50A 120/240V NEMA 3R SPIDER BOX WITH 125V GFCI RECEPTACLES AND SPECIALTY OUTLET DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, FLUSH IN FLOOR, WATERTIGHT JUNCTION BOX (HINGED BRASS COVER:
20 AMP, 120 VOLT, 2-POLE, 3-WIRE) U.O.N.

RECESSED WALL MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX, WITH COVER, PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) TABLE 314.16(A)/(B), 4" SQUARE DEEP, WITH PLASTER RING.

RECESSED CEILING MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, CONVENIENCE. (20 AMPS, 125 VOLTS) U.O.N.

DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, CONVENIENCE. (20 AMPS, 125 VOLTS) WITH MOUNTING HEIGHT HORIZONTALLY ABOVE COUNTER TOP PER ARCHITECTURAL PLANS OR APPROVAL.

DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, CONVENIENCE. (20 AMPS, 125 VOLTS, GFCI TYPE) WITH

MOUNTING HEIGHT HORIZONTALLY ABOVE COUNTER TOP PER ARCHITECTURAL PLANS OR APPROVAL.

DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, SINGLE SPLIT-CIRCUIT SWITCHED. (20 AMPS, 125 VOLTS) MOUNTED +15" A.F.F. TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE U.O.N.

DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, CONVENIENCE. (20 AMPS, 125 VOLTS) MOUNTED +15" A.F.F. TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE U.O.N.

DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, CONVENIENCE. (20 AMPS, 125 VOLTS, GFCI TYPE) MOUNTED +15" A.F.F. TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE U.O.N.

DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, CONVENIENCE. (20 AMPS, 125 VOLTS) MOUNTED +15" A.F.F. TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE U.O.N.

WEATHERPROOF DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, CONVENIENCE. (20 AMPS, 125 VOLTS) MOUNTED +15" A.F.F. TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE U.O.N.

MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
GROUNDING CONNECTION AT SWITCHGEAR/DISTRIBUTION BOARD WITH NEUTRAL BONDING.

UTILITY COMPANY PULL SECTION LUGS
G
N
GROUNDING CONNECTION TO MAIN BUILDING GROUND SYSTEM U.O.N.

EXISTING (DASH INDICATES) ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
TELEPHONE BACKBOARD 2'X4'X3/4" PLYWOOD. PROVIDE 2" CONDUIT TO TELEPHONE POC.

HOMERUN TO CIRCUITS #1 AND #3 IN PANEL "A". REFER TO PANEL SCHEDULE FOR CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR SIZES. QTY AS REQUIRED.

A-1,3

IN-LINE UTILITY COMPANY METER

UTILITY METER WITH CIRCUIT TRANSFORMERS (CT'S) METER

SOLID STATE DEVICE CONNECTED TO THE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM TRANSFORMER WITH SECONDARY GROUND. REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR KVA RATING AND GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS.T

GROUND FAULT PROTECTION DEVICE CONNECTED TO THE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM WP
SURFACE MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, CONVENIENCE. (20 AMPS, 125 VOLTS) MOUNTED +15" A.F.F. TO BOTTOM OF DEVICE U.O.N.

GROUND WELL

A AMPERE

AF AMPERE FRAME RATING (CIRCUIT BREAKER)

AFC AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT

AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR

AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE

AFU AMPERE FUSE RATING (FUSE)

AIC AMPERE INTERRUPTING CAPACITY

AS AMPERE SWITCH RATING (FUSE)

AT AMPERE TRIP RATING (CIRCUIT BREAKER)

AWG AMERICAN WIRE GAUGE

BKBD BACKBOARD

BLDG BUILDING

BKR BREAKER

C CONDUIT

CB CIRCUIT BREAKER

CKT CIRCUIT

CO CONDUIT ONLY

CT CURRENT TRANSFORMER

CU COPPER

CL CENTERLINE

DISC DISCONNECT

DSBN DISTRIBUTION SECTION

DN DOWN

DWG DRAWING

EA EACH

EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR

EGC EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR

EM EMERGENCY

EMT ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING

EXIST, (E) EXISTING
FF USE

FF FINISHED FLOOR

FG FINISHED GRADE

FLA FULL LOAD CURRENT

GEC GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR

GEN GENERATOR

GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER

GFP GROUND FAULT PROTECTION

GND GROUND

GRC GALVANIZED RIGID CONDUIT

HD HEAVY DUTY

HP HORSE POWER

IG ISOLATED/INSULATED GROUND

ISC SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT AVAILABLE IN RMS

SYMMETRICAL AMPERES

J-BOX JUNCTION BOX

KCMIL THOUSAND CIRCULAR MILS

KW KILOWATT

KV KILO VOLT

KVA KILO VOLT-AMPERE

LDC LOCAL DISTRIBUTION CABINET

LDF LOCAL DISTRIBUTION FRAME

LCL LONG CONTINUOUS LOAD

LFMC LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

LSIG LONG, SHORT, INSTANTANEOUS, GROUND

LTG LIGHTING

LV LOW VOLTAGE

MFR MANUFACTURER

MAX MAXIMUM

MIN MINIMUM

MLO MAIN LUGS ONLY

M/M METER AND MAIN SECTION

NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

NEMA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER'S

ASSOCIATION

NEW (N) NEW, TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY

CONTRACTOR

NIC NOT IN CONTRACT

NTS NOT TO SCALE

PB PULL BOX

PF POWER FACTOR

PNL PANEL

POC POINT OF CONNECTION

PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE

RGS RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL

RMC RIGID METALLIC CONDUIT

RNC RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT

SPEC SPECIFICATIONS

SWBD SWITCHBOARD

TYP TYPICAL

UGPS UNDERGROUND PULL SECTION

UL UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY

UON UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED

V VOLT, VOLTAGE

VA VOLT-AMPERE

VD VOLTAGE DROP
W WATT

WP WEATHERPROOF

WW WIREWAY

Z IMPEDANCE
4W FOUR-WIRE
3W THREE-WIRE
5S JUNCTION BOX
(4 11/16" SQUARED X2 1/8" DEEP)
Ø DIAMETER, PHASE
# NUMBER
°C DEGREE CELSIUS
(E) EXISTING DEVICE TO REMAIN
(R) REMOVE EXISTING DEVICE AND ASSOCIATED

CONDUIT AND WIRE
(RL) REMOVE EXISTING DEVICE AND RELOCATE AS

SHOWN ON PLAN
(NL) NEW LOCATION OF RELOCATED DEVICE

SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE
SUBSCRIPT "A-1" REFERS TO PANEL DESIGNATION WITH CIRCUIT NUMBER. TYPICAL OF ALL RECEPTACLE OUTLETS.A-1
100AS

GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES

1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE PROJECT SITE AND MAKE THEMSELVES COMPLETELY FAMILIAR WITH THE EXISTING INSTALLED CONDITIONS. A FIELD SURVEY VERIFICATION IS MANDATORY IN ORDER TO SUBMIT AN ELECTRICAL BID, FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL NOT RELIEVE THIS CONTRACTOR FROM PERFORMING THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT.

2. ALL EQUIPMENT OR WORK REQUIRED TO CARRY OUT THE DEMOLITION SCOPE OF WORK IS CONSIDERED TO BE PART OF THE CONTRACTOR SCOPE OF WORK. NO EXTRAS WILL BE CONSIDERED TO PERFORM THE REQUIRED WORK.

3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM THE FACILITY DIRECTOR PRIOR TO THE SCHEDULING OF ANY POWER OUTAGE. SUCH PERMISSION MUST BE OBTAINED IN WRITING AND BE GRANTED AT LEAST 7 DAYS PRIOR TO ANY SCHEDULE SHUT DOWN. THE SHUT DOWN SHALL NOT EXCEED A DURATION OF 4 HOURS.

4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT STORE ON SITE ANY ITEMS THAT WERE DEMOLISHED FOR ANY EXTENDED PERIOD OF TIME, WITHOUT THE WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE CAMPUS FACILITY DIRECTOR.

5. ALL ELECTRICAL ITEMS DESIGNATED AS EXISTING TO REMAIN SHALL AS PART OF THIS SCOPE OF WORK BE CLEANED AND TESTED, TO INSURE PROPER OPERATION. ANY ITEMS THAT FAIL TO PASS THE TEST SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE FIELD INSPECTOR AND THE ENGINEER OF RECORD FOR RESOLUTION.

6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL EXISTING SWITCHBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, PANEL BOARDS, LIGHTING FIXTURES, CONDUITS, WIRES AND OTHER ELECTRICAL APPARATUS DESIGNATED AS EXISTING TO BE REMOVED.

DEMOLITION ITEMS, IF NOT REQUIRED TO BE SALVAGED BY CITY, BECOME THE PROPERTY OF THE CONTRACTOR AND SHALL BE DISPOSED OF IN AN APPROPRIATE MANNER.

7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL CONDUITS SERVING DEVICES WHICH ARE DESIGNATED AS EXISTING TO BE REMOVED, BACK TO THE SOURCE.

8. DEMOLITION AND/OR REMOVAL OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN AREAS TO BE REMODELED SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR.

9. WHERE OUTLETS ARE REMOVED IN EXISTING WALL, REMOVE DEVICES, OUTLETS AND WIRING BACK TO PANELBOARD OR BACK TO NEAREST OUTLET WITH OTHER EXISTING LOAD TO REMAIN.

10. WHERE EXISTING CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS ARE TO BE REMOVED AND CONDUIT IS INSTALLED IN GROUND OR

EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE, REMOVE WIRE AND CUT CONDUIT TO BELOW FLOOR, PLUG CONDUIT, PATCH FLOOR AND ABANDON CONDUIT.

11. WHERE ELECTRICAL DEVICES ARE TO BE REMOVED, REMOVE ALL CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS BACK TO SOURCE, TERMINAL CABINETS AND RACKS, PROVIDE BLANK COVER PLATE FOR ABANDONED JUNCTION BOXES.

12. REMOVE ALL CONTROL PANELS, EQUIPMENT RACKS, PULL-BOXES, TERMINAL CABINETS, ETC. FOR SYSTEMS TO BE DEMOLISHED EXCEPT WHERE ANY OF THE EXISTING DEVICES, SYSTEMS, CONSOLES, ETC. ARE TO BE REUSED FOR UPGRADE.

13. PROVIDE BLANK COVER PLATE FOR ALL EMPTY OUTLET BOXES WHERE DEVICES AND/OR CONDUCTORS HAVE BEEN REMOVED AS PART OF THIS CONTRACT.

14. AFTER REMOVAL OF WIREMOLD AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS, PATCH, REPAIR AND PAINT AFFECTED SURFACES TO MATCH EXISTING.

15. EXISTING CONDUIT CAN BE REUSED PROVIDING IT IS CODE COMPLIANT, IS CHECKED FOR CONTINUITY OF GROUND, CLEAN AND MANDREL, AND DOES NOT INTERFERE WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION.

16. REMOVALS AND REPAIRS TO EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK REQUIRED TO AVOID CONFLICTS WITH NEW CONSTRUCTION TO MEET MINIMUM CODE REQUIREMENTS.

LIGHTING LEGEND AND SYMBOLS

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
SN
#
SQUARE POLETOP LED LUMINAIRE. SN INDICATES LUMINAIRE TYPE - REFER TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE, TYPICAL. SUBSCRIPT # REFERS TO CIRCUIT DESIGNATION.

SN
#
POLETOP LED LUMINAIRE. SN INDICATES LUMINAIRE TYPE - REFER TO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE, TYPICAL. SUBSCRIPT # REFERS TO CIRCUIT DESIGNATION.

POWER LEGEND AND SYMBOLS

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
200-Y CONDUIT WIRING DESCRIPTION PER FEEDER SCHEDULE ON OTHER PLAN CONCRETE ELECTRICAL PULL BOX WITH LID APPROPRIATE FOR INSTALLATION LOCATION. LID SHALL BE LABELED "ELECTRICAL" OR "COMM" ACCORDING TO USE.

G ON-SITE STAND-BY GENERATOR SET
L

NE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS)
R:\_PROJECT\2023\23-047 GARDENA CIVIC CENTER LIGHTING PROJECT\23-047 E-FRNTSHT - 2025-02-10 - LUIS MUNGUIA 21-000
San Bernardino, CA 92408
412 E. Vanderbilt Way
Phone: 909.890.3700
Fax: 909.890.3770
Email: [email protected]

SHEET INDEX

SHEET NUMBER SHEET TITLE
E0.1 ELECTRICAL LEGENDS & NOTES
E0.2 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
E0.3 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
E0.4 PANEL SCHEDULES
E1.1 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN
E1.2 PHOTOMETRIC SITE PLAN
E1.3 EM PHOTOMETRIC SITE PLAN
E2.1 ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLANS
E3.1 ELECTRICAL DETAILS
E3.2 ELECTRICAL DETAILS
E3.3 ELECTRICAL DETAILS
E3.4 ELECTRICAL DETAILS
E4.1 TITLE 24 COMPLIANCE FORMS
E4.2 TITLE 24 COMPLIANCE FORMS
SIGNED:02/10/2025
1 142 15
ELECTRICAL LEGENDS & NOTES E0.1
5-2627

1. EQUALS SHALL BE CONSIDERED UPON SUBMITTAL REVIEW AND APPROVAL. PLEASE NOTE THAT IF AN ALTERNATE IS CONSIDERED:
a. THE CONTRACTOR IS COMPLETELY AND SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL ASPECTS OF THE SUBSTITUTION INCLUDING UPDATING CONSTRUCTION DOCUM ENTS, OBTAINING APPROVALS AND PERMITS FROM LOCAL AUTHORITY, AND COORDINATING WITH ALL TRADES TO ENSURE CHANGES TO AFFECTED BUILDING SYSTEM ARE ACCOUNTED FOR AND ACCEPTABLE TO THE ENGINEERING TEAM. CONTRACTOR SHALL ENSURE SUBSTITUTED EQUIPMENT MEETS OR EXCEEDS DESIGN INTENT REGARDING RATINGS, PERFORMANCE, DIMENSIONAL CLEARANCES, PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS (MAX/MIN), WEIGHT LIMITATIONS, AND OTHER ASPECTS, PROVING SUBSTITUTION IS SUITABLE TO THE APPLICATION. ENGINEERS WILL REVIEW THE RATING AND PERFORMANCE OF SUBSTITUTED EQUIPMENT ONLY AND WILL NOT ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBSTITUTION AT ANY LEVEL. b. IF CONTRACTOR CANNOT MAKE SUBSTITUTED EQUIPMENT WORK IN THIS PROJECT, CONTRACTOR SHALL REVERT TO REQUIREMENTS OF PERMITTED CO NSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AT THEIR EXPENSE. c. IT IS UNDERSTOOD BY ALL PARTIES THAT ANY SUBSTITUTIONS OF SPECIFIED PRODUCTS ARE DONE FOR THE PURPOSE OF COST SAVINGS TO THE OWNER. THEREFORE, ANY MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION OR DEVIATIONS PROPOSED BY THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE INCLUDED WITH THE INITIAL BID AND SHALL SHOW A LINE ITEMS CREDIT TO THE OWNER FOR EACH SUBSTITUTION IN LIEU OF SPECIFIED PRODUCTS. d. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A POINT BY POINT PHOTOMETRIC STUDY FOR ALL AREAS WHERE ALTERNATE FIXTURES ARE SUBMITTED. LIGHT LEVE LS WILL BE REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE WITH PROJECT REQUIREMENTS AND BASIS OF DESIGN VALUES.

2. THE FIXTURE SCHEDULE INDICATES GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES AND MANUFACTURERS CATALOG NUMBERS. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO DETERMINE THE CORRECT CEILING CONFIGURATION AND PROVIDE THE FIXTURES WITH ALL NECESSARY TRIMS AND MOUNTING HARDWARE SO THAT BOTH THE CEILING SYSTEM AND THE FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION MATCHES. PROVIDE SEISMIC HANGERS AS REQUIRED.

3. IT SHALL BE CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY THE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES AND TYPE OF CEILING WITH ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN PRIOR TO ANY WORK. SEE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN PRIOR TO ANY WORK. SEE ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATION DRAWING FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS OF WALL MOUNTED FIXTURES.

4. A JUNCTION BOX MUST BE PROVIDED WITH ALL EXIT LIGHTS CONNECTED TO MORE THAN ONE SET OF CONDUCTORS UNLESS THE EXIT LIGHT FIXTU RE IS FURNISHED WITH AN APPROVED OUTLET BOX FOR THROUGH WIRING.

5. A COMPLETE TITLE 24 COMPLIANT LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM SHALL BE PROVIDED TO CONTROL ALL INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS. REFER TO LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAMS, SCHEDULES AND DETAILS.

6. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED MOUNTING HARDWARE ANCHORAGE AND SUPPORTS TO INSTALL LIGHTING FIXTURES.

7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE LIGHTING SYSTEM AS PART OF THIS BUILDING CONTRACT.

8. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY THAT THE FIXTURE DRIVER VOLTAGE MATCHES THE CIRCUIT VOLTAGE SUPPLYING F IXTURE PRIOR TO ORDERING.

9. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY BALLAST/DRIVER DIMMING CONFIGURATION IS COMPATIBLE WITH CONTROLS BEING PROVIDED PRIOR TO ORDERING FIXTURES. EX. 2 WIRE, 3 WIRE, 4 WIRE, 0-10V, CAT 5, ETC.

10. LED LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH IES, NFPA, UL, AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, AND AS SPECIFIED.

11. LED LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE REDUCTION OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES (ROHS)-COMPLIANT.

12. LED DRIVERS SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING FEATURES UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED:
x MINIMUM EFFICIENCY: 85% AT FULL LOAD.
x MINIMUM OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: -20 DEG C. (-4 DEG F.) x INPUT VOLTAGE: 120 - 277V (±10%) AT 60 HZ., UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. x INTEGRAL SHORT CIRCUIT, OPEN CIRCUIT, AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION. x POWER FACTOR: >=0.95.
x TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION: <=20%.
x COMPLY WITH FCC 47 CFR PART 15.

15. LED MODULES SHALL INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING FEATURES UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED:
x COMPLY WITH IES LM-79 AND LM-80 REQUIREMENTS.
x MINIMUM CRI 80 AND COLOR TEMPERATURE 4000K UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE. x MINIMUM RATED LIFE: 50,000 HOURS PER IES L70.
x LIGHT OUTPUT LUMENS AS INDICATED IN THE LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE.

25. ALL FIXTURES MOUNTED OUTDOORS SHALL BE LISTED FOR WET LOCATION.

26. ALL REMOTE DRIVERS SHALL BE CONCEALED ABOVE CEILING OR PLACED IN A REMOTE LOCATION WHEN ATTIC SPACE IS NOT AVAILABLE.

LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE NOTES
2 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
TYPE VOLTS WATTAGE LAMPS FIXTURE DESCRIPTION MFR. CATALOG #MOUNTING SYMBOLNOTESLUMENS 70 LED
4000K POLES1 240
EQ123-1-E070LDL-T4-
40K-FM4-HLMSPC-FM
POLE: BD3STLS10-7-
GFI20

COLOR/FINISH TO BE

SELECTED BY CITY'S

REPRESENTATIVE

ANP LIGHTING
S2 120
S3 120
POLE
DSX1LED-P2-40K
T4M-BLC4-MVOLT-PIR-
SPA
POLE: SSS-18'-DM19

LITHONIA
IN-GRADE LED FLOODLIGHT FIXTURE WITH WIDE BEAM.

FIXTURE TO BE AIMED TOWARDS TREE.

UOD-50174-W-W35-
120-YKELIGMAN
S4 120 IN-GRADE

LED RECESSED LINEAR SIGN RGBW SPOT
LIGHT. PROVIDE WITH RGBW CONTROLLER

LEAD CABLES AND ALL ACCESSORIES FOR A
CONTINUOUS RUN.

JE-R-DMX-SP-48-
RGBW-E
DMX CONTROLLER:

TGMXSLESAU9

TARGETTI

POLE TOP LED FIXTURE WITH INTEGRAL

MOTION SENSOR AND GFCI RECEPTACLE
OUTLET. FIXTURE MOUNTED AT 10'-0" A.F.G.

LED
3500K
LED
RGBW
68 50
41 8,983
9,909
5,433
2,655

COLOR/FINISH TO BE

SELECTED BY CITY'S

REPRESENTATIVE
LED
4000K
S2A 120 POLE

SQUARE SINGLE-HEAD POLE TOP LED

FIXTURE WITH INTEGRAL MOTION SENSOR &
LEFT CORNER CUTOFF. MOUNT FIXTURE AT
18'-0" A.F.G.

DSX1LED-P2-40K

LCCO-MVOLT-PIR-SPA
POLE: SSS-18'-DM19
LITHONIA68 7,165

COLOR/FINISH TO BE

SELECTED BY CITY'S

REPRESENTATIVE
LED
4000K

COLOR/FINISH TO BE

SELECTED BY CITY'S

REPRESENTATIVE

COLOR/FINISH TO BE

SELECTED BY CITY'S

REPRESENTATIVE
ASTRONOMICAL TIMECLOCK DETAILS 1
S2B 120 POLE

SQUARE SINGLE-HEAD POLE TOP LED

FIXTURE WITH INTEGRAL MOTION SENSOR &
RIGHT CORNER CUTOFF. MOUNT FIXTURE AT
18'-0" A.F.G.

DSX1LED-P2-40K

RCCO-MVOLT-PIR-SPA
POLE: SSS-18'-DM19
LITHONIA68 7,165

COLOR/FINISH TO BE

SELECTED BY CITY'S

REPRESENTATIVE
LED
4000K

SQUARE SINGLE-HEAD POLE TOP LED

FIXTURE WITH INTEGRAL MOTION SENSOR &
BACK LIGHT CONTROL. MOUNT FIXTURE AT
18'-0" A.F.G.

SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS AND RELAY SCHEDULE
S5 120 18.5 1,600 LED
4000K SURFACE LITHONIA

CONTRACTOR TO SWITCH
FIXTURE TO 4000K

TEMPERATURE AND
DUSK-TO-DAWN OPERATION.

WALL MOUNTED LED FIXTURE WITH INTEGRAL
PHOTOCELL MOUNTED AT 5'-6" A.F.G.

CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE MOUNTING IN
FIELD TO BE AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE.

OLWPLED-SWW2-120-
80CRI-PE-DBB
R:\_PROJECT\2023\23-047 GARDENA CIVIC CENTER LIGHTING PROJECT\23-047 E-LUMSCHED - 2025-02-10 - LUIS MUNGUIA 21-000
San Bernardino, CA 92408
412 E. Vanderbilt Way
Phone: 909.890.3700
Fax: 909.890.3770
Email: [email protected]
SIGNED:02/10/2025
3 15
LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE E0.2
5-2627

GENERAL NOTES

1. REFER TO 'GENERAL NOTES' ON ELECTRICAL LEGENDS AND NOTES SHEET FOR WIRING METHODS, MATERIALS, AND REQUIREMENTS.

2. ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS, PANELBOARDS AND TRANSFORMERS SHALL BE OF THE SAME MANUFACTURER.

3. ALL NEW SWITCHBOARDS DISTRIBUTION SECTIONS SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH

FULL HEIGHT VERTICAL BUSSING TO ACCOMMODATE MAXIMUM UTILIZATION OF SPACE FOR DEVICES.

4. ALL GROUND CONNECTIONS SHALL BE CADWELD.

5. ALL PANELBOARDS SHALL BE FULLY RATED FOR THE AVAILABLE FAULT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

6. THE FEEDER LENGTHS SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS ARE FOR CALCULATION PURPOSES ONLY AND ARE NOT VALID FOR BIDDING.

7. GROUND-FAULT PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR SOLIDLY GROUNDED WYE SERVICES OF 480 VOLTS FOR EACH SERVICE AND FEEDER DISCONNECTS RATED 1000 AMPERES OR MORE PER CEC 230.95.

8. ALL SWITCHBOARDS, SWITCHGEAR AND PANELBOARDS AT OTHER THAN

DWELLING UNITS SHALL BE LEGIBLY MARKED IN THE FIELD WITH THE MAXIMUM AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT PER CEC 110.24. THE FIELD MARKING(S) SHALL

INCLUDE THE DATE THE FAULT-CURRENT CALCULATION WAS PERFORMED AND BE OF SUFFICIENT DURABILITY TO WITHSTAND THE ENVIRONMENT INVOLVED.

THE CALCULATION SHALL BE DOCUMENTED AND MADE AVAILABLE TO THOSE

AUTHORIZED TO DESIGN, INSTALL, INSPECT, MAINTAIN, OR OPERATE THE SYSTEM. WHEN MODIFICATIONS TO THE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OCCUR

THAT AFFECT THE MAXIMUM AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AT THE SERVICE, THE

MAXIMUM AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT SHALL BE VERIFIED OR RECALCULATED

AS NECESSARY TO ENSURE THE SERVICE EQUIPMENT RATINGS ARE

SUFFICIENT FOR THE MAXIMUM AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AT THE LINE TERMINALS OF THE EQUIPMENT. THE REQUIRED FIELD MARKING(S) IN 110.24(A)

SHALL BE ADJUSTED TO REFLECT THE NEW LEVEL OF MAXIMUM AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT.

9. EQUIPMENT DATA AND CONFIGURATIONS SHOWN ON THE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM PROVIDE GENERAL EQUIPMENT INFORMATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL

REVIEW ELECTRICAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS TO VERIFY ALL EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATED DESIGN INFORMATION. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR

PROVIDING ALL NECESSARY COMPONENTS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL INSTALLATION. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN DESCRIPTIONS,

SPECIFICATIONS, AND EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE TO BE PRESENTED TO THE

ENGINEER OF RECORD PRIOR TO COMPLETION OF THE BID PROCESS FOR CLARIFICATION. NO EQUIPMENT SHALL BE ORDERED UNTIL DISCREPANCIES ARE RESOLVED THROUGH A FORMAL RFI PROCESS.

10. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SWITCHBOARD SHOP DRAWINGS TO SERVING UTILITY COMPANY PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF EQUIPMENT. CONTRACTOR

SHALL SECURE CONFIRMATION THAT THE PROPOSED SWITCHBOARD COMPLIES WITH ALL ELECTRICAL UTILITY COMPANY REGULATIONS.

11. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A ¼"=1'-0"

SCALE DRAWING WHICH REFERENCES ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ROOMS AND EQUIPMENT. DRAWING SHALL CLEARLY IDENTIFY ADEQUATE SPACE IS

PROVIDED IN ELECTRICAL ROOMS TO ACCOMMODATE THE INSTALLATION OF

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WHILE MAINTAINING ALL REQUIRED CODE CLEARANCES. ALL SUBMITTALS NOT ACCOMPANIED BY SCALED DRAWING WILL BE REJECTED AS INCOMPLETE.

12. CONTRACTOR SHALL CONDUCT, WITH ASSISTANCE OF SWITCHGEAR

MANUFACTURER OR LICENSED ENGINEER, AN ELECTRICAL HAZARD ANALYSIS

CONSISTING OF AN ARC FLASH, SHORT CIRCUIT, AND COORDINATION STUDY TO

DETERMINE APPROPRIATE LEVELS OF PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) AS REQUIRED BY NFPA 70E AND IEEE STD 1584, AND TO ENSURE PROPER

COORDINATION (INCLUDING GROUND FAULT COORDINATION) EXISTS BETWEEN

ALL OVER-CURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES SHOWN ON SINGLE-LINE DIAGRAM ADDITIONALLY:

12.1. STUDY SHALL INCLUDE ALL PORTIONS OF ELECTRICAL SINGLE-LINE DIAGRAM. NORMAL SYSTEM CONNECTIONS AND THOSE THAT RESULT IN

MAXIMUM FAULT CONDITION SHALL BE ADEQUATELY COVERED IN THE STUDY. PERFORM STUDY WITH THE AID OF A COMPUTER PROGRAM, SKM CAPTOR, OR EQUAL. STUDY SHALL IDENTIFY SELECTIVE COORDINATION SUCH THAT DEVICE CLOSEST TO FAULT WILL TRIP FIRST. GROUND FAULT

PORTION OF THE STUDY SHALL DEMONSTRATE COORDINATION OF MAIN

BREAKER AND ANY FEEDER GROUND FAULT DEVICES WITH DOWNSTREAM CIRCUIT BREAKERS 30A AND LESS.

12.2. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO RECOMMEND SETTINGS OF ALL

DEVICES AND TO INCLUDE GROUND FAULT SETTINGS NECESSARY TO ACHIEVE SYSTEM COORDINATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD ADJUST

DEVICES ACCORDINGLY UTILIZING A QUALIFIED MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE.

12.3. DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE OF THE PROJECT ALL GROUND FAULT RELAYS SHALL BE SET AT SHORTEST AVAILABLE TIME DELAY.

12.4. RESULTS OF COORDINATION STUDY SHALL BE SUBMITTED AS PART OF

OVERALL SWITCHGEAR SUBMITTAL AND SHALL INCLUDE PROTECTIVE

DEVICE TIME VERSUS CURRENT COORDINATION CURVES, GROUPING APPROPRIATE DEVICES TOGETHER. TABULATIONS OF RELAY AND CIRCUIT

BREAKER TRIP SETTINGS, FUSE SELECTION, AND COMMENTARY
REGARDING SAME.

12.5. A GROUND FAULT SYSTEM TEST SHALL BE CONDUCTED BY AN

INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY PER NEC (CEC-WHERE ADOPTED)
230.95(C). GROUND FAULT SYSTEM TEST SHALL BE PERFORMED IN PRESENCE OF LOCAL AHJ. VERIFICATION OF DEVICE SETTINGS PER THE

COORDINATION STUDY SHALL BE PERFORMED BY SAME INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY. GROUND FAULT TEST RESULTS SHALL BE DELIVERED TO ENGINEER OR RECORD.

12.6. PERFORM ARC FLASH ANALYSIS TO DETERMINE FLASH BOUNDARY, FLASH

HAZARD CATEGORY, PPE REQUIREMENTS, AND MINIMUM ARC
RATING(CAL/SQUARE CM). ABOVE INFORMATION SHALL BE INDICATED AT

EACH ARC FLASH SOURCE ON A NEC (CEC WHERE ADOPTED) COMPLIANT ARC PLASH HAZARD LABEL(S) AS MANUFACTURED BY BRADY.

13. GROUND ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, BRANCH CIRCUITS, FEEDERS, PANEL AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, ELECTRICAL SERVICES, ETC. PER ADOPTED NEC ARTICLES 250.

14. ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (I.E. SWITCHGEAR, TRANSFORMERS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, PANELBOARDS, DISCONNECT SWITCHES, ETC.) SHALL

BE PROVIDED WITH A PHENOLIC NAMEPLATE WITH ENGRAVED LETTERS PER SPECIFICATIONS. ALL NAMEPLATES SHALL BE FASTENED WITH A MINIMUM OF TWO (2) MACHINE SCREWS. NO SELF ADHESIVE NAMEPLATES ARE ALLOWED.

15. ANY FLOOR-STANDING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (I.E. INVERTERS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, SWITCHBOARDS, ATS SWITCHES, MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS, ETC.)

WHICH ARE MOUNTED AT/BELOW GRADE AND/OR SUSCEPTIBLE TO WATER DAMAGE SHALL BE MOUNTED ON A MINIMUM 4" HIGH HOUSEKEEPING PAD WHICH EXTENDS 4" BEYOND EQUIPMENT IN ALL DIRECTIONS.

16. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO INCLUDE IN BID ALL ASSOCIATED COSTS FOR

THIRD PARTY TESTING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, GROUND FAULT, CONDUCTORS, ETC.

17. ALL CONDUCTOR TERMINATIONS SHALL BE TIGHTENED TO MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS USING AN APPROVED MEANS.

18. FOR ANY SERVICE WITH MORE THAN ONE SERVICE DISCONNECT, BUT NO MORE

THAN SIX DISCONNECTS, EACH SERVICE DISCONNECT SHALL BE LOCATED IN A SEPARATE ENCLOSURE, PANELBOARD OR SWITCHBOARD SECTION (230.71(B)).

CONSTRUCTION NOTES

SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
1000A
UGPS 23
G
N
200A
2P

INCOMING POWER

UTILITY SERVICE
100A
3P

MAIN SWITCHBOARD 'MSC'
1000A 480Y/277V 3Ø 4W 42KAIC NEMA 3R
1 400A
3P

PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING SPACE

PROVISIONS FOR FUTURE
ELECTRICAL LOADS:
(1) 400A 3P
(3) 200A 3P
(4) 100A 3P
L=
V.D.=
150'

0.31%
200-S
TRANS. T-1
L=
V.D.=
70'

0.01%
100-D
TRANS. T-2
L=
V.D.=
10'

0.03%
400-BX
AFC:

AIC:

PEDESTAL
'PED'
7,533
10,000
L=
V.D.=
240'

0.78%
400-BX
AFC:

AIC:

PANEL
'P1'
6782
10,000
L=
V.D.=
20'

0.01%
225-YX
NEMA 3R
4-GEC
4-BJC
4 3-GEC
4-BJC
5 400A
UGPS

EXISTING SERVICE
GROUND

REMOVE INCOMING

POWER UTILITY SERVICE
1 G
N
(E) DIST. BOARD 'DC'
400A 480Y/277V 3Ø 4W

EXISTING
2 (E)
100A
3P

EXISTING
3 (E)
150A
3P

EXISTING
CU-1

EXISTING
4 EXISTING
CU-2

EXISTING
5 (E)
50A
3P

EXISTING

SUPPLY FAN

EXISTING
X
L=
V.D.=
150'

1.41%
400-Y
2TRANSFORMER & FEEDER SCHEDULES
1 EXISTING INCOMING UTILITY SERVICE TO BE REMOVED. COORDINATE

WITH THE UTILITY COMPANY FOR THE REMOVAL OF METER AND
DE-ENERGIZING EQUIPMENT.

EXISTING SERVICE TO BE BACKFED FROM NEW SERVICE. CONTRACTOR

TO USE UGPS AS PULLBOX FOR NEW FEEDERS AND PROVIDE ALL
ASSOCIATED CONDUIT, CONDUCTORS, CONNECTIONS ETC. FOR EXISTING SWITCHBOARD TO BE ENERGIZED FROM NEW SERVICE.

PROVIDE ADDITIONAL (2)3" AND (3)2" SPARE CONDUITS AND STUB IN MECHANICAL ROOM CEILING SPACE.

BOND TO (2) DRIVEN GROUND RODS SPACED SIX FEET APART, SIZED PER CEC TABLE 250.66.

GEC TO BUILDING OR STRUCTURE GROUND ELECTRODE SYSTEM PER NEC 250.30(A)(4), OR BOND TO BLDG. STEEL OR METAL WATER PIPE IN VICINITY PER NEC 250.68(C).

PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT BREAKER IN EXISTING DISTRIBUTION BOARD. TYPE TO MATCH EXISTING. AIC RATING TO BE GREATER THAN AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT.

TRANSFORMERS SHALL HAVE A DISCONNECTING MEANS LOCATED EITHER IN SIGHT OF THE TRANSFORMER OR IN A REMOTE LOCATION PER 450.14.

WHERE LOCATED IN A REMOTE LOCATION, THE DISCONNECTING MEANS SHALL BE LOCKABLE OPEN IN ACCORDANCE WITH 110.25, AND ITS LOCATION SHALL BE FIELD MARKED ON THE TRANSFORMER.
1#3/0 CU. G.E.C. TO CONC. ENCASED ELECTRODE OR GROUND RODS PER 250.52 AND 250.66. PROVIDE CU. BOND TO EACH OF THE FOLLOWING:

BLDG. STEEL, C.W. SERVICE, OTHER METAL PIPING SYSTEMS PER 250.104, SIZE PER 250.102.
1#2/0 CU. BOND TO DRIVEN GROUND ROD, SIZED PER EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS NEC TABLE 250.122.

PROVIDE AND INSTALL ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER SQUARE D MODEL# MODEL #LA400R.
(1)#6 C.U. G.E.C. TO GROUNDS RODS AND/OR CONCRETE ENCASED ELECTRODE AND (1)#6 BOND TO METALLIC COLD WATER SUPPLY PIPE AT UNIT ENTRY PER NEC 250-52(A) AND 250-104(A). DO NOT BOND NEUTRAL

AND GROUND TERMINALS INSIDE SWITCHBOARD OR PANELBOARD (NO GROUND LOOP).

PROVIDE NEW ASTRONOMIC TIMECLOCK. INTERMATIC #ET8415C OR APPROVED EQUAL.

CONTRACTOR SHALL BUS TAP NEW TRANSFER SWITCH FEEDERS TO MAIN SERVICE BUS. CONTRACTOR IS TO PROVIDE CERTIFIED MANUFACTURER

APPROVED UL LISTED BUS KIT, OR BY A THIRD PARTY CITY
CERTIFIED/RECOGNIZED TESTING AGENCY. CONTRACTOR SHALL
COORDINATE WITH MAIN SWITCHBOARD MANUFACTURER AS NECESSARY.

PROVIDE (1) 1"C. UNDERGROUND WITH CIRCUITS FROM PANEL AS SHOWN FOR WATER HEATER JACKET, CONTROL PANEL AND BATTERY CHARGER.

CONTRACTOR SHALL PERMANENTLY MARK SERVICE DISONNECT
PER CEC 230.70(B).

PROVIDE EMERGENCY OFF PUSHBUTTON 'EPO' NEAR GENERATOR. REFER TO SITE PLAN FOR LOCATION.

PROVIDE SPARE CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR LOAD BANK MAINTENANCE. 1 2
2 SETSTYPELABEL PHASE GROUND CONDUIT
30-Y 1 3 # 10 3/4"
1 3 # 8 1"
1 3 # 6
1 3 # 6
1 3 # 4
1 3 # 3
13 # 2
13 # 1
13 # 1
1 1
1 1
1 1
3 # 250 KCM
1 2
40-Y
50-Y
60-Y
70-Y
80-Y
90-Y
100-Y
125-Y
150-Y
175-Y
200-Y
225-Y
250-Y
300-Y
350-Y
400-Y 400A-4W
350A-4W
300A-4W
250A-4W
225A-4W
200A-4W
175A-4W
150A-4W
125A-4W
100A-4W
80A-4W
60A-4W
50A-4W
30A-4W
40A-4W
70A-4W
90A-4W
3 # 1/0
3 # 2/0
3 # 3/0
3 # 4/0
3 # 350 KCM
3 # 500 KCM
1"
1"
1"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1 # 2
1 # 2
1 # 4
1 # 4
1 # 4
1 # 6
1 # 6
1 # 6
1 # 6
1 # 8
1 # 8
1 # 10
1 # 10
1 # 10
1 # 10
1 # 8
1 # 8
4"
3"
2 1/2"
2 1/2"
2"
2"

NEUTRAL
1 # 10
1 # 10
1 # 6
1 # 6
1 # 4
1 # 3
1 # 2
1 # 1
1 # 1
1 # 250 KCM
1 # 1/0
1 # 2/0
1 # 3/0
1 # 4/0
1 # 350 KCM
1 # 500 KCM
600V FEEDER SCHEDULE 3Ø 4W
NOTE:

ALL CONDUCTOR SIZES ARE BASED ON TYPE THHN COPPER CONDUCTOR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. THE AMPACITY OF CONDUCTORS SHALL BE BASED ON THE TERMINALS NOT TO EXCEED 60°C FOR CONDUCTOR SIZE #14 THROUGH #1 AWG OR 75°C FOR CONDUCTOR SIZE OVER #1 AWG AS PER NEC 110.14(C). 3"3 # 3/0 1 # 3/0
1000-Y 1000A-4W 3 3 # 500 KCM 1 # 2/0 4"1 # 500 KCM
20-D
600V FEEDER SCHEDULE 3Ø 3W

SETSTYPELABEL PHASE GROUND NEUTRAL CONDUIT
1 3 # 12
30-D 13 # 1 0
13 # 8
13 # 6
13 # 6
13 # 4
13 # 3
13 # 2
13 # 1
40-D
50-D
60-D
70-D
80-D
90-D
100-D
20A-3W
100A-3W
80A-3W
60A-3W
50A-3W
30A-3W
40A-3W
70A-3W
90A-3W
1 # 12
1 # 8
1 # 8
1 # 10
1 # 10
1 # 10
1 # 10
1 # 8
1 # 8
3/4"
3/4"
1"
1"
1"
1"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NOTE:

SETSTYPELABEL PHASE GROUND CONDUIT
30-BX 1 2 # 10 3/4"
1 2 # 6
1 2 # 1
1 50-BX
100-BX
200-BX 200A-4W
100A-4W
50A-4W
30A-4W
2 # 3/0
1"
1 # 4
1 # 6
1 # 8

NEUTRAL
1 # 10
1 # 6
1 # 1
1 # 3/0
600V FEEDER SCHEDULE 1Ø 3W - XFMR SEC
NOTE:

GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SIZED PER TABLE 250.102(C)(1) FOR SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS. 1 # 8
1 2 # 470-BX 70A-4W 1-1/4"1 # 81 # 4
2"
1-1/2"
1400-BX 400A-4W 2 # 600 KCM 1 # 600 KCM 1 # 1/0 3 1/2"

SETSTYPELABEL PHASE GROUND CONDUIT
1 1
200-YX
225-YX 225A-4W
200A-4W 3 # 3/0
3 # 4/0
1 # 4 2 1/2"

NEUTRAL
1 # 3/0
1 # 4/0
600V FEEDER SCHEDULE 3Ø 4W - XFMR SEC
1 # 2 2 1/2"
NOTE:

GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SIZED PER TABLE 250.102(C)(1) FOR SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS. 600V FEEDER SCHEDULE 1Ø 2W

SETSTYPELABEL PHASE GROUND NEUTRAL CONDUIT
1 2 # 6
1 2 # 6
50-S
60-S 60A-2W
50A-2W
1 # 10
1 # 10 1"
1"
N/A
N/A
NOTE:

ALL CONDUCTOR SIZES ARE BASED ON TYPE THHN COPPER CONDUCTOR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. THE AMPACITY OF CONDUCTORS SHALL BE BASED ON THE TERMINALS NOT TO EXCEED 60°C FOR CONDUCTOR SIZE #14 THROUGH #1 AWG OR 75°C FOR CONDUCTOR SIZE OVER #1 AWG AS PER NEC 110.14(C). 30-S 1 2 # 1030A-2W 1 # 10 3/4"N/A
1200-S 200A-2W 2 # 3/0 1 # 6 2"N/A
G.E.C. SCHEDULE
SERVICE/O.C.P.D.LABEL CONDUCTOR CONDUIT
#6
#4
1-GEC
2-GEC
3-GEC
4-GEC > 400A
225A-400A
110A-200A
60A-100A
#1/0
#3/0
3/4"
1"
1"
NOTE:

ALL GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR SIZES ARE BASED ON BARE

COPPER CONDUCTOR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED AND SIZE PER CEC TABLE 250.66.
1-1/4"

BONDING CONDUCTOR SCHEDULE
SERVICE/O.C.P.D.LABEL CONDUCTOR
#61-BJC
6-BJC
8-BJC
10-BJC 1000A
450A-600A
800A
70A-100A
#3/0
#4/0
#4/0
NOTE:

ALL MAIN/SYSTEM/SUPPLY SIDE BONDING JUMPER CONDUCTOR SIZES ARE

BASED ON TYPE BARE COPPER CONDUCTOR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED AND SIZED PER CEC TABLE 250.102(C)(1).
2-BJC 125A-200A #4
4-BJC 225A-400A #1/0
#8BJC 30A-60A
4 200A
3P
AFC:

AIC:

PANEL
'L1'
22,281
42,000
200-Y

EXISTING
PANEL
LCA
(E)
100A
3P
(E)
100A
3P

EXISTING
TRANS. T1
#ZYA102-000257
7 3
3 4
5 6
L=
V.D.=
100'

1.15%
90-D
100AS
85AT
3P
90A
3P

WATER HEATER
6 6
7 8
8 1000A
3P
L
NE
1000-Y
1000-Y
G
3P
1000A
GENERAC 600KW (750KVA)

OPTIONAL STANDBY GENERATOR
MODEL# SD0600KG22181D18PPLY2
480Y/277V 3Ø 4W
WITH 48HR. BASE TANK
WEATHERPROOF LEVEL 2 SOUND

ATTENUATED ENCLOSURE AND DIESEL

PARTICULATE FILTER

CONTROL CABLING
PER MFG, IN 1"C.

P2-1
P2-2,4
9 REMOTE

ANUNCIATOR
PANEL

CONTROL CABLING
PER MFG, IN 1"C.

GENERAC
MODEL# G0098511
1000-Y
5 30A
2P
PANEL
'P2'
L=
V.D.=
30'

0.13%
30-S
1-GEC
BJC
4 EATON MODEL#P48G11S1526CUS6
15KVA MINI-POWER ZONE
1 2P
400A
10 10
T-3
11 11
11 G
N
(E) 100A 120/240V 1Ø 3W

SERVICE PANEL
(LOCATED AT PARKING LOT)

EXISTING

EXISTING
PANEL
P

EXISTING SERVICE GROUND

EXISTING INCOMING

OVERHEAD POWER

UTILITY SERVICE
(E)
70A
2P

POLE-MOUNTED METER/MAIN SERVICE

AT PARKING LOT

SCE METER
#222011-161667

EXISTING

TIMECLOCK

LIGHTING CIRCUIT
12 12

LIGHTING

INVERTER
'INV'

LIGHTING CIRCUIT
82 FLA 39 FLA 15HP
7 EXISTING
CU-1

EXISTING

53.7 FLA
(E)
400A
3P
(E)
90A
3P
8 (E)
100A
3P

EXISTING
ELEV

EXISTING
25HP
13 13
14 14
15 15

SWITCHBOARD SIGNAGE

WHERE REMOVAL OF A GROUNDING OR BONDING CONNECTION IN

NORMAL POWER SOURCE EQUIPMENT INTERRUPTS THE

GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR CONNECTION TO THE

ALTERNATE POWER SOURCE(S) GROUNDED CONDUCTOR, A

WARNING SIGN SHALL BE INSTALLED AT THE NORMAL POWER
SOURCE EQUIPMENT STATING:

WARNING

SHOCK HAZARD EXISTS IF GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR

OR BONDING JUMPER CONNECTION IN THIS EQUIPMENT IS
REMOVED WHILE ALTERNATE SOURCE(S) IS ENERGIZED.

THE WARNING SIGN(S) SHALL COMPLY WITH CEC 110.21(B).

EPO
16 16
17 3P
500A
9 GENERAC
TX611 SERIES
ATS-1 1000A 4P
480Y/277V 3Ø 4W
NEMA 3R
42,000 A.I.C.
17 R:\_PROJECT\2023\23-047 GARDENA CIVIC CENTER LIGHTING PROJECT\23-047 E-SLD - 2025-02-10 - LUIS MUNGUIA 21-000
San Bernardino, CA 92408
412 E. Vanderbilt Way
Phone: 909.890.3700
Fax: 909.890.3770
Email: [email protected]
SIGNED:02/10/2025
4 15
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM E0.3
5-2627

R:\_PROJECT\2023\23-047 GARDENA CIVIC CENTER LIGHTING PROJECT\23-047 E-SLD - 2025-02-10 - LUIS MUNGUIA 21-000
San Bernardino, CA 92408
412 E. Vanderbilt Way
Phone: 909.890.3700
Fax: 909.890.3770
Email: [email protected]
SIGNED:02/10/2025
5 15
PANEL SCHEDULES E0.4
5-2627

FIRE STATION
162ND STREET
COMMUNITY BLDG.

CITY HALL

FIRE STATION

POLICE STATION
MAIN SWBD. 'MSC'
3 44
4 4
(E) UTILITY POLE
6 6
6 6
6 6

SURFACE MOUNTED PULLBOX
7 8
8 'PED'
9 1
3 3
3 3
1 1
3 (E) DIST. BOARD 'DC'

IN MEZZANINE
8 4
PED-2,4
PED-6,8
PED-10,12
PED-5,7
PED-9,11
PED-20,22
10 10
10 10
10 10
10 'INV'
9 1
11 4
PED-1,3
2 13
10 12
1212
12 12
13 13
13 15
15 13
16 13
16 DMX CONTROLLER
13 13
1313
13 14
14 14
14 14
14 14
14 20
2020
20 20
19 13
13 22
11 12
25 17 11
18 718

CONCRETE

ASPHALT

CONCRETE

ASPHALT

CONCRETE
(TYP.)

LANDSCAPE

CONCRETE
(TYP.)

LANDSCAPE

CONCRETE
(TYP.)
26 27
(E) UTILITY POLE
#4932101E
(E) UTILITY VAULT 25
27 24

DEMOLITION NOTES GENERAL NOTES

1. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MUST OBTAIN APPROVED CONSTRUCTION

DRAWINGS FROM THE RESPECTIVE UTILITY COMPANIES AND INCLUDE ALL MATERIAL AND WORK AS INDICATED THEREON IN THIS BID PRICE. IF

UTILITY DRAWINGS ARE NOT AVAILABLE WHEN BIDS ARE SUBMITTED, SO INDICATE AND ADVISE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER OF RECORD ACCORDINGLY.

2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF UTILITY

PANELS, CONDUIT, AND TRANSFORMER WITH RESPECTIVE UTILITY COMPANIES PRIOR TO START OF ANY SITE WORK.

3. ALL UTILITY SERVICES SHALL BE INSTALLED PER THE UTILITY COMPANY REQUIREMENTS. VERIFY FINAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS WITH UTILITY COMPANY SERVICE PLANNERS.

4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSPECT AND VERIFY ALL FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF UTILITY SERVICES.

5. COORDINATE TRENCH ROUTING AND EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS AND NEW WORK.

6. UTILITY SERVICE INFORMATION SHOWN IS FOR BIDDING PURPOSES ONLY.

ACTUAL CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM THE APPROPRIATE UTILITY COMPANY REPRESENTATIVE.

7. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE UTILITY COMPANY

REPRESENTATIVE TO ESTABLISH PRE-CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION,

OBTAIN ALL NECESSARY METERS AND/OR APPROVALS, AND SCHEDULE UTILITY WORK TO COORDINATE WITH THE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE.

8. ALL SITE BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING SHALL BE #10 AWG. OR LARGER.

9. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXISTING BUILDING FOOTING PRIOR TO

INSTALLATION OF STUB-UP CONDUITS FOR NEW WALL MOUNTED
JUNCTION BOX TO AVOID ANY INTERFERENCE.

10. CONTRACTOR SHALL UTILIZE 'GPR' GROUND PENETRATING RADAR TO

SURVEY AND TRACE ALL EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITY LINES IN AREAS WHERE NEW TRENCHING IS PLANNED. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT "GPR" REPORT TO PROJECT MANAGER FOR REVIEWING PRIOR TO
TRENCHING.

11. ALL POWER UTILITY WORK SHALL BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THESE DRAWINGS AND THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SERVING UTILITY COMPANY.

IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO CONTACT THE

SERVING UTILITY TO RECEIVE COMPLETE INFORMATION ON THEIR REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO THE SUBMISSION OF THE BID. THE ACT OF

SUBMITTING THE BID SHALL CONSTITUTE ACCEPTANCE OF FULL

RESPONSIBILITY BY THE CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL SERVICE IN

COMPLIANCE WITH THE SERVING UTILITY AND THE CONTRACT
DOCUMENTS.

12. ALL SITE UNDERGROUND CONDUIT TO BE 1" MIN. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

13. SUPPORT CONDUIT(S) EVERY 10'-0" AND WITHIN 3'-0" OF ANY JUNCTION BOX OR TERMINATION.

14. CONTACT INFORMATION FOR UTILITY COMPANIES IS AS FOLLOWS:

POWER: SCE 310-783-9315

15. CONTRACTOR IS TO CONTACT UTILITY INSPECTOR (LISTED ON FINAL

UTILITY APPROVED PLANS) TO SCHEDULE A PRE-CONSTRUCTION
MEETING PRIOR TO ALL UTILITY CONSTRUCTION.

16. CONTRACTOR IS TO TRANSITION FROM NONMETALLIC CONDUIT TO RIGID STEEL CONDUIT AFTER RISING ABOVE GROUND LEVEL. SWEEPS SHALL BE SCHEDULE 80 PVC OR PVC COATED RIGID STEEL.

17. CONTRACTOR IS TO TAKE SPECIAL CARE NOT TO DAMAGE PLANTS OR TREE ROOTS WHEN TRENCHING IN BEDDING OR TREE ROOT AREA. ANY

DAMAGED PLANTS TO BE REPLACED/REPAIRED AT CONTRACTOR'S
EXPENSE.

18. EXPOSED CONDUITS ARE NOT ALLOWED WHERE CONCEALED METHODS ARE AVAILABLE. ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT (INDOOR AND OUTDOOR) AND

SUPPORTS SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH SUPPORTING SURFACE WHEN ALLOWED. CONDUIT ROUTING SHALL BE IN A NEAT AND ORDERLY

FASHION AND RUN PARALLEL AND PERPENDICULAR TO EXPOSED
STRUCTURE. COORDINATE ROUTING OF EXPOSED CONDUIT WITH CITY REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

UNDERGROUND PULLSECTION PER POWER UTILITY SERVICE
REQUIREMENTS. SEE SINGLELINE DIAGRAM(S) FOR FURTHER
INFORMATION. PROVIDE MINIMUM CLEARANCES AS REQUIRED BY THE SERVICE UTILITY COMPANY.

POWER UTILITY SLAB BOX (8'X10'). VERIFY SECONDARY/PRIMARY HANDHOLE REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE GROUNDING, PRIMARY SERVICE TO

POINT OF CONNECTION TO POWER UTILITY COMPANY, AND SECONDARY

SERVICE TO MAIN SERVICE SWITCHBOARD, PER UTILITY COMPANY REQUIREMENTS. ALL WORK TO BE DONE FROM UTILITY CO. APPROVED PLANS.

EXISTING METER/PANEL AND TIMECLOCK FEEDING PARKING LOT LIGHTING FIXTURES.

PROVIDE AND INSTALL SPIDER BOX. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION WITH CITY'S REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO ANY WORK.

PROVIDE MINIMUM 4'-0" LEVEL CLEARANCE IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, PER NEC 110.26.

NEW WP RECEPTACLE OUTLET TO BE PROVIDED IN POLE AND TO BE PROVIDED WITH LOCKABLE COVER.

SURFACE MOUNT NEW CONDUITS TO EXISTING CONCRETE WALL.

SUPPORT CONDUIT EVERY 10'-0" AND WITHIN 3'-0" OF ANY JUNCTION BOX OR TERMINATIONS.

NEW WP RECEPTACLE OUTLET TO BE PROVIDED WITH LOCKABLE COVER.

PROVIDE MINIMUM 3'-0" LEVEL CLEARANCE IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, PER NEC 110.26.

WATERHOSE/BORE UNDER EXISTING WALKWAY.

POWER UTILITY SECONDARY CONDUITS. PROVIDE (4) 5" CONDUITS AS SPECIFIED BY UTILITY COMPANY, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. VERIFY

SIZE AND QUANTITY OF CONDUITS REQUIRED WITH UTILITY COMPANY PRIOR TO BID. ALL WORK TO BE DONE FROM UTILITY CO. APPROVED PLANS.

ASPHALT TO BE PATCHED AND BACKFILLED WITH SLURRY TO MATCH EXISTING CONDITIONS.

REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR CONDUIT AND CONDUCTOR
INFORMATION.

REFER TO LIGHTING CONTROL DETAILS FOR WIRING AND CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL WIRING AND
CONDUITS REQUIRED BY MANUFACTURER TO FIXTURES AND CONTROLS.

ROUTE CIRCUIT THROUGH NEW TIMECLOCK.

PROVIDE 1" C. FOR RGBW CABLING BACK TO DMX CONTROLLER. MAKE CONNECTIONS PER LIGHT FIXTURE MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS.

WATERHOSE / BORE UNDER EXISTING CONCRETE/ASPHALT.

PROVIDE (4) 2" C.O. SPARES.

PROVIDE (2) 2" C.O. AND (2) 1"C.O. SPARES STUBBED INTO PULLBOX.

ROUTE CIRCUIT THROUGH EXISTING TIMECLOCK.

COORDINATE FINAL BOLLARD LOCATIONS AND QUANTITIES WITH SCE INSPECTOR PRIOR TO INSTILLATION.

EXISTING GATE DOOR AND FENCE TO BE PROTECTED IN PLACE.

TRENCH IN EXISTING PLANTER AREA. REFER TO GENERAL NOTE 17 FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.

NO PATCHES WILL BE ALLOWED TO EXISTING CONCRETE DRIVEWAY. ALL

CONCRETE IS TO BE REPLACED FROM JOINT TO JOINT OR A MINIMUM OF 10' SECTIONS. HYDROJETTING IS ALLOWED AT CONTRACTOR'S CHOICE, IF COMPACTED AND REPAIRED TO ORIGINAL CONDITION.

PROVIDE (1)5" CONDUIT FOR PRIMARY SERVICE PER POWER UTILITY COMPANY REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE 3" CONCRETE COVER AS REQUIRED BY UTILITY CO., UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. VERIFY SIZE AND QUANTITY OF CONDUITS REQUIRED WITH UTILITY COMPANY PRIOR TO BID. ALL WORK TO BE DONE FROM UTILITY CO. APPROVED PLANS.

INTERCEPT EXISTING UTILITY CONDUIT. ALL WORK TO BE DONE FROM UTILITY CO. APPROVED PLANS.

EXISTING UTILITY LINE TO REMAIN AND BE PROTECTED IN PLACE. 1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 CONSTRUCTION NOTES
1 DEMOLISH RECEPTACLE OUTLET. CONDUIT IN GROUND TO BE CUT BELOW GRADE, PLUGGED, PATCHED AND ABANDONED. CONDUCTORS TO BE REMOVED BACK TO SOURCE.

NOT USED.

DEMOLISH LANDSCAPE LIGHT FIXTURE. CONDUIT IN GROUND TO BE CUT BELOW GRADE, PLUGGED, PATCHED AND ABANDONED. CONDUCTORS TO BE REMOVED BACK TO SOURCE.
2 3
10 11
12 13
14 15
16 17
18 19
20 21
22 23
24 25
26 27
TRANS. 'T-1'

PROTECTIVE
BOLLARD TYP.

T
MAIN SWBD. 'MSC'

ENCLOSED BREAKER

CONCRETE SLAB
5 ATS-1

EXTENDED

FUEL TANK

GENERATOR

CONDUIT
STUB-UP TYP.
13 13

MINI-POWER ZONE
P2-5 WP
WP
P2-3
EPO
P2-5
21 R:\_PROJECT\2023\23-047 GARDENA CIVIC CENTER LIGHTING PROJECT\23-047 E-SITEPLN - 2025-02-10 - LUIS MUNGUIA 21-000
San Bernardino, CA 92408
412 E. Vanderbilt Way
Phone: 909.890.3700
Fax: 909.890.3770
Email: [email protected]
1ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN SCALE: 1"=30'-0"
2 E-1.1
SIGNED:02/10/2025
6 15
ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E1.1
5-2627

FIRE STATION
162ND STREET
COMMUNITY BLDG.

CITY HALL

FIRE STATION

POLICE STATION

0.5 0.4

0.3 0.2

0.1 0.1

1.4 1.1

0.8 0.5

0.4 0.2

0.2 0.1

0.1 0.1

2.1 1.6

1.1 0.7

0.4 0.3

0.2 0.1

0.1 0.1

2.5 1.9

1.2 0.8

0.5 0.3

0.2 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.1 2.2

1.8 1.3

0.8 0.5

0.3 0.2

0.1 0.1

2.0 1.8

1.3 0.8

0.5 0.3

0.2 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.1 2.4

1.9 1.3

0.8 0.5

0.3 0.2

0.2 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.1 2.6

2.0 1.3

0.8 0.5

0.3 0.2

0.2 0.1

0.1 0.1

2.1 1.6

1.2 0.8

0.5 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

1.6 1.3

1.0 0.7

0.5 0.4

0.3 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.1 1.3

1.1 0.9

0.6 0.5

0.4 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.1 1.3

1.1 0.9

0.7 0.5

0.4 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.2 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.1 1.6

1.3 1.0

0.8 0.6

0.4 0.3

0.3 0.2

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.1 2.2

1.7 1.3

0.9 0.6

0.5 0.4

0.3 0.2

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.1 2.7

2.2 1.5

1.0 0.7

0.5 0.4

0.4 0.3

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.2 2.8

2.2 1.6

1.1 0.8

0.6 0.5

0.5 0.4

0.4 0.3

0.3 0.3

0.3 2.5

2.3 1.8

1.3 1.0

0.8 0.7

0.6 0.6

0.5 0.4

0.4 0.4

0.5 0.5

0.4 2.7

2.5 2.1

1.6 1.3

1.1 1.0

0.9 0.8

0.6 0.5

0.5 0.6

0.7 0.8

0.8 0.8

0.7 3.0

2.5 2.1

1.8 1.6

1.4 1.4

1.1 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.7 0.9

1.2 1.3

1.3 1.2

1.2 1.2

3.3 3.2

3.1 2.7

2.3 2.1

2.2 2.0

1.5 1.1

0.9 0.8

1.0 1.3

1.7 2.0

1.8 1.8

1.8 1.9

0.0 0.0

0.0 3.4

0.1 0.1

0.2 0.2

0.2 0.3

0.1 0.1

0.2 0.2

0.3 0.4

0.5 0.5

0.1 0.1

0.1 0.2

0.2 0.3

0.4 0.6

0.7 0.9

1.0 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.2 0.3

0.4 0.6

0.8 1.1

1.4 1.5

0.1 0.1

0.2 0.3

0.5 0.8

1.2 1.7

2.1 2.3

0.1 0.1

0.2 0.3

0.5 0.9

1.5 2.1

2.6 2.8

0.1 0.1

0.1 0.2

0.2 0.4

0.6 0.9

1.5 2.0

2.4 2.6

0.1 0.1

0.2 0.2

0.4 0.6

1.0 1.5

1.9 2.0

1.1 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.2 0.3

0.4 0.6

1.0 1.5

2.0 2.3

2.5 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.1 0.2

0.3 0.4

0.6 1.0

1.6 2.3

2.7 2.9

0.1 0.1

0.2 0.3

0.4 0.6

0.9 1.4

1.9 2.4

2.6 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.1 0.2

0.2 0.3

0.4 0.6

0.8 1.1

1.5 1.8

2.0 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.2 0.2

0.2 0.3

0.4 0.5

0.7 1.0

1.2 1.4

1.6 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.1 0.2

0.2 0.2

0.3 0.3

0.4 0.5

0.7 0.9

1.2 1.4

1.5 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.1 0.2

0.2 0.2

0.3 0.4

0.5 0.6

0.8 1.1

1.4 1.6

1.8 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.1 0.2

0.2 0.2

0.3 0.3

0.3 0.4

0.5 0.7

1.0 1.4

1.8 2.2

2.4 0.2

0.2 0.2

0.2 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.3 0.3

0.3 0.4

0.4 0.5

0.6 0.8

1.2 1.7

2.3 2.8

2.9 0.3

0.3 0.3

0.4 0.4

0.4 0.5

0.5 0.6

0.7 0.9

1.3 1.8

2.5 3.0

3.1 0.4

0.4 0.4

0.4 0.3

0.4 0.4

0.4 0.5

0.5 0.5

0.5 0.6

0.6 0.6

0.7 0.8

0.9 1.1

1.4 1.9

2.4 2.5

1.8 0.7

0.7 0.7

0.7 0.6

0.5 0.5

0.5 0.6

0.7 0.7

0.7 0.8

0.8 0.8

0.7 0.7

0.8 0.8

0.9 0.8

0.8 0.9

1.0 1.0

1.2 1.4

1.7 2.2

2.6 2.6

2.2 1.1

1.1 1.1

1.0 0.8

0.7 0.6

0.6 0.8

1.0 1.2

1.2 1.2

1.2 1.1

1.0 1.0

1.2 1.3

1.3 1.3

1.3 1.2

1.1 1.2

1.4 1.5

1.6 1.8

2.1 2.7

3.2 3.4

1.7 1.7

1.8 1.5

1.1 0.9

0.8 0.8

1.0 1.4

1.7 1.8

1.9 1.8

1.5 1.3

1.4 1.6

1.9 1.9

1.8 1.8

2.0 1.9

1.6 1.5

1.6 1.9

2.2 2.1

2.3 2.7

3.2 3.5

3.5 0.0

0.0 0.0

0.0 3.6 3.6

3.2 3.2

2.8 2.6

2.6 2.3

1.7 1.3

1.0 0.9

1.0 1.3

1.7 2.1

1.9 1.9

1.9 2.0

1.6 1.1

3.1 3.0

2.7 2.4

2.1 1.8

1.4 1.0

0.8 0.8

0.8 1.0

1.3 1.4

1.4 1.4

1.4 1.3

1.1 0.8

3.2 2.8

2.2 1.8

1.4 1.1

0.8 0.7

0.6 0.6

0.7 0.8

0.9 0.9

0.8 0.7

0.6 2.8

2.1 1.5

1.1 0.9

0.7 0.5

0.5 0.5

0.6 0.6

0.5 0.5

0.4 2.7

2.6 2.3

1.9 1.3

0.9 0.7

0.5 0.4

0.4 0.3

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.3 1.2

2.2 2.1

1.7 1.2

0.8 0.6

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.3 0.2

0.2 0.2

0.2 2.8

2.6 2.2

1.7 1.1

0.7 0.5

0.4 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.2 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.1 2.8

2.7 2.3

1.6 1.0

0.7 0.4

0.3 0.2

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.1 2.3

2.1 1.7

1.3 0.9

0.6 0.4

0.3 0.2

0.2 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.1 1.6

1.4 1.2

0.9 0.7

0.5 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

1.0 0.9

0.8 0.6

0.5 0.3

0.3 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.1 0.6

0.6 0.5

0.4 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.4 0.4

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.2

0.1 0.1

0.0 0.0

0.0 3.3 3.3

3.3 1.1 1.8 2.5

2.8 2.1 1.8 2.8 2.7 2.3 1.7 1.4 1.5 1.9 2.6 3.0 2.9 2.3 3.2 3.3

1.1 1.7

2.3 2.6

2.0 2.0

2.6 2.4

1.9 1.4

1.1 1.2

1.7 2.3

2.7 2.3

2.1 2.6

2.8 2.3

1.9 1.8

2.1 2.5

2.8 2.3

2.1 2.7

2.8 2.4

2.1 2.1

2.4 2.9

3.0 2.5

2.7 3.5

3.5 3.2

3.0 2.8

2.8 2.9

3.2 3.4

3.3 2.5

2.3 2.9

2.5 1.9

1.4 1.1

1.3 1.7

2.3 2.7

2.1 2.0

2.5 2.5

1.9 1.3

1.2 1.9

2.6 2.7

2.2 2.0

2.3 3.0

2.6 2.4

2.4 2.7

3.1 3.4

1.4 1.3

2.0 2.6

2.7 2.2

2.1 2.3

2.8 2.3

2.1 2.2

2.5 3.0

3.4 1.5

1.2 1.8

2.4 2.7

2.0 2.0

2.8 2.6

2.0 1.4

1.1 1.1

1.3 1.8

2.4 2.8

2.4 2.1

2.6 2.9

2.5 2.0

1.9 2.2

2.7 3.0

2.4 2.2

2.8 2.9

2.6 2.2

2.2 2.5

3.0 2.9

2.3 2.5

3.2 3.0

2.5 2.0

1.9 2.0

2.4 2.9

3.4 3.4

2.6 2.6

3.1 2.7

2.1 1.5

1.2 1.1

1.3 1.8

2.4 2.8

2.2 2.0

2.6 2.6

2.0 1.4

1.5 2.1

2.3 2.0

2.0 2.3

2.2 1.6

1.2 2.4

2.5 2.1

1.8 1.8

2.1 2.5

2.5 2.2

1.8 2.0

2.3 2.8

1.8 1.8

1.6 1.4

1.4 1.6

1.9 1.9

1.8 2.0

2.4 2.9

1.2 1.1

1.1 1.2

1.2 1.3

2.3 2.8

3.1 2.7

3.1 3.3

1.0 1.0

3.6 1.2

1.9 2.2

2.5 2.9

4.0 4.6

4.5 4.8

4.3 3.4

1.7 2.5

2.9 3.3

3.6 4.6

5.0 4.6

4.1 3.6

2.8 2.1

2.9 3.2

3.5 3.9

4.6 4.7

4.6 4.4

3.9 2.9

2.2 2.8

3.4 3.7

3.9 4.4

4.5 4.6

4.7 4.7

3.2 2.2

2.8 3.6

3.7 3.9

4.2 4.2

4.2 4.4

4.3 2.9

2.3 2.8

3.7 3.9

3.9 3.9

3.7 3.7

3.8 3.6

2.4 2.3

2.8 3.8

3.9 3.8

3.6 3.4

3.2 3.2

3.0 1.9

2.3 2.8

3.5 3.7

3.6 3.4

3.1 2.9

2.8 2.6

1.6 2.3

2.8 3.2

3.4 3.3

3.1 2.9

2.8 2.6

2.4 1.4

2.1 2.8

3.0 3.1

3.1 2.9

2.9 2.9

2.6 2.4

1.5 1.8

2.6 2.8

3.0 2.9

2.9 2.9

2.9 2.7

2.5 1.7

1.7 2.5

2.7 2.9

2.9 3.0

3.0 3.0

2.8 2.6

2.0 1.7

2.4 2.6

2.9 2.9

3.0 3.1

3.2 3.0

2.6 2.1

2.0 2.4

2.7 2.7

2.7 2.9

3.2 3.4

3.3 2.6

2.2 2.3

2.5 2.7

2.6 2.7

2.9 3.2

3.5 3.5

2.6 2.2

2.5 2.6

2.8 2.8

2.7 2.8

3.1 3.4

3.4 2.6

2.3 2.5

2.7 3.1

2.9 2.8

2.8 2.9

3.2 3.1

2.5 2.2

2.5 3.0

3.4 3.2

2.9 2.7

2.8 2.9

2.9 2.5

2.1 2.5

3.2 3.6

3.3 3.0

2.7 2.7

2.5 1.9

2.7 3.2

3.6 3.4

3.1 2.8

2.7 2.7

2.5 2.4

1.6 3.0

3.2 3.6

3.4 3.2

2.9 2.8

2.7 2.5

2.2 1.3

1.1 3.4

3.5 3.7

3.6 3.5

3.3 3.0

2.7 2.5

2.1 1.2

1.4 3.7

3.9 4.0

4.0 3.9

3.7 3.3

2.9 2.6

2.2 1.2

1.6 3.9

4.3 4.5

4.4 4.4

4.1 3.7

3.3 3.0

2.6 1.4

2.0 4.2

4.8 4.7

4.9 4.9

4.7 4.1

3.8 3.6

3.2 1.6

2.3 4.6

5.2 5.1

5.2 5.5

5.1 4.6

4.4 4.4

3.9 2.0

2.5 4.8

5.3 5.3

5.4 5.8

5.7 5.3

5.2 5.1

4.6 2.3

2.4 4.0

4.9 5.4

5.7 6.2

6.1 5.7

5.6 5.4

4.9 2.6

2.4 3.9

4.8 5.4

6.1 6.2

5.7 5.3

4.8 3.9

2.3 3.1

4.4 5.5

5.4 5.5

5.8 5.6

5.3 4.8

4.4 3.6

2.2 1.6

2.8 3.0

2.8 2.7

3.0 3.8

4.0 4.3

4.7 4.0

2.8 1.0

6.4 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.3

0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.2

0.2 0.2

0.3 0.3

0.2 0.1 0.1

0.1 0.1

0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4

0.4 R:\_PROJECT\2023\23-047 GARDENA CIVIC CENTER LIGHTING PROJECT\23-047 E-SITE PHOTOMETRIC PLN - 2025-02-10 - LUIS MUNGUIA 21-000
San Bernardino, CA 92408
412 E. Vanderbilt Way
Phone: 909.890.3700
Fax: 909.890.3770
Email: [email protected]
1PHOTOMETRIC SITE PLAN SCALE: #########
SIGNED:02/10/2025
7 15
PHOTOMETRIC SITE PLAN E1.2
5-2627

FIRE STATION
162ND STREET
COMMUNITY BLDG.

CITY HALL

FIRE STATION

POLICE STATION

1.1 1.8 2.5 2.8 2.1 1.8 2.8 2.7 2.3 1.7 1.4 1.5 1.9 2.5 3.0 2.9 2.1 2.9 3.0

1.1 1.7

2.3 2.6

2.0 2.0

2.6 2.4

1.9 1.4

1.1 1.0

1.2 1.7

2.3 2.7

2.3 2.1

2.6 2.7

2.3 1.9

1.8 2.0

2.5 2.8

2.2 2.0

2.5 2.5

2.0 1.3

0.9 0.6

0.5 0.5

0.5 0.7

0.9 1.2

1.6 2.0

2.2 2.4

2.7 3.0

3.2 2.4

2.3 2.9

2.5 1.9

1.4 1.1

1.0 1.3

1.7 2.3

2.7 2.1

2.0 2.5

2.5 1.9

1.3 1.2

1.9 2.6

2.7 2.2

2.0 1.0

1.2 1.4

1.7 2.0

2.4 3.0

1.4 1.3

2.0 2.6

2.7 2.2

2.1 1.0

0.9 1.1

1.4 1.7

2.2 2.9

1.5 1.2

1.8 2.4

2.7 2.0

2.0 2.8

2.6 2.0

1.4 1.1

1.1 1.3

1.8 2.4

2.8 2.4

2.1 2.6

2.8 2.5

2.0 1.9

2.2 2.6

2.9 2.3

2.0 2.6

2.6 2.1

1.4 0.9

0.6 0.4

0.4 0.4

0.4 0.5

0.6 0.7

1.0 1.2

1.6 2.1

2.8 2.5

2.6 3.1

2.7 2.0

1.5 1.2

1.1 1.3

1.8 2.4

2.8 2.2

2.0 2.6

2.6 2.0

1.3 1.0

1.5 2.1

2.3 2.0

2.0 2.3

2.2 1.6

1.2 1.0

2.2 2.3

1.7 1.2

0.8 0.5

0.4 1.2

1.6 2.1

2.6 1.6

1.6 1.3

0.9 0.6

0.4 1.8

2.2 2.7

1.0 0.9

0.6 0.5

0.4 2.1

2.6 3.0

2.5 3.0

0.3 0.3

3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3

3.3 3.3

3.3 R:\_PROJECT\2023\23-047 GARDENA CIVIC CENTER LIGHTING PROJECT\23-047 E-SITE EM PHOTOMETRIC PLN - 2025-02-10 - LUIS MUNGUIA 21-000
San Bernardino, CA 92408
412 E. Vanderbilt Way
Phone: 909.890.3700
Fax: 909.890.3770
Email: [email protected]
1EM PHOTOMETRIC SITE PLAN SCALE: #########
SIGNED:02/10/2025
8 15
EM PHOTOMETRIC SITE PLAN E1.3
5-2627

T
TRANS. 'T-2'
2 (E)
(E)
(E) PANEL
PANEL 'L1'
PANEL 'P1'
1 SEE SITE PLAN TO CONTINUATION
1 (N) WATER
HEATER
DC-6
7 (E)
(E)
(E)
(E)(E)
(E)
(E)
(E)
(E)
(E)
P1-3,5
8 99
(E)
(E)
(E)
(E)
(E)
(E)
(E)
99 2
10 9
P1-1
TO GEN.
11 9
+48"
P1-2
P1-4
P1-6

CONSTRUCTION NOTES

GENERAL NOTES
PROVIDE 24"X24"X6" MIN. NEMA 3R PULLBOX ON EXTERIOR WALL FOR NEW CONDUITS. ALL EXTERIOR CONDUITS TO BE SURFACE MOUNT AND ROUTED UP TO MEZZANINE LEVEL.

PROVIDE MINIMUM 3'-0" LEVEL CLEARANCE IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, PER NEC 110.26.

CORE DRILL THRU EXISTING CONCRETE WALL AT MECHANICAL ROOM CEILING SPACE. PATCH AND REPAIR TO EXISTING CONDITION. WEATHER SEAL WALL AND PAINT TO MATCH EXISTING WALL.

CONDUIT TO BE SUSPENDED FROM CEILING AND SUPPORTED EVERY 10'-0" AND WITHIN 3'-0" OF ANY JUNCTION BOX OR TERMINATION.

REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR FEEDER SIZES AND SPARE CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS.

PROVIDE (4) 2" SPARE CONDUITS, STUB AND CAP CONDUITS IN CEILING SPACE. ALL SPARE CONDUITS TO BE LABELED PER SPECS.

PROVIDE FUSED DISCONNECT FOR NEW WATER HEATER. REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR SIZE AND FEEDER INFORMATION.

REPLACE EXISTING OUTLET WITH NEW DOUBLE DUPLEX OUTLETS.

EXISTING CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS TO BE REMOVED BACK TO SOURCE PANEL. NEW DOUBLE DUPLEX TO BE SPLIT OUTLETS.

NEW CONDUIT TO BE SURFACE MOUNTED AND PAINTED PER CITY
REQUIREMENTS.

NEW RECEPTACLE AND CONDUIT TO BE RECESSED AND SHALL MATCH THE FINISH AND COLOR OF ADJACENT RECEPTACLES.

SURFACE MOUNTED ANUNCIATOR PANEL. REFER TO SINGLE LINE
DIAGRAM FOR MORE INFORMATION. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE

EXACT PANEL LOCATION WITH CITY REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO ANY WORK. DATA OUTLET TO BE PROVIDED FOR PANEL.
1 1. COORDINATE POWER AND DATA DEVICE LOCATIONS, AND DEVICE PLATE COLOR WITH ARCHITECT.

2. NO PIPING, DUCTS OR EQUIPMENT FOREIGN TO ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

SHALL BE PERMITTED TO BE LOCATED WITHIN A SPACE EXTENDING FROM FLOOR TO A HEIGHT OF 6' ABOVE THE EQUIPMENT. CEC 110.26(E)1.

3. EXPOSED CONDUITS ARE NOT ALLOWED WHERE CONCEALED METHODS

ARE AVAILABLE, AND MUST BY APPROVED IN WRITING BY CITY PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT AND SUPPORTS SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH SUPPORTING SURFACE WHEN ALLOWED. CONDUIT

ROUTING SHALL BE IN A NEAT AND ORDERLY FASHION AND RUN
PARALLEL AND PERPENDICULAR TO EXPOSED STRUCTURE.

COORDINATE ROUTING OF EXPOSED CONDUIT WITH OWNER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

4. ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IS NEW UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

5. ALL EXTERIOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE NEMA 3R.

6. ALL EXTERIOR RECEPTACLE OUTLETS SHALL BE GFCI TYPE, HAVE WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURE AND LOCKABLE.
2 3
4 5
6 DEMOLITION NOTES
1 DEMOLISH WATER HEATER DISCONNECT. REMOVE CONDUIT TO NEAREST J-BOX AND CONDUCTORS BACK TO SOURCE. TURN OFF BREAKER AND LABEL AS SPARE AT PANELBOARD (CB-37,39,41).

EXISTING OUTLET AND CONDUIT TO REMAIN. DISCONNECT FROM
EXISTING CIRCUIT. REMOVE CONDUCTORS TO NEAREST J-BOX.
7 8
9 10
2 11
(E) DIST. BOARD 'DC'
3 45
6 (E) MECH. DUCT
(E) PANEL 'LCA'
(E) INVERTER
(E) TRANS. T-1
(E) (E)
(E) PANEL 'CA' & TIMECLOCK
(E) PANEL 'CB'
(E) SUPPLY FAN

CONDUITS DOWN TO PULLBOX
P
(E) TEL. BKBD.

R:\_PROJECT\2023\23-047 GARDENA CIVIC CENTER LIGHTING PROJECT\23-047 E-FLRPLN - 2025-02-10 - LUIS MUNGUIA 21-000
San Bernardino, CA 92408
412 E. Vanderbilt Way
Phone: 909.890.3700
Fax: 909.890.3770
Email: [email protected]
SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 1GROUND FLOOR ELECTRICAL PLANSCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" 2MEZZANINE ELECTRICAL PLAN SIGNED:02/10/2025
9 15
ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLANS E2.1
5-2627

1 GROUND ROD DETAIL 24
WALL MOUNTED PULLBOX 6
8 -9
TRANSFORMER "LET THRU" CALCS 10
NONMETALLIC SCHEDULE 40

PVC CONDUITS - SIZE AND

QUANTITIES AS SHOWN ON
PLANS. PROVIDE MIN. OF 1"

CONDUIT FOR EXTERIOR
APPLICATIONS.

GENERAL NOTES:

1. PLACE CONDUIT IN TRENCH, FILL, AND COMPACT TO 90%. REPAIR AREA TO MATCH SURROUNDING. BACK FILL IS TO BE FREE OF LARGE ROCK, PAVING MATERIALS, ETC., THAT MAY CAUSE PHYSICAL DAMAGE TO CONDUIT.

PROVIDE GRANULAR MATERIAL WITH A SAND EQUIVALENT (SE) GREATER THAN 30.

2. PROVIDE 30" MINIMUM COVER WHERE CONDUIT IS PLACED UNDER STREETS, HIGHWAYS, ROADS, ALLEYS, DRIVEWAYS, AND PARKING LOTS.

3. CONDUITS PLACED UNDER OR IN STRUCTURAL FOOTINGS SHALL BE GALVANIZED RIGID METAL (RMC) WRAPPED WITH 20 MIL PVC TAPE. THE

COUPLINGS CONNECTED TO THE RMC ELBOW SHALL BE GALVANIZED MATERIAL.

4. MINIMUM TRENCH WIDTH TO BE 24".

FINISH
GRADE

BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUIT BURIAL

PROVIDE CONTINUOUS

MAGNETIC DETECTABLE TAPE
DIRECTLY ABOVE CONDUIT.
12"
24" MIN.

PARKING LOT POLETOP DETAIL
2'-6"
30" MIN.

1. GROUND POLE TO GROUND CONDUCTORS IN CONDUITS.

2. LOCATE ALL SITE POLETOP FIXTURES SO THAT THEY LINE UP WITH THE NEAREST PARKING STRIPE.

3. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS OR CALCULATIONS FOR
FOOTING INFORMATION.

LIGHT POLE (SEE LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE).

MANUFACTURER PROVIDED HAND HOLE W/
GROUNDING LUG.

MANUFACTURER PROVIDED BASE COVER
ANCHORED W/ TAMPER PROOF HARDWARE.

SLIGHTLY SLOPE TOP OF BASE FOR PROPER

DRAINAGE, RADIUS EDGES AND GRIND SMOOTH
ALL EXPOSED ABOVE GRADE SURFACES.

GALVANIZED ANCHOR BOLT FURNISHED W/ POLE.

TYP.

VERTICAL REBAR

CONDUIT CONTAINING CIRCUIT WIRING
AND EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR.

LIGHT FIXTURE
(SEE LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE).
15'-6"
MAX.

RECESSED PANEL BOARD 3

FINISH GRADE CADWELD
10'-0"CONDUIT & WIRE TO

ADDITIONAL GROUND
(AS REQUIRED).

1. SIZE OF CONDUCTORS SHALL COMPLY W/CEC
250.66.

2. CHECK RESISTANCE TO GROUND. IF RESISTANCE
EXCEEDS 25 OHMS, INSTALL ADDITIONAL GROUND
RODS W/CONDUCTORS AS SHOWN. SEPARATE AT
LEAST 6'-0" UNTIL RESISTANCE IS REDUCED TO 25
OHMS OR LESS (CEC 250.56)
NOTES:

CONDUIT & WIRE SIZE AS
REQUIRED SEE PLANS.

PRECAST 19-3/4"L X 14-1/4"W X
12"D. YARD BOX. BROOKS
PRODUCTS #3 1/2PB-21 QUICKSET
#EC-17
3/4" X 10'-0" DRIVEN
"COPPERWELD" GROUND ROD.

CONCRETE COVER WITH LIFTING
EYES LABEL "ELECTRICAL"

CONDUIT HUB FOR GROUNDING BY
"THOMAS & BETTS"
METAL STUDS AS REQUIRED (TYP.)
SPACERS AS REQUIRED (TYP.)

PANELBOARD (TYPICAL)
WALL
5/8" GYPSUM BOARD (TYP.)

PROVIDE AIR SPACE AROUND PANELBOARD BACK

AND SIDES FOR VENTILATION

NEW UNISTRUT
P1000, TYPICAL

NEW LB FITTING

TYPICALNEW LB FITTING

TYPICAL

EMT CONDUIT

REFER TO FIRE

STOPPING DETAIL

EXISTING

CONCRETE
WALL

NEW LOCKNUT
(TYP.)
P-1000 UNISTRUT, LENGTH

AS REQUIRED

NEW PVC COATED RIGID

STEEL CONDUIT SIZE

CONDUIT PER PLANS

EXISTING

FINISHED GRADE

GRC CONDUIT

SIZE PER PLANS

NEW CONDUIT

STRAP, TYPICAL

EXISTING

BUILDING WALL

CEILING
SPACE

FRONT VIEW
1/2" THREADED RODS IN

SIMPSON SET-XP EPOXY
(IAPMA UES ER-265) WITH
MINIMUM 4" EMBEDMENT
AT EACH OF 4 HOLE

LOCATIONS
3/8" BOLT, SPRING NUT

AND WASHERS (TYPICAL

FOR EACH CORNER)
NEW NEMA 3R
MIN. 24"X24"X6"

PULLBOX

NEW RIGID STEEL

CONDUIT PAINT TO

MATCH WALL COLOR
GENERAL NOTES:

1. PULLBOX TO BE SIZED PER NEC, U.O.N.

2. PROVIDE COVER LABELED WITH
"POWER" OR "LIGHTING" DESIGNATION.

PROVIDE BOLT DOWN COVER.

COVER TO BE HEAVY DUTY

TRAFFIC RATED WHERE

INSTALLED IN AREAS SUBJECT
TO VEHICULAR TRAFFIC.

PROVIDE 3/4" CRUSHED ROCK 6"

OUT FROM ALL SIDES OF
PULLBOX AND 12" DEEP.

BRANCH CIRCUIT PULLBOX DETAIL 5

GROUND LUG (CONNECT

CIRCUIT AND POLE GROUNDS)

MANUFACTURER PROVIDED

HAND HOLE W/GASKETED BOLT
DOWN COVER PLATE.

LIGHT POLE (SEE LUMINARE
SCHEDULE).

IN-LINE WATERTIGHT FUSE HOLDER WITH FUSES

SIZED PER LIGHT FIXTURE MANUFACTURER'S
RECOMMENDATION (TYP.)

REFER TO STRUCTURAL FOR POLETOP
FOOTING CONCRETE P.S.I.

REQUIREMENTS.

MANUFACTURER PROVIDED BASE COVER
ANCHORED W/ TAMPER PROOF HARDWARE.

CONDUIT CONTAINING

CIRCUIT WIRING AND

EQUIPMENT GROUND
CONDUCTOR.

GROUT AT BASE OF COVER
24"
MIN.

GENERAL NOTES

1. GROUND POLE TO GROUND CONDUCTORS
IN CONDUITS.

2. LOCATE ALL POLETOP FIXTURES 12" MIN.

FROM EXISTING CURB

3. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS OR

CALCULATIONS FOR FOOTING
INFORMATION.

GENERAL NOTES
240V (0.0130)
3 208V (0.031)
3 208V (0.0252)
3 208V (0.0284)

1. ALL CALCULATIONS BASED UPON INDOOR DOE10 CFR (2016)
EFFICIENT DRY-TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS 480V-208Y/120V 3Ø 4W WITH CLASS H INSULATION, 150°C RISE, COPPER WOUND. ALL 208Y/120V PANELBOARDS ARE RATED 10,000AIC, U.N.O.
3 V (%Z)
Z = 1.30
15KVA
GENERAL:

Z = 3.10
Z = 2.52
Z = 2.84
30KVA
75KVA
ISC =
15KVA
= 4,807 AIC15KVA
= 7,330 AIC
= 3,304 AIC
= 1,343 AIC
30KVA
75KVA
KVA
15KVA
GENERAL NOTES:
240V (0.0160)Z = 1.60
100KVA = 26,041 AIC100KVA
3 208V (0.038)Z = 3.8
45KVA = 3,290 AIC45KVA
WALKWAY POLETOP DETAIL 7
10'-0"
MAX.

LIGHT FIXTURE
(SEE LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE).
11 2.

1. PLAN VIEW
GRADE
CRASH
POST

CONCRETE
CAP
PLAN
EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONCRASH POST TO CONSIST OF 3'' GALV. STEEL PIPE (1/4'' MIN. WALL THK - SCHED 40) FILLED WITH CONCRETE.

PAINT YELLOW - HIGH REFLECTANCE.
3250 PSI

CONCRETE
4'-6"
MAX
24"
MIN.
42"
30"
18"

PROTECTIVE BOLLARD DETAIL

ELECTRICAL

EQUIPMENT

PER PLANS

INVERTER MOUNTING DETAIL
R:\_PROJECT\2023\23-047 GARDENA CIVIC CENTER LIGHTING PROJECT\23-047 E-DETAILS - 2025-02-10 - LUIS MUNGUIA 21-000
San Bernardino, CA 92408
412 E. Vanderbilt Way
Phone: 909.890.3700
Fax: 909.890.3770
Email: [email protected]
SIGNED:02/10/2025
10 15
ELECTRICAL DETAILS E3.1
5-2627

1SERVICE & DISTRIBUTION GROUNDING DETAIL

GROUNDING ELECTRODE
CONDUCTOR. SIZE PER C.E.C.
250.66.

NEUTRAL BUS

GROUND BUS
NG

SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT PANELBOARD OR SWITCH TRANSFORMER PANELBOARD OR SWITCH

NEUTRAL
GENERAL NOTES:

1. SEE ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR CONDUCTOR AND CONDUIT SIZE

2. ALL NEUTRAL BUSSES TO BE ISOLATED

3. PROVIDE SEPARATE GROUND BUS

4. FERROUS METAL RACEWAYS AND ENCLOSURES FOR GROUNDING ELECTRODE

CONDUCTORS SHALL BE BONDED AT EACH END OF THE RACEWAY OR ENCLOSURE TO THE GROUNDING ELECTRODE OR GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR. C.E.C. 250.64(E)

5. A COMMON GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR FOR MULTIPLE SEPARATELY

DERIVED SYSTEMS SHALL BE PERMITTED FOR MEANS OF CONNECTING THE

GROUNDED CONDUCTOR OF EACH SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEM TO THE GROUNDING ELECTRODE. C.E.C. 250.30(A)(6)

SUPPLY SIDE

BONDING JUMPER
SIZE PER C.E.C.
250.102(C)(1)

NEAREST GROUNDING ELECTRODE
TO BE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:

METAL UNDERGROUND WATER PIPE,
BUILDING STEEL. PER C.E.C.
250.30(A)(4)
N/G

NEUTRAL
NG

CONDUIT
(TYP.)

SUPPLY SIDE BONDING
JUMPER. SIZE PER C.E.C.
250.102(C)

EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
CONDUCTOR. SIZE PER C.E.C. 250.122

GROUND BUS
(TYP.)

NEUTRAL

GROUNDING ELECTRODE
CONDUCTOR. SIZE PER C.E.C. 250.66

NEUTRAL BUS
(TYP.)

BONDING JUMPER TO ALL OF THE FOLLOWING

WHERE EXISTS IN THE AREA OF THE SEPARATELY
DERIVED SYSTEM: METAL WATER PIPE, BUILDING
STEEL PER C.E.C. 250.104(E). SIZE BONDING
JUMPER PER C.E.C. 250.66.

SUPPLY SIDE
BONDING JUMPER.

SIZE PER C.E.C.
250.102(C)(1)
SYSTEM BONDING JUMPER.

SIZE PER C.E.C. 250.102(C)(1)

MAIN BOUNDING
JUMPER
SIZE PER C.E.C.
250.102(C)(1)

MAIN GROUND BUS INTERSYSTEM
BONDING TERMINATION (AS APPLICABLE).

REFER TO BUILDING AND GROUND

SYSTEM DETAIL

GROUND ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR TO UFER
GROUND (1#4/0 GROUND WIRE TO 20' OR LONGER
REBAR IN CONCRETE) CEC 250.52(A)(3).

BOND TO BUILDING STEEL. CEC 250.52(A)(2).

BOND TO METAL UNDERGROUND WATER PIPE IN
DIRECT CONTACT WITH EARTH FOR 10' OR LONGER
WITHIN 5' OF BUILDING ENTRANCE
CEC 250.52(A)(1)
& 250.68(C)(1).

BOND TO TELECOM SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
2MAIN SWBD ELEVATION

CONCRETE EXPANSION ANCHOR
1/2" Ø HILTI KB-TZ2
WITH 2" MIN. EMBEDMENT
(ICC#ESR-4266)

SINGLE RACK
GENERAL NOTES:

1. LENGTH VARIES WITH NUMBER OF CONDUITS TO BE SUPPORTED.

2. UNISTRUT WITH ALLOWABLE LOADING PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.

3. FOR SUPPORT IN CONCRETE, USE SWIVEL CONCRETE INSERTS, AS SHOWN. ANCHORS TO BE PLACED AT CENTER OF METAL DECK FLUTES ONLY.

4. TYPICAL FOR 3", OR 2" RIGID METALLIC CONDUITS. DO NOT USE EMT CONDUIT FOR SIZES LARGER THAN 1".

SEE NOTE 3 AND

INSERT DETAIL BELOW
AS REQUIRED SEE NOTE 1
SEE NOTE 4SEE NOTE 2

CONCRETE

CEILING
3CONDUIT BURIAL - UTILITY JOINT TRENCH
GENERAL NOTES:

1. PROVIDE CONCRETE PAD EXTENDING 6" OUT ON SIDES AND BACK AND 48" IN FRONT OF CABINET, DEPTH PER MANUFACTURER'S
RECOMMENDATIONS AND/OR APPROVED STRUCTURAL DESIGN.

2. PROVIDE GROUND ROD AND BOND SEPARATE CONDUCTORS FROM GROUND ROD TO ENCLOSURE. CHECK RESISTANCE TO GROUND. IF RESISTANCE EXCEEDS 25 OHMS, INSTALL ADDITIONAL GROUND
RODS SEPARATED AT LEAST 6'-0" UNTIL RESISTANCE IS REDUCED TO 25 OHMS OR LESS (CEC 250-84)

3. DETAIL IS SHOWN WITHOUT ENCLOSURE. PROVIDE IN NEMA 3R ENCLOSURE. PAINT PER CITY SPECIFICATIONS IF APPLICABLE.

4. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE BASED FROM SQUARE D'S QED-2
SWITCHBOARD SPECS.

DETAIL IS FOR BIDDING PURPOSES
ONLY. CONSTRUCTION TO BE PER
UTILITY REQUIREMENTS.

GENERAL NOTES:

1. THE LAYERS BETWEEN THE ADJOINING UTILITIES WILL BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH G.O. 128 AND HAVE A MINIMUM OF 12" SEPARATION. THAT SEPARATION WILL NOT BE REDUCED WITH CONCRETE ENCASEMENT.

2. THE COMPACTION OF THE EARTH BELOW THE CONDUIT SYSTEM WILL BE SET AT 90% TO REDUCE SETTLING AND BREAKAGE. BACK FILL SHALL BE FREE OF LARGE ROCK, PAVING MATERIALS, ETC., THAT MAY CAUSE PHYSICAL DAMAGE TO CONDUIT.

3. THE DEVELOPER WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DRIVING ANY AND ALL GROUND RODS IN THE SYSTEM THAT IS JOINT TRENCHED. THIS WILL BE PREDETERMINED, AND COMPLETED BEFORE CONSTRUCTION CREWS ARRIVE ON THE JOB SITE.

4. NO OTHER UTILITY WILL BE ALLOWED TO OCCUPY THE AREA UNDER A TRANSFORMER PAD AND 12" TO EITHER SIDE.

5. ALL OTHER UTILITIES WILL MAINTAIN 12" OF CLEARANCE FROM SUB STRUCTURES AND UNDERGROUND EQUIPMENT.

6. DEVELOPER/CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PAYMENT OF AN INSPECTION FEE TO INSURE THE PROPER INSTALLATION AND ADHERENCE TO UTILITY CO. REGULATIONS.

7. DEVELOPER/CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION OF INSPECTIONS WHILE TRENCH HAS ALL UTILITIES EXPOSED.

8. CONTRACTOR WILL INSTALL A CAUTION TAPE 12" ABOVE THE POWER DUCTS.

9. SPACING OF CONDUITS TO BE PER CEC.

10. PROVIDE CONCRETE ENCASEMENT AS REQUIRED BY UTILITY COMPANY.

11. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE QUANTITY, SIZE AND TYPE OF CONDUIT(S), PULL ROPES, BURIAL DEPTHS, ETC. WITH INFORMATION PROVIDED BY UTILITIES.

12. IT IS ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO CONTACT DRY UTILITIES AND OBTAIN A COMPLETE LIST OF UTILITY REQUIREMENTS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO INCLUDE IN HIS BID PRICE, ALL COSTS, INVOLVED IN BRINGING DRY UTILITIES TO THE SITE. OWNER WILL PAY COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH APPLYING FOR NEW DRY UTILITY SERVICE. IF E.C. IS UNABLE TO CONTACT ANY DRY UTILITY, HE IS TO CONTACT THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER, PRIOR TO BID, FOR DIRECTION.

13. EDISON: FULL ENCASEMENT REQUIRED FOR MORE 4 CONDUITS. SEMI ENCASEMENT REQUIRED FOR 3 OR 4 CONDUITS.

14. TRENCHING TO BE 2' BACK FROM CURB.

FINISH
GRADE

PRIMARY CONDUIT
BRANCH

CIRCUIT

CONDUITS

SECONDARY

CONDUIT(S)
12"
MIN.
24"
12"
MIN.
48"
36"
4WALL CONDUIT SUPPORT DETAIL
CL

MASONRY OR

CONCRETE PARTITION

WATERPROOF RESILIENT

FIRE RATED SEALANT (UL
SYSTEM WL-1039)

ESCUTCHEON AT ALL

CONDUITS EXPOSED

TO VIEW

CONDUIT CENTERED

IN SLEEVE

GYPSUM WALL

ASSEMBLY
18 GAUGE BLACK

STEEL PIPE SLEEVE

FOR EXTERIOR

WALLS, AND ALL
CONDUITS 1 1/4" AND

LARGER THROUGH

INTERIOR WALLS
5CONDUIT THRU WALL DETAIL
6POWER PEDESTAL DETAIL

1. PEDESTAL TO BE IN NEMA 3R CABINET WITH HASP.

2. PEDESTAL TO BE STRONGBOX MODEL #PWP-12016-22 AND IS TO

BE SUPPLIED WITH MAIN & BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS AS
INDICATED ON PANEL SCHEDULE.

3. REFER BREAKER ASSIGNMENTS FOR INFO ON MAIN CIRCUIT
BREAKER, INTERIOR SPACES AND OTHER INFO.

4. PROVIDE WITH PAD - 2000PSI CONCRETE 8" THICK, 4" ABOVE GROUND, 4" BELOW. EXTEND 4" BEYOND SWITCHGEAR ON ALL
SIDES.

5. PEDESTAL TO BE SECURED TO PAD WITH 5/8'' X 5'' ANCHOR BOLTS AT EACH CORNER.

6. PROVIDE 3' LEVEL & CLEAR WORKING SPACE IN FRONT OF
PEDESTAL.

7. ENCLOSURE SHOWN IS TO HAVE SUFFICIENT SPACE FOR

MOUNTING OF THE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL SEPARATE FROM
LIVE EXPOSED ELECTRICAL PARTS. ALTERNATE SUBMITTAL WILL

ONLY BE CONSIDERED IF ALL EQUIPMENT CAN BE MOUNTED IN
THE ONE ENCLOSURE.

8. FINISH OF PEDESTAL TO BE STAINLESS STEEL.

GENERAL NOTES
9 -
TRANSVERSE ANGLE BRACE.

ALTERNATE SIDES EVERY BRACE.

THREADED HANGAR ROD. FOR

SIZE AND SPACING SEE

STIFFENER SHALL

BE SPOT WELDED

ADD VERTICAL ANGLE STIFFENER
IF LENGTH IS GREATER THAN MAX.

LENGTH SHOWN ON PANEL
SCHEDULE.

BUT & WASHER

TOP & BOTTOM
"B-LINE" - B3690
ADJUSTABLE "J"
HANGER.

CONDUIT. SEE

PLANS FOR SIZE
AND LOCATION.

INSULATION WHERE

APPLIES - SEE

SPECIFICATIONS
'B-LINE" B3162

PIPE SADDLE
NOTE:

1. DETAIL APPLIES TO CONDUIT 2" I.D. AND SMALLER.

2. REFER TO CONDUIT SUPPORT SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

FOR CONNECTION TO

STRUCTURE, REFER TO
THE 2008 SMACNA SEISMIC

RESTRAINT MANUAL
ALL CONDUIT 2-1/2" AND LARGER PER THE FOLLOWING SMACNA GUIDELINES BRACING MAY BE OMITTED WHERE TOP OF PIPE IS 12" OR LESS FROM BOTTOM OF HANGER SUPPORT CONNECTED TO STRUCTURE VERTICAL ANGLE ONLY REQUIRED WHEN ROD MAXIMUM LENGTH IS EXCEEDED.

ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING
ALLOW FOR EXPANSION EVERY 30'-0".3
NOTES:
2 1
6 10'-0" 10'-0"
10'-0"10'-0"2-1/2
4 5
3 10'-0"10'-0"
10'-0" 10'-0"
10'-0" 10'-0"

BETWEEN SUPPORT
1 thru 1-
1 2
2 1
2 &
3 4
10'-0"6'-0"
10'-0" 10'-0"
6'-0" 10'-0"

PIPE SIZE

IN INCHES

MAXIMUM SPAN
HANGERS O.C.

HORIZ. VERT.
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
3/8"
3/8"
2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 16 ga @
40'-0" O.C.
2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 16 ga @
40'-0" O.C. 2 x 2 x 16ga
2 x 2 x 16ga
2 x 2 x 16ga
2 x 2 x 16ga
2 x 2 x 16ga2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 16 ga @
80'-0" O.C.
2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 16 ga @
80'-0" O.C.
2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 16 ga @
80'-0" O.C.
2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 16 ga @
80'-0" O.C.
2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 16 ga @
40'-0" O.C.
2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 16 ga @
40'-0" O.C.
2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 16 ga @
40'-0" O.C.
2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 16 ga @
40'-0" O.C.
3/8"
3/8"
3/8"
BOLT
SIZE
1 x 1 x 18ga
1 x 1 x 18ga
(STIFFNER)

VERTICAL

HANGER ANGLE
1 x 1 x 18ga
1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 18 ga @
80'-0" O.C.
1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 18 ga @
80'-0" O.C.
1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 18 ga @
80'-0" O.C.

LONGITUDINAL

ANGLE BRACE
2 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 18 ga @
40'-0" O.C.
2-1/2 x 2-1/2 x 16 ga @
40'-0" O.C.
1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 18 ga @
40'-0" O.C.

TRANSVERSE

ANGLE BRACE
1 2
3/8"
3/8"
3/8"
37"
37"
37"

HANGER ROD

DIAMETER
SIZE

MAX ROD

LENGTH, NO

STIFFENER

MAX ROD

LENGTH,
WITH

STIFFENER
16"
16"
16"
1/2"
3/8"
1/2"
37"
37"
37"
18"
18"
18"
5/8" 48"24"
5/8" 48" 24"
LARGER THAN O.D. OF BOLT
PIPE SLEEVE WITH I.D. 1/4"

HANGER ROD - SEE

SCHEDULE FOR SIZE

SHORT ANGLE
"B-LINE" B327

SPECIFICATIONS

INSULATION - SEE

LONGITUDINAL DIAGONAL
ANGLE (SLOPE 1 TO 1).

FOR SIZE AND SPACING -

FOR SIZE

ATTACH BOLT -

SEE SCHEDULE
9 -
SIDES EACH BRACE.

SEE SCHEDULE. ALT.

PIPE SADDLE
"B-LINE" B3162

HANGER - SEE SCHEDULE
"B-LINE" B3100 CLEVIS
FOR SPACING 9
-
9 -

TRANSVERSE ANGLE
BRACE. ALTERNATE SIDES
EVERY BRACE.

ADD VERTICAL ANGLE

STIFFNER IF LENGTH IS
GREATER THAN MAX. LENGTH

SHOWN ON PIPE SUPPORT

SCHEDULE

FOR CONNECTION TO STRUCTURE
- REFER TO 2008 SMACNA SEISMIC

RESTRAINT MANUAL
7LARGE CEILING CONDUIT SUPPORT DETAIL
8SMALL CEILING CONDUIT SUPPORT DETAIL
NOTE:

1. DETAIL APPLIES TO CONDUIT 2-1/2" I.D. AND LARGER.

2. REFER TO CONDUIT SUPPORT SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

TYPICAL CONDUIT - SEE PLAN

FOR SIZE AND LOCATION
9CONDUIT SUPPORT SCHEDULE
R:\_PROJECT\2023\23-047 GARDENA CIVIC CENTER LIGHTING PROJECT\23-047 E-DETAILS - 2025-02-10 - LUIS MUNGUIA 21-000
San Bernardino, CA 92408
412 E. Vanderbilt Way
Phone: 909.890.3700
Fax: 909.890.3770
Email: [email protected]
SIGNED:02/10/2025
11 15
ELECTRICAL DETAILS E3.2
5-2627

1 2
5 -3
GENERAL NOTES:

1. PROVIDE OSHA DANGER SIGN. "NO SMOKING WITHIN 50 FEET" SEE SAMPLE ABOVE. SIGN TO BE 20"X24" PRESSURE SENSITIVE VINYL. CHAMPION AMERICA INC. (1-800-521-7000) PN 30612HF. MOUNT ON BOTH SIDES OF GENERATOR ENCLOSURE.

2. PROVIDE OSHA DANGER SIGN. "THIS EQUIPMENT STARTS AND STOPS AUTOMATICALLY" SEE SAMPLE ABOVE. SIGN TO BE 14"X10" CHAMPION AMERICA INC. (1-800-521-7000) SENSITIVE VINYL. PN 51368HF, OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT. MOUNT ON BOTH SIDES OF GENERATOR ENCLOSURE. SIGN IS TO BE INSTALLED SO IT IS VISIBLE TO PEDESTRIANS AT ALL TIMES.

THIS EQUIPMENT

AUTOMATICALLY

STARTS AND STOPS

CAUTION
DANGER

NO SMOKING
WITHIN 50 FEET

GENERATOR SIGNAGE
3" CLEAR
6"
8" FROM EDGE2" CLEAR
3" CLEAR
95% RELATIVE

COMPACTION
AIR

INTAKE ENGINE
ACCESS

CONTROL
PANEL
ACCESS

GENERATOR PAD MOUNTING

DISCONNECT SIGNAGE
GENERAL NOTES:

1. PROVIDE SIGN AT MAIN ELECTRICAL SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION SECTION TO

DESCRIBE THAT BUILDING IS SUPPLIED BY AN ON-SITE GENERATOR WITH A

DIRECTORY INDICATING THE LOCATION OF THE DISCONNECT SERVING THE ON-SITE GENERATOR.

CAUTION

STANDBY POWER SOURCE

LOCATED IN FIRE DEPARTMENT

PROPERTY AT SOUTH WEST

CORNER OF PARKING LOT
MAIN SWBD. MSC

GENERATOR
DIST. BOARD DC
162ND STREET
FIRE

STATION

COMMUNITY
BLDG.
4 FOR PAD REQUIREMENTS,
REFER TO SHEET S-1.

GRADING NOTES

1. ALL GRADING SHALL CONFORM TO THE LATEST UNIFORM BUILDING CODE.

2. MAXIMUM CUT AND FILL SLOPE = 2:1

3. NO ROCK OR SIMILAR IRREDUCIBLE MATERIAL WITH A MAXIMUM DIMENSION GREATER THAN 12 INCHES SHALL BE BURIED OR PLACED IN FILLS CLOSER THAN 10 FEET TO THE FINISHED GRADE.

4. A FINAL COMPACTION REPORT SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR ALL FILLS OVER 1' DEEP.

5. NO OBSTRUCTION OF NATURAL WATER COURSES SHALL BE PERMITTED.

6. DUST SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY WATERING OR OTHER APPROVED METHODS.

7. ALL AREAS SHALL DRAIN TOWARDS EXISTING DRAIN PATTERNS

8. ALL NEW GRADES TO BLEND SMOOTHLY WITH EXISTING GRADES AS REQUIRED.

9. 95% COMPACTION IS REQUIRED.

GENERATOR NOTES

1. CONDUITS TO STUB OUT FROM PAD. REFER. TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR QUANTITY AND SIZES.

2. PROVIDE RIGID GALVANIZED ELBOWS AT ANCHORS FOR GENERATOR PAD.

3. CONTRACTOR IS TO ORDER GENERATOR ENCLOSURE WITH PROVISIONS TO ADD A SECURITY TAMPER SWITCH.

4. CONTRACTOR IS TO PROVIDE (3) 2" SPARE CONDUITS STUBBING OUT FROM THE CONCRETE PAD INTO THE ADJACENT PULLBOX.

GENERATOR STUB-UP DETAIL
TRAFFIC PLATE NOTE:

PROVIDE STEEL DIAMOND PLATE

STEEL LIDS WITH TRAXPLATE

SLIP RESISTANT SURFACE
MANUFACTURED BY JENSEN METALTECH.

TRAFFIC COVER
(SEE NOTE ABOVE
TYPICAL KNOCKOUT 20"
X 20"

CABLE RACK (TYPICAL)

TYPICAL KNOCKOUT
8" X 16"
3/4" DIA PULL IRON

TYPICAL FOR ALL

PULL BOXES
NOTES:

1. DEPTH OF PULLBOX MAY VERY. PROVIDE EXTENSION SECTIONS AS REQUIRED TO CLEAR EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES.

2. PROVIDE JENSEN PRECAST CONCRETE PULLBOXES, WITH
"LOCKLID" LID, FURNISH AND INSTALL CABLE RACKS ON WALL
INDICATED. EACH RACK SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH THREE

PORCELAIN CABLE HOLDERS ON A VERTICAL STEEL MOUNTING
BAR. BOLT HOLES SHALL BE PRECAST. PULLBOXES SHALL BE

EQUIPPED WITH STAINLESS STEEL FLATHEAD SCREWS AND SELF
CLEANING HOLES. LOOP ALL CABLES AROUND THE LONGEST
LENGTH IN THE PULLBOX 2' x 3' PULLBOX SHALL BE QUICKSET SERIES 1000.

3. PROVIDE PULL ROPE FOR ALL SPARE CONDUITS.

4. SEAL OFF AND GROUT ALL CONDUIT KNOCKOUT PENETRATIONS AND SPARE CONDUIT OPENINGS.

5. ALL CONDUCTORS ENTERING UNDERGROUND PULL BOX SHALL

BE LABELED WHERE CONDUCTOR IS BEING FED AND WHERE
CONDUCTOR IS BEING TERMINATED.

6. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE NEATLY ORGANIZED.

SECTION B
FIN. GRADE
SET PULL BOX 1" ABOVE

TOP OF FINISH GRADE
SEE NOTE 1
5/ 8"Øx10 GROUND ROD

GROUND ALL STEEL

RACKS, PULL IRON,
COVER ETC.
30 CU. FT. OF 1" CRUSHED
ROCK
6" COMPACT SAND

TYPICAL DUCT BANK
3' CONCRETE

ENCASEMENT
6" 6"
36"
48"
4"
POWER

POWER PRE-CAST CONCRETE PULLBOX
POWER
24"
36"

DRAIN HOLE (TYPICAL)
6"
18"18"
6" THICK CONCRETE BAND

AROUND PULL BOX
18"
-
B
-6
R:\_PROJECT\2023\23-047 GARDENA CIVIC CENTER LIGHTING PROJECT\23-047 E-DETAILS - 2025-02-10 - LUIS MUNGUIA 21-000
San Bernardino, CA 92408
412 E. Vanderbilt Way
Phone: 909.890.3700
Fax: 909.890.3770
Email: [email protected]
SIGNED:02/10/2025
12 15
ELECTRICAL DETAILS E3.3
5-2627

R:\_PROJECT\2023\23-047 GARDENA CIVIC CENTER LIGHTING PROJECT\23-047 E-DETAILS - 2025-02-10 - LUIS MUNGUIA 21-000
San Bernardino, CA 92408
412 E. Vanderbilt Way
Phone: 909.890.3700
Fax: 909.890.3770
Email: [email protected]
SIGNED:02/10/2025
13 15
ELECTRICAL DETAILS E3.4
5-2627

R:\_PROJECT\2023\23-047 GARDENA CIVIC CENTER LIGHTING PROJECT\23-047 E-T24 - 2025-02-10 - LUIS MUNGUIA 21-000
San Bernardino, CA 92408
412 E. Vanderbilt Way
Phone: 909.890.3700
Fax: 909.890.3770
Email: [email protected]
SIGNED:02/10/2025
14 15
TITLE 24 COMPLIANCE FORMS E4.1
5-2627

24 24 5-2627

Signed: 06/04/2025

CD-1

CITY OF GARDENA

NOTICE INVITING BIDS
for

NAKAOKA COMMUNITY CENTER ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AND CIVIC

CENTER OUTDOOR LIGHTING UPGRADES

PROJECT NO. JN 528

Plans and Specifications are available through ARC Document Solutions. Please be advised that there is an additional charge for delivery. Upon payment of the purchase price, they become the property of the purchaser and may not be returned for refund.

You may access the plans through the following website under Public Planroom:

https://www.e-arc.com/location/costa-mesa/
(Scroll down to “Planrooms”/”Order From PlanWell”/”Public Planroom” and select City of Gardena under the “in all company” pulldown menu)
or
https://customer.e-arc.com/arcEOC/Secures/PWELL_PrivateList.aspx?PrjType=Pub&mem=29&c

For help accessing and ordering, please contact a Planwell Administrator at 562.436.9761.

Notice is hereby given that the City of Gardena will receive sealed bids at the office of the City Clerk, City Hall, 1700 W. 162nd Street, Gardena, California, until 2:00pm on June 26, 2025, and shortly thereafter on this same day, they will be publicly opened and read in the City Clerk’s office in person and via ZOOM.

The information to join the bid opening via ZOOM is the following:

Topic: Bid Opening
Time: 2:00 PM on June 26, 2025 (Shortly thereafter the deadline) Join ZOOM Meeting

https://us02web.zoom.us/j/89141761184
Meeting ID: 891 4176 1184
Dial by phone: +1 669 444 9171 US

Should you have any questions or concern in delivering a bid or joining the ZOOM Meeting, please contact City Clerk’s office at (310) 217-9565 or via email at [email protected].

All bids must be in writing, must be sealed, and must be plainly marked on the outside: "BID ON PROJECT NO. JN 528. Any bid received after the hour stated above for any reason whatsoever, will not be considered for any purpose but will be returned unopened to the bidder.

Bids are required for the entire work as described below:

The work shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, appurtenances and incidentals for the following: Provide new electrical service and feed-back existing service from new service. New optional standby generator with automatic transfer switch to be installed to back-up the entire new service. New panels and transformer to be added for future expansion at

CD-2

community building. The existing water heater is to be replaced with new water heater.

Additional outlets to be installed within building and site. The civic lawn will have new security walkway lighting that includes an inverter to provide the emergency egress for 90-minutes. New spider boxes to be provided and outlets throughout the lawn. New parking lot fixtures to be furnished and installed in the northern parking lot and any related work in accordance plans and specifications.

ENGINEER’S ESTIMATE: $1,176,000.00

The time of completion of contract shall be 60 working days as defined in the latest Standard Specifications for Public Works (“Greenbook”). Liquidated Damages, as defined in Section 6-9, shall be $2,000.00 per each consecutive calendar day.

The City’s intent is to schedule a meeting within 5 days of the contract execution to expediate procurement of long lead equipment and material items. See General Provisions Section 6-1.2 for detailed information.

Each bidder must submit a proposal to the City, c/o City Clerk in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Said proposal is to be accompanied by a cash deposit, a certified or cashier's check, or a bidder's bond, made payable to the City of Gardena, in an amount not less than 10 percent of the total bid submitted.

The envelope enclosing the proposal shall be sealed and addressed to the City of Gardena c/o City Clerk and delivered or mailed to the City at 1700 W. 162nd Street, Gardena, California 90247-3778. The envelope shall be plainly marked in the upper left-hand corner as follows:

ATTENTION: CITY, c/o CITY CLERK
(Bidder's Name and Address)

(Number and title of this project)

The successful bidder will be required to furnish a faithful performance bond in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price, and a payment bond in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price, both in a form satisfactory to the City Attorney.

The contractor shall have an active Class “C-10” license from the Contractor’s State License Board at the time of submitting bid.

Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300, the Contractor may, at Contractor's sole cost and expense, substitute securities equivalent to any monies withheld by the City to insured performance under the contract unless applicable federal regulations or policies do not allow such substitution. Such security shall be deposited with the City, or a state or federally chartered bank as escrow agent, who shall pay such monies to the Contractor upon satisfactory completion of the Contract. The Contractor shall be the beneficial owner of any security substituted for monies withheld and shall receive any accrued interest thereon. Securities eligible for investment shall include those listed in Government Code Section 16430 or bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit. No such substitution shall be accepted until the escrow agreement, letter of credit, form of security and any other document related to said substitution is reviewed and found acceptable by the City Attorney.

CD-3

The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid received and to be the sole judge of the merits of the respective bids received. The award, if made, will be made to the lowest responsive responsible bidder.

Bidders are advised that this Project is a public work for purposes of the California Labor Code, which requires payment of prevailing wages. Accordingly, the bidder awarded the Contract and all subcontractors shall be required to pay not less than the prevailing rate of per diem wages, as determined by the Director of the California Department of Industrial Relations, and otherwise comply with the provisions of Section 1770 et seq. of the California Labor Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 16000 et seq., and any other applicable laws, rules and regulations adopted with respect thereto (“California Prevailing Wage Laws”).

Attention is directed to the provisions of Sections 1777.5 and 1777.6 of the Labor Code concerning the employment of apprentices by Contractor or any Subcontractor under it.

Contractor and any Subcontractor under if shall comply with the requirements of said sections in the employment of apprentices.

The Contractor is prohibited from performing work on this project with a subcontractor who is ineligible to perform work on the project pursuant to Section 1777.1 or 1777.7 of the Labor Code.

This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations. All contractors and subcontractors must furnish electronic certified payroll records directly to the Labor Commissioner (aka Division of Labor Standards Enforcement) in a format prescribed by the Labor Commissioner no less than monthly.

As of January 1, 2016, the requirement to furnish electronic certified payroll records to the Labor Commissioner will apply to all public works projects, whether new or ongoing. City may require a copy of the electronic certified payroll records submitted to the DIR at anytime.

Exceptions: The Labor Commissioner may (but is not required to) excuse contractors and subcontractors from furnishing electronic certified payroll records to the Labor Commissioner on a project that is under the jurisdiction of one of the four legacy DIR-approved labor compliance programs (Caltrans, City of Los Angeles, Los Angeles Unified School District, and County of Sacramento) or that is covered by a qualifying project labor agreement.

These requirements will apply to all public works projects that are subject to the prevailing wage requirements of the Labor Code without regard to funding source.

The State General Prevailing Wage Determination is as established by the California Department of Industrial Relations (available at http://www.dir.ca.gov/DLSR/PWD/index.htm).

Skilled and Trained Workforce: This project is subject to Skilled and Trained Workforce Requirements per Sections 2600 through 2603 of the Public Contract Code.

Award of Contract: The following are conditions to the award of the contract:

I. Each contractor and subcontractor listed on the bid must be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code Section 1725.5. subject to the limited exceptions set forth in Labor Code Section 1771.1(a) (regarding the submission of a bid as authorized by Business & Professions Code Section 7029.1 or Public Contract Code Section 10164 or 20103.5 provided the contractor is registered to

CD-4

perform public work pursuant to Section 1725.5 at the time the contract was awarded):
and
II. No contractor or subcontractor may be awarded this contract unless the contractor and each subcontractor listed on the bid is registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Section 17265.5.

Any questions regarding this bid package may be referred to JOSE ESPINOZA, Public Works Engineering Division at 310.217.9644 or [email protected].

GP-1

GENERAL PROVISIONS

NAKAOKA COMMUNITY CENTER ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AND

CIVIC CENTER OUTDOOR LIGHTING UPGRADES
JN 528

PART 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 1 – GENERAL

1-1 GENERAL. The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (“Greenbook”) written and promulgated by the Southern California Chapter of the American Public Works Association and the Southern California Districts of the Associated General Contractors of California shall be the Standard Specifications of the City. All work shall conform to the 2021 edition, including supplements of the Standard Specifications, the Special Provisions which supplement or modify the Standard Specifications, and the Standard Drawings as issued by the City (defined herein as “Agency”) available at the time bids are opened unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.

The above referenced Standard Specifications, Special Provisions and Standard Drawings are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents.

For the convenience of the Contractor, the section and subsection numbering system used in these Special Provisions corresponds to that used in the Standard Specifications.

1-2 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS. Whenever in the Standard Specification the following terms are used, they shall be understood to mean and refer to the following:

(a) AGENCY The City of Gardena, a California municipal corporation.

(b) BOARD The City Council of the City of Gardena

(c) CONTRACT Documents including but not limited to the proposal forms, DOCUMENTS Standard “Greenbook” Specifications, Special Provisions, Technical Provisions, Notice Inviting Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Bonds, Insurance, Contract and all Addenda
setting forth any modifications of the documents.

(d) ENGINEER The City of Gardena Director of Public Works/City Engineer or his authorized representative.

(e) BIDDER An individual, co-partnership, association or corporation submitting a proposal for the work contemplated, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative.

(f) LEGAL ADDRESS The legal address of the Contractor to be the address OF CONTRACTOR given on the Contractor’s bid and is hereby designated as the place to which all notices, letters or other
communications to the Contractor shall be mailed or
delivered.

(g) LABORATORY An established laboratory approved and authorized by the Engineer for testing materials and work involved in the contract.

GP-2

1-7 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT.

1-7.1 General. The proposal shall be fully executed and submitted on the forms provided by the Agency and shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope marked and addressed as directed in the “Notice Inviting Bids”.

If the proposal is made by an individual, it shall be signed and his or her full name and address shall be given; if it is made by a firm it shall be signed with co-partnership name by a general partner thereof, who shall also sign his or her known name, and the name and address of each member of such co-partnership shall be given; if made by a corporation, the name of the corporation shall be signed by its duly authorized officers and attested by the corporate seal.

Bidders are warned against making erasures or alterations of any kind on their Proposal.

Proposals which contain omissions, erasures, alterations, conditions or additions not called for may be rejected.

At the time the Contract is awarded by the Agency, the Contractor shall be licensed under the provisions of Chapter 9, Division 3, of the Business and Professions Code of the State of California to do the type of work contemplated in the Contract and shall be skilled and regularly engaged in the general class or type of work required by this Contract.

1-7.2 Contract Bonds. The “Performance Bond” is equivalent to City’s “Faithful Performance Bond”.

1-7.3 Examination of Plans, Specifications and Project Site. Bidders shall read the specifications, review the drawings and examine the existing facilities to fully understand the project in order to plan for the improvements as shown in the contract, including local condition, uncertainty of weather and all other contingencies.

Bidders shall satisfy themselves by personal examination of the proposed work sites, and by such other means as they may choose as to actual conditions and requirements and as to the accuracy of the quantities stated in the Proposal forms. Information derived from the maps, plans, specifications, profiles, drawings, or from the Engineer/Architect of the record, shall not relieve the bidder of this responsibility, and the interpretation of the data disclosed by borings or other preliminary investigations is not guaranteed nor is any liability assumed by the Agency.

1-7.4 Interpretation of Drawings and Documents. If a prospective bidder is in doubt as to the true meaning or intent of any part of the Contract Documents including the Specifications, or discovers discrepancies in, or omissions from, the Specifications or Drawings, he may submit to the Engineer a written request for an interpretation or a correction thereof. Interpretations or corrections of the Contract Documents including the Specifications and Drawings, shall be made only by addendum duly issued by the Engineer, and a copy of such addendum will be sent by certified mail, postage prepaid, or delivered to each person receiving a set of the Contract Documents whose address is known to the Engineer and such addendum shall be considered a part of and incorporated in the Contract Documents.

1-7.5 Award of Contract. After the Proposals have been publicly opened and read aloud, they will be checked for accuracy and compliance with all provisions as specified herein.

The Agency reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid received and to be the sole judge of the merits of the respective bids received.

Bids subsequently shown to be mathematically unbalanced would be rejected as GP-3
nonresponsive.

A mathematically unbalanced bid is one containing lump sum or unit bid items which do not reflect reasonable actual costs plus a reasonable proportionate share of the bidder’s anticipated profit, overhead costs, and other indirect costs, which he/she anticipates for the performance of the items in question.

“A bid is mathematically unbalanced if the bid is structured on the basis of nominal prices for some work and inflated prices for other work; that is, each element of the bid must carry its proportionate share of the total cost of the work plus profits.”

“A bid is materially unbalanced if there is a reasonable doubt that award to the bidder submitting the mathematically unbalanced bid will result in the lowest ultimate cost to the Government.

Consequently, a materially unbalanced bid may not be accepted.”

Award of the Contract, if it be awarded, will ordinarily be made by the Agency within 30 days after opening of the bids. Award will be made to the lowest responsive responsible bidder.

In selecting the lowest responsive responsible bidder, consideration will be given to the general competency of the bidder for the performance of the work covered by the proposal. To receive favorable consideration, a bidder may be required to present evidence that he has successfully performed similar work of comparable magnitude or submit other evidence satisfactory to the Agency that he or his associates are competent to manage the proposed undertaking and to carry it forward to a successful conclusion. Professional integrity and honesty of purpose shall be essential requirements. A showing of adequate financial resources may be required but will not alone determine whether a bidder is competent to undertake the proposed work.

Only manufacturers or contractors of established reputation, or their duly authorized dealers or agency, having proper facilities for the manufacture of the materials or equipment and for servicing same, or for proper execution of the work called for in the contract, will be considered in making the award.

1-7.6 Execution of Contract. A bidder whose proposal is accepted shall properly sign a written contract with the Agency on the form attached hereto and return said contract together with good and approved bonds and insurance certificates as required by the Contract Documents within twenty-one (21) calendar days from the date of the mailing of a notice from the Agency to the bidder, according to the address given by him, of acceptance of his proposal.

Contract bonds and certificates of insurance, if required, shall be filed in all instances before delivering any equipment, materials, or performing any work under the contract; also before any purchase order shall be issued. An executed Power of Attorney form shall be submitted with all contract bonds herein specified.

If a bidder whose proposal is accepted fails or refuses to enter into a contract as herein provided, or to conform to any stipulated requirement in connection therewith, the money represented by his check or bidder’s bond shall be refunded less the difference between the low bid and the bid of the bidder with whom the Agency enters into an agreement in accordance with the provisions of the Public Contracts Code Section 20174. At the discretion of the Agency, an award may be made to the bidder whose proposal is next most acceptable to the Agency, and such bidder and his surety shall fulfill every stipulation embraced herein as if he were the party to whom the first award was made.

A corporation to which an award is made may be required before the contract is finally signed to furnish evidence of its corporate existence, of its right to do business in California and of the authority of the officer signing the contract and bonds for the corporation to so sign.

GP-4

1-7.7 Return of Proposal and Guarantee. The check or bond of a bidder to whom the contract has been awarded will be returned to him after all of the acts, for the performance of which said security is required, have been fully performed. The checks or bid bonds of the second and third lowest bidders will be returned when the bidder to whom the contract has been awarded has properly executed all of the required Contract Documents. Check or bid bonds of other bidders will be returned when their proposals are rejected or in any event at the expiration of forty-five (45) days from the date of opening bids.

1-7.8 Precedence of Contract Documents. The order of precedence of contract document shall be:

FIRST Requirements of law, including the Code and Ordinances of the City of Gardena.

SECOND Permits from other agencies as may be required by law.

THIRD Permits from City of Gardena Departments as may be required by law or ordinance.

FOURTH The Contract.

FIFTH The Bid Proposal.

SIXTH Addenda.

SEVENTH Notice Inviting Bids.

EIGHTH Instructions to Bidders.

NINTH Technical Provisions.

TENTH Plans.

ELEVENTH General Provisions of the Standard Specifications.

TWELFTH Standard Plans.

THIRTEENTH Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (current edition).

FOURTEENTH Caltrans Standard Plans and Specifications.

FIFTEENTH Reference Specifications.

Change orders, supplemental agreements and approved revisions to Plans and Specifications will take precedence over documents listed above, except those listed as FIRST, SECOND and THIRD. Detailed plans shall have precedence over general plans.

SECTION 2 – SCOPE OF THE WORK

2-2 PERMITS. The Contractor will obtain, at no cost to the Agency, all permits necessary to perform the work on streets, highways, railways or other rights-of-ways. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all costs incurred for permits necessitated by its operations such as, but not GP-5
limited to those permits required for night work, overload, blasting and demolition. For private contracts, the Contractor shall obtain all permits incidental to the work or made necessary by its operations, and pay all costs incurred by the permit requirements.

The Contractor and each subcontractor employed upon the work must have or obtain a valid City of Gardena Business License in accordance with the provisions of the Gardena Municipal Code.

The project is subject to permit(s) from the Community Development Department. The permits are ready to be issued and the Contractor is required to pull the applicable project permits (i.e. grading, electrical, mechanical plumbing, building, etc.). The permit costs and any associated deposits will be borne by the Contractor.

2.10 DISPUTED WORK.

2.10.1 Retention of Imperfect Work. If any portion of the work done or materials furnished under the contract proves defective or not in accordance with the specifications and contract drawings, and if the imperfection in the same is not of sufficient magnitude or importance to make the work dangerous or undesirable, or if the removal of such work is impracticable or will create conditions which are dangerous or undesirable in the opinion of the Engineer, the Engineer shall have the right and authority to retain the work instead of requiring it to be removed and reconstructed, but he shall make deductions therefor in the payment of the contract item due Contractor as may be just and reasonable.

2-11. DISPUTE RESOLUTION.

2-11.1 Requests for Contract Adjustments and Relief. If either Contractor or the Agency believes that it is entitled to relief against the other for any event arising out of or related to the work or Project, such party shall provide written notice to the other party of the basis for its claim for relief. Such notice shall, if possible, be made prior to incurring any cost or expense and in accordance with any specific notice requirements contained in the applicable sections of this Contract.

In the absence of any specific notice requirement, written notice shall be given within a reasonable time, not to exceed fourteen (14) days, after the occurrence giving rise to the claim for relief or after the claiming party reasonably should have recognized the event or condition giving rise to the request, whichever is later. Such notice shall include sufficient information to advise the other party of the circumstances giving rise to the claim for relief, the specific contractual adjustment or relief requested and the basis of such request.

2-11.2 Dispute Avoidance and Resolution. The parties are fully committed to working with each other throughout the Project and agree to communicate regularly with each other at all times so as to avoid or minimize disputes or disagreements. If disputes or disagreements do arise, Contractor and the Agency each commit to resolving such disputes or disagreements in an amicable, professional and expeditious manner so as to avoid unnecessary losses, delays and disruptions to the work under the Contract.

Contractor and the Agency will first attempt to resolve disputes or disagreements at the field level through discussions between Contractor’s Representative and the Engineer.

If a dispute or disagreement cannot be resolved through the Contractor’s Representative and the Engineer, Contractor’s Chief Executive Officer or similar senior representative and the Gardena City Manager, or designee, upon the request of the other party, shall meet as soon as conveniently possible, but in no case later than twenty (20) days after such a request is made, to attempt to resolve such dispute or disagreement. Prior to any meeting between the parties’ GP-6
senior representatives, the parties will exchange relevant information that will assist the parties in resolving their dispute or disagreement.

If, after meeting, the senior representatives determine that the dispute or disagreement cannot be resolved on terms satisfactory to both parties, the parties may submit the dispute to binding or non-binding mediation. The mediation shall be conducted in any manner and by any person or mediation association mutually acceptable to the parties.

2-11.3 Arbitration. Any claims, disputes or controversies between the parties arising out of or relating to the Contract, or the breach thereof, which have not been resolved in accordance with the procedures set forth in Section 2-11.2 above may be decided by binding or non-binding arbitration. The arbitration shall be conducted in any manner and by any person or arbitration association mutually acceptable to the parties.

2-11.4 Claims Disputes. Any claims of Contractor, as “claims” are defined in California Public Contract Code Section 9204 shall be processed in accordance with that section. Section 9204 provides in relevant part that upon receiving a claim from a contractor, together with reasonable documentation to support the claim, a contracting public entity shall conduct a reasonable review of the claim and, within a period not to exceed 45 days [except as otherwise provided in Section 9204], shall provide the claimant a written statement identifying what portion of the claim is disputed and what portion is undisputed.

Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and made within 60 days after the public entity issues its written statement. If the public entity fails to issue a written statement, Section 2-11.3 shall apply. If the contractor disputes the public entity’s written response, or if the public entity fails to respond to a claim within the time prescribed, the contractor may demand in writing an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute.

Upon receipt of a demand in writing sent by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, the public entity shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute. Within 10 business days following the conclusion of the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion of the claim remains in dispute, the public entity shall provide the claimant a written statement identifying the portion of the claim that remains in dispute and the portion that is undisputed.

Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and made within 60 days after the public entity issues its written statement. Any disputed portion of the claim of the claim, as identified by the contractor in writing, shall be submitted to nonbinding mediation, with the public entity and the contractor sharing the associated costs equally. The public entity and contractor shall mutually agree to a mediator within 10 business days after the disputed portion of the claim has been identified in writing. If the parties cannot agree upon a mediator, each party shall select a mediator and those mediators shall select a qualified neutral third party to mediate with regard to the disputed portion of the claim. Each party shall bear the fees and costs charged by its respective mediator in connection with the selection of the neutral mediator.

If mediation is unsuccessful, the parts of the claim remaining in dispute shall be subject to other applicable procedures.

2-13 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS (“RECORD” DRAWINGS). At all times, the Contractor shall maintain at the project a “Record” set of Drawings and Specifications to include all executed addenda, change orders, and field orders.

Prior to each progress payment the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer, a set of contract drawings with all applicable “as constructed” notes placed/recorded thereon. Failure to provide “as constructed” plans will cause progress payment to be withheld until information is provided GP-7
to City.

After completion of the work and before final payment, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer a complete set of contract drawings with all applicable “as constructed” noted placed/record thereon. The final form and detail of these as constructed plans are subject to the acceptance of the Engineer.

2-14 MARKING REMOVAL. All markings placed by the Contractor, City, and Underground Service Alert (USA) during construction shall be removed at the completion of the work. These markings shall include, but not limited to, paint, stakes, and metal tags.

All cost associated with removal of markings shall be included in the bid prices for the applicable bid items. Failure of the Contractor to remove these markings shall be cause for the City to do the work and withhold the costs from the Contractor’s final payment.

SECTION 3 – CONTROL OF THE WORK

3-5 INSPECTION. Inspection shall be made once a day for areas ready for inspection. Areas or items that fail inspection or that are not ready for inspection shall be rescheduled by the contractor.

Inspection of the work shall not relieve the contractor of the obligation to fulfill all conditions and requirements of the contract.

3-6 THE CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIVE. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with the name, address and cell/ business/home telephone numbers of the person responsible for the maintenance of barricades, traffic control signs, lights and other safety devices.

3-10 SURVEYING.

3-10.3 Line and Grade. Unless otherwise provided in the Technical Provisions, establishing lines and grades for construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, with the following provisions:

All work under this contract shall be built in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the plans. Field survey for establishing these, and for the control of construction, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All such surveys, including construction staking, shall be performed on all items ordinarily requiring grade and alignment, at intervals normally accepted by the agencies and trade involved.

The Contractor shall provide a copy of the office calculations and grade sheets to the Agency’s Inspector. The Contractor shall be responsible for any error in the finished work, and shall notify the Engineer within 24 hours of any discrepancies or design errors discovered during staking.

Unless a separate bid item is provided, the payment for surveying, construction staking, professional services, office calculations, furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, tools and incidentals, and for doing all work involved shall be considered as included in the various items of work, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor.

3-10.4 Permanent Survey Markers. The Contractor is required to locate and tie out survey monuments in the project area prior to construction involving street and highways, or City public right of way and to file with the County Surveyor a Corner Record of any such work. Prior to final payment and the issuance of a completion certificate, the Contractor is required to file a Corner Record for survey monumentation that is replaced. All such survey work shall be GP-8
performed under the supervision of a California licensed Land Surveyor or a Civil Engineer authorized to perform such work.

The Contractor shall provide the Agency a copy of the office calculations and documents submitted to the County for filing in connection with the aforementioned work.

3-12 WORK SITE MAINTENANCE.

3-12.1 General. The Contractor shall keep the work site clean and free from rubbish and debris.

The Contractor shall abate dust nuisance by cleaning, sweeping and sprinkling with water in keeping with the AQMD and NPDES requirements. Debris, soil or other matter shall not be washed into storm drains but shall be collected and disposed of in a legal, responsible manner.

The construction area shall be cleaned with a power sweeper at the end of every workday and when deemed necessary by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall maintain drainage within and through the work areas. Earth dams will not be permitted in paved areas. Use temporary sandbags to control the site perimeter. At the completion of the project sandbags shall become the property of the City of Gardena and shall be remain in place.

The Contractor shall not spill on haul routes. Any such spillage shall be removed immediately and the area cleaned.

Stockpiling of construction materials or debris on City right-of-way shall be in accordance with the NPDES permit and shall be approved by the inspector. At the completion of work, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all work areas.

3-12.2 Air Pollution and Surface Maintenance Control. The Contractor shall obtain a construction water meter from Golden State Water including required deposit and fees. The Contractor shall pay for the water used, at the current water rates. All arrangements for construction water shall be made by contractor with Golden State Water at Contractor expense.

3-12.4. Storage of Equipment and Material.

3-12.4.1 General. All costs associated with the disposal of all excavated or demolition materials, including any gate fees, shall be paid by the Contractor. These costs shall be included in the bid price for the applicable bid items.

Prior to any excavated or demolition material being removed from the construction site the Contractor shall notify the City as to the hauling route and destination for disposal. If the location for disposal is other than a county landfill then the Contractor shall provide the City with written permission and release of liability for the City from the owner of the property where the material will be deposited.

The City has an exclusive agreement with Waste Resources, Inc. and no other firm may provide bulk trash bins in the event the work requires this service.

3-12.4.2 Storage in Public Streets. Construction equipment shall not be stored at the construction site, any public street or publicly owned facilities without approval of the City.

Contractor shall store equipment at a contractor’s rental yard.

All excavated material that is to be hauled to and disposed of at a County landfill site by the Contractor is subject to a County gate fee based on tonnage.

GP-9

3-12.5.4 Protection and Restoration of Existing Improvements. Any facilities, structures, water lines, landscaping, surfaces, signs, pavement markings, painted curbs, house numbers, etc., which are damaged during construction shall be restored to the satisfaction of the City. Damaged water lines shall be repaired immediately at no additional cost to the city.

3-12.5.5 Access to Private Property. The Contractor shall be aware that business and residential access must be maintained at all times. The Contractor shall schedule operations to minimize interference with access to private property.

The main access way to any business or home shall not be completely blocked for more than one four-hour period a day except blockage shall be limited to one twenty-four (24) hour period when concrete is poured.

Temporary access ways shall be provided from the street to the main access way of all businesses and homes by use of traffic rated steel plates or any other method approved by the city.

Payment for this item shall be included in the applicable contract work item.

3-13 COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND WARRANTY.

3-13.3 Warranty. In addition to the guarantees as required in Section 1-7.2 and 3-13.3 of the Standard Specifications, the Faithful Performance Bond shall remain in full force and effect for a period of one year after acceptance of the work by the Agency to insure that defects, which may appear within said period, will be repaired, replaced, or corrected by the Contractor, at his own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer within thirty (30) days after written notice thereof by the Agency.

SECTION 4 – CONTROL OF MATERIAL

4-1 GENERAL.

4-1.1 Warranty of Title. No materials, supplies or equipment for the work under this Contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest therein or any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier.

The Contractor warrants clear and good title to all materials, supplies and equipment installed and incorporated in the work, and agrees upon completion of all work to deliver the premises, together with all improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon by him to the Agency free from any claims, liens, encumbrances or charges, and further agrees that neither he nor any person, firm or corporation furnishing any material or labor for work covered by the Contract shall have any right to a lien upon the premises or any improvement or appurtenance thereon; provided, that this shall not preclude the Contractor from installing metering devices or other equipment of utility companies the title of which is commonly retained by the utility company. Nothing contained in this section, however, shall defeat or impair the right of such persons furnishing materials or labor under any bond given by the Contractor for their protection, or any right under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the Contractor, which are in the hands of the Agency.

The provisions of this section shall be inserted in all subcontractor’s and material contracts, and notice of its provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the work when no formal contract is entered into regarding such materials.

GP-10

SECTION 5 – LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBLITIES

5-4 INSURANCE. In lieu of Section 5-4 of the Standard Specifications, refer to the City Contract Documents Section, CD-10, for detail requirements.

5-5 ANTITRUST CLAIMS. By entry into this Contract, Contractor hereby acknowledges the terms of Section 7103.5 of the Public Contract Code and hereby offers and agrees to assign to the Agency all rights, title and interest in all causes of action it may have as outlined above.

5-7 SAFETY.

5-7.4 Hazardous Substances. As required by Public Contract Code Section 7104, if this Contract involves digging trenches or other excavations that extend deeper than four (4) feet below the surface, Contractor shall promptly, and prior to disturbance of any conditions, notify the Agency of: (1) any material discovered in excavation that Contractor believes to be a hazardous waste that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II or Class III disposal site; (2) subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated by the Agency; and (3) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature at the site, significantly different from those ordinarily encountered in such contract work. Upon notification, the Agency shall promptly investigate the conditions to determine whether a change order is appropriate. In the event of a dispute, Contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date and shall proceed with all work to be performed under the Contract but shall retain all rights provided by the Contract and by law for making protests and resolving the dispute.

5-7.4.1 Edison Energized Conductors. Contractor hereby promises and agrees that in the performance of the work specified in this Contract, it will employ and utilized only qualified persons, as hereinafter defined, to work in proximity to Edison’s secondary, primary and transmission facilities. The term “qualified person” is defined in Title 8, California Administrative Code, Section 2700, as follows:

“Qualified Person: A person who by reason of experience or instruction is familiar with the operation to be performed and the hazards involved.”

Contractor further promises and agrees that the provisions of this section shall be and are binding upon any subcontractor or subcontractors that may be retained by it, and that Contractor shall take such steps as are necessary to assure compliance by said subcontractor or subcontractors with the requirements of this section.

5-7.4.2 Emergency Provisions. Unusual conditions may arise on the work which will require that immediate and unusual provision be made to protect the public from danger or loss or damage to life and property, due directly or indirectly to the prosecution of the work, and it is part of the service required of the Contractor to make such provisions and to furnish such protection.

Whenever, in the opinion of the Agency, an emergency exists of which the Agency is aware and against which the Contractor has not taken sufficient precaution for the safety of the public or the protection of utilities or of adjacent structures or property which may be injured by the progress of construction; and whenever, in the opinion of the Agency, immediate action shall be considered necessary in order to protect public or private personnel or property interests, or prevent likely loss of human life or damage on account of the operations under the Contract, then in that event the Agency may provide suitable protection to said interests by causing such work to be done and material to be furnished, as in the opinion of the Agency may seem reasonable and necessary, all at the expense of the Contractor.

GP-11

SECTION 6 – PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK

6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK

6-1.1 Construction Schedule. The Contractor’s proposed construction schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer within fourteen (14) calendar days after the date of the contract execution. The schedule shall be supported by written statements from each supplier of materials or equipment indicating that all orders have been placed and acknowledged and setting forth the dates that each item will be delivered.

The Contractor shall include in his bid all costs to perform the work under this contract in stages.

The Contractor shall begin and complete work in each stage prior to starting work in subsequent stages unless previous permission is obtained from the Engineer. Restricting parking on City parking lots shall require approval of the engineer.

6-1.2 Commencement of the Work. Processing (submission / review / approval) of submittals shall commence immediately. The city and its design consultants will hold meetings with the contractor to identify long lead time for equipment and materials within 5 days of contract signing.

Upon approval of the submittals by the city, the contractor shall immediately order/procure subject equipment and materials and show proof of such procurement and promised delivery date from its suppliers within 14 calendar days.

When the city is satisfied with the delivery dates, then the project schedule can be finalized and shall be the basis of issuance of the NTP for construction. Prior to issuing the Notice to Proceed for construction, the Engineer will schedule a preconstruction meeting with the Contractor to review the proposed construction schedule, arrange utility coordination, discuss construction methods and clarify inspection procedures.

The names, addresses and telephone numbers of the Contractor and subcontractors, or their representatives, shall be filed with the Public Works Manager and the County Sheriff’s Department or the City Police Department prior to beginning work.

The Contractor shall also notify the City of Gardena and the owners of all utilities and substructures within the Project area not less than 48 hours prior to starting construction. The following utility companies list of names and telephone numbers is intended for the convenience of the contractor and is not guaranteed to be complete or correct:

COMPANY CONTACT TELEPHONE NO.

Southern California Edison Manuel Vargas, Jr. 310.783.9389 Southern California Gas Melissa Fukunaga: Tech Services Planning: Attn - Lead Planner
213.231.7281
AT&T Marco A. Perez 626.491.5503
Raymond Dover 310.515.4257
Gardena Police Dispatch 310.3237911
L.A. County Fire Dept. 310.323.7911
Time Warner
Communications Arturo Fernandez 310.750.9099
Crown Castle Hector Aguilera 951.454.5111
Waste Resources of Gardena Lorena Rodriguez 310.366.7600 GP-12
Golden State Water Co. Conde Ventura 310.436.6950 x107 Joseph Salcido 310.660.0320 x101
L.A. County Flood Control Daryll Chenoweth 626.458.3129 L.A. Sanitation District Jon Ganz 562.908.4288
Metropolitan Water District Civil Eng. Substructures Section 213.217.7059 Chevron Pipeline Dave Zerler 310.669.4014
Underground Service Alert 800.422.4133

The Contractor shall submit periodic Progress reports to the Engineer by the tenth day of each month. The report shall include an updated Construction Schedule. Any deviations from the original schedule shall be explained. Progress payments will be withheld pending receipt of any outstanding reports.

6-1.3 Working Day. The Contractor’s working hours shall be limited to the hours between 7:30 A.M. and 4:30 P.M., Monday through Friday except holidays. No work which will cause loud or disruptive noise to adjacent residents and “No Parking” enforcement shall begin prior to 8:00 a.m. nor terminate later than 4:30 p.m. All planned power interruptions/outages to the facility are to be scheduled during the weekend. Any other deviation from normal working hours will not be allowed unless written permission has been duly obtained beforehand from the office of the City Engineer. The Contractor shall provide adequate light for proper prosecution of the work, for the safety of the workmen and the public, and for proper inspection.

If the Contractor works beyond the allowed working hours without prior written approval from the Engineer, the Contractor may be charged Five Hundred ($500) for each occurrence as required by the Engineer. The amount will be deducted from a progress payment or bond.

Contractor hereby acknowledges and shall be required to comply with the provisions of California Labor Code Section 1810 et seq. According to those sections, eight (8) hours of labor shall constitute a legal day’s work. Contractor shall pay to the Agency a penalty of Twenty-Five Dollars ($25.00) for each worker employed in the execution of this Contract by Contractor, or by any Subcontractor, for each calendar day during which such worker is required or permitted to work more than eight (8) hours in any calendar day or forty (40) hours in any one (1) calendar week, except when payment for overtime is made at not less than one and one-half (1-1/2) times the basic rate for that worker.

In the event of either a requested or emergency deviation, inspection service fees will be charged against the Contractor. The service fees will be calculated at overtime rates including benefits, overhead and travel time. The service fees will be deducted from any amounts due to the Contractor.

6-1.4 Notice and Service Thereof. Any notice required or given by one party to the other under the contract shall be in writing and shall be dated and signed by the party giving such notice or by a duly authorized representative of such party. Any such notice shall not be effective for any purpose whatever unless served in the following manner:

Notice shall be given to the Agency by personal delivery thereof to the City of Gardena Engineer or by depositing the same in the United States mail enclosed in a sealed envelope, registered and with postage prepaid, addressed to:

Public Works Department
City of Gardena
1717 W. 162 nd Street
GP-13
Gardena, CA 90247-3778

Notice shall be given to the Contractor by personal delivery thereof to said Contractor or to his authorized representative at the site of the project, or by depositing the same in the United States mail, enclosed in a sealed envelope addressed to said Contractor at the address established for the conduct of the work under this Contract, postage prepaid and registered.

Notice shall be given to the Surety, or any other person, by personal delivery to said Surety or other person, or by depositing the same in the United States Mail, enclosed in a sealed envelope addressed to such Surety or persons at the address of said Surety or persons last communicated to the party giving the notice, postage prepaid and registered.

Notification of Property Owners and Tenants - The Contractor shall notify each property owner and/or tenant in the project area in writing five (5) working days prior to the start of construction.

If pedestrian or vehicular access to private property is to be blocked, the Contractor shall again notify each property owner and/or tenant in writing five (5) working days prior to construction activities. The Contractor shall provide additional notices when a lapse time occurs during each phase/segment work.

The written notice shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to being delivered.

6-2 PROSECUTION OF THE WORK.

6-2.1 Contractor’s Responsibility for Work. Until the formal acceptance of the work by the Agency, the Contractor shall have the charge and care thereof and shall, subject to the insurance protection furnished in accordance with the Section 1-7.6 and 5-4 hereof, bear the risk of accident, loss or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution or from the non-execution of the work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and otherwise correct damages to any portion of the work occasioned by any of the above causes before its acceptance.

In case of suspension of work from any cause whatsoever, the Contractor shall be responsible for all materials and the proper temporary storage thereof.

6-3 TIME OF COMPLETION.

6-3.1 General. The contract time shall begin per the City’s written notification. Work must be completed within working days specified for the project. In addition, the Contractor shall notify the City 24 hours in advance of the actual commencement of work.

No work shall be undertaken during the City’s holiday closures. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to determine the City’s closure dates.

6-9 LIQUDATED DAMAGES. The amount of liquidated damages is hereby amended to $500 for each consecutive calendar day.

SECTION 7 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

7-1 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES FOR UNIT PRICE WORK.

7-1.2 Method of Measure. The quantities shown on the Bid Schedule are approximate only. The Contractor will be paid for the actual quantities of work based on approved field measurements as GP-14
provided for in these Specifications. The City reserves the right to increase or decrease the amount of any item or portion of work to be performed or materials furnished, or to delete any item, in accordance with the Specifications. Additional bid item work shall be completed within the total working days in these specifications. Additional working days maybe allowed with the approval of the engineer.

7-3 PAYMENT.

7-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. The Engineer will authorize monthly partial/progress payments per Section 7-3.2 of the Standard Specifications. Contractor’s monthly invoice shall be submitted on company letterhead. Each invoice submitted shall include: project name, date of invoice, progress payment number, and purchase order number. All bid items shall be included on each invoice and include unit, unit price bid, original quantity, amount, previous payment quantity and amount, current invoice payment quantity and amount, total project payment quantity and amount. In addition, any approved change orders shall be listed on invoice. Payment to Contractor typically takes 30 days from submittal of approved invoice.

However, payments will be withheld pending receipt of any outstanding reports required by the Contract Documents.

7-3.3 Delivered Materials. The City will NOT honor or make any progress payments for materials ordered and delivered to the job site by the Contractor unless prior approval is obtained from the Engineer.

7-4 PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK.

7-4.3 EXTRA WORK. When work is performed on a "time and materials" basis, the following percentages shall be added to the Contractor's cost and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profits:

1) Labor ......................................................... 20 2) Materials ......................................................... 15 3) Equipment Rental ....................................................... 15 4) Other Items and Expenditures .................................... 15

To the sum of the costs and markups provided for in this section, 1 percent shall be added as compensation for bonding.

When all or any part of the extra work is performed by a Subcontractor, the markup established above shall be applied to the Subcontractor's actual cost of such work. A markup of 10 percent on the first $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work and a markup of 5 percent on work added in excess of $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work may be added by the Contractor.

SECTION 8 – FACILITIES FOR AGENCY PERSONNEL

8-2 FIELD OFFICE FACILITIES. The Contractor shall provide the class of field office indicated below:

Class "A" Class "B" Class "C"

In the event none of the boxes are marked above, no specific field office will be required, and the use therefor of any field office will be at the Contractor's discretion. The location of any field office shall be as provided on the plans, in these Specifications or as designated by the Engineer.

GP-15

END OF GENERAL PROVISIONS

TP-1

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

NAKAOKA COMMUNITY CENTER ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AND

CIVIC CENTER OUTDOOR LIGHTING UPGRADES
JN 528

PART 1 – TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 1 – GENERAL
PREFACE: All work and materials shall conform to the "Standard Specification for Public Works Construction", 2021 edition, except as modified by the contract and these Technical Provisions.

Incidental Work - All work and materials required by the plans and specifications, and not specifically listed in the bid schedule items of work, shall be considered incidental and no additional payment shall be made therefore. Incidental items shall include, but are not limited to, mobilization; implementation of the SWPPP and Best Management Practices for the protection of storm drain structures; adjusting utility access covers to grade; saw cutting; excavation and disposal of materials; survey; traffic control and coordination of utilities.

PART 2 – CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

SECTION 200 – ROCK MATERIALS

200-2. UNTREATED BASE MATERIAL

200-2.1 General. The Contractor shall furnish Certified Weight Tickets for material delivered to the job site and deliver it to the Engineer or his representative before the end of the working day.

The City may hire a qualified soils engineer to perform all tests. If the material furnished by the Contractor fails any tests, the Contractor shall remove said material and shall complete the construction of the base with material acceptable to the Engineer at no extra cost to the City.

Costs for base material shall be incidental and included in the bid item of work for which it is required, and no additional payment will be allowed therefore.

SECTION 201 – CONCRETE, MORTAR, AND RELATED MATERIALS

201-1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE.

201-1.1.2 Concrete Specified by Class and Alternate Class. Concrete shall be 520-C-2500 for curb-gutter, curb ramps, driveways, sidewalk and concrete pavement. Curing compound shall be Type 2 (if required).

SECTION 203 – BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

203-6 ASPHALT CONCRETE.

203-6.4.1 Class and Grade. Asphalt hot mix shall be C2-PG64-10 for capping or finish course.

Feather join edges shall be made along straight lines by hand raking out all heavy aggregates prior TP-2

to rolling to produce a smooth uniform surface. Compacted edge along gutter lip shall be 3/8 inch in height.

203-11 ASPHALT RUBBER HOT MIX (ARHM).

230-11.3 Composition and Grading. Asphalt-Rubber shall be Class ARHM-GG-C, Standard Specifications Section 230-11 Wet Process and Section 302-9.

PART 3 – CONSTRUCTION METHODS

SECTION 300 - EARTHWORK

300-1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING.

In addition to the work outlined in Section 300-1, the following items of work are included under "Clear and Grub":

A. Providing clean topsoil and grading of parkways as directed by the Engineer to restore the parkway grades.

B. Replacement of damaged pipe curb drain, as well as the coring and/or reinstatement of pipe curb drains.

C. Protection or replacement of brick banding on driveway.

D. Protection of fences adjacent to and within the public right-of-way.

E. Relocation of existing signs and warning devices (City shall provide new poles as required.)
F. Painting new and repainting existing curb markings such as yellow, blue, white, green or red curb as well as curb addresses
G. Protect existing private/public irrigation systems, and repair irrigation systems damaged during construction.

H. Protection of all existing improvements (public or private), unless shown to be removed/relocated/adjusted as part of the construction. The Contractor shall repair or replace these items if damaged with new materials equal to the original or better, as required by the Engineer.

I. Protection of all utilities, walls, fences, hedges, buildings, concrete slabs, planters, and other private or public improvements not specifically shown to be removed as part of the construction. The Contractor shall replace these items, if damaged, with new material equal to the original or better, as required by the Engineer.

J. All complaints/claims resulting from reconstruction of concrete improvements will be forwarded to the Contractor. The complaint/claim will be fully rectified or the City will repair the item and deduct that amount from progress payment.

300-1.1.a General.

All existing improvements, including those on private property, shall be protected in place. Any damage to and removal of these improvements shall be repaired and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.

All excavated material shall be immediately hauled away and disposed of outside the project limits. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages and claims that may arise as a result of this disposal.

TP-3

300-12 EXCAVATION. Roadway excavation shall include sawcutting, excavating, removing, hauling, and disposing of all soil materials, existing asphaltic concrete pavement, PCC pavement, subgrade and similar appurtenances which are to be removed for construction of the street reconstruction as shown on the Plans. Earthwork, subgrade preparation and finishing roadway shall confirm to the applicable requirements of Section 300 and 301 and other pertinent sections of the Standard Specifications for the various items involved. Payment for excavation shall be incidental and included in the appropriate unit price bid.

300-12.1 Asphalt Pavement Removal. The edges of asphalt pavement remaining in place shall be sawcut and shall have clean, solid vertical faces. The edges of asphalt pavement broken during construction shall be resawn and removed before surfacing material is placed at the expense of the Contractor.

All edges shall be parallel or perpendicular to curb faces except cuts around objects shall be on a curvilinear cut, a maximum 4 inches departure from the straight cut every 2 feet.

300-12.2 Concrete Removal. Concrete to be removed shall be sawcut to a minimum depth of 5 inches at score marks or as marked by the City. Sawed edges, broken or chipped during construction shall be resawn at the contractor's expense. Increase in concrete quantity due to resawing shall not be considered for payment. Upon concrete removal, the City Parks Superintendent shall be informed to check and approve all roots to be removed. If he determines the tree cannot be saved, removal and planting of a new tree shall be per unit cost.

All edges shall be parallel or perpendicular to curb faces except cuts around objects shall be on a curvilinear cut, a maximum of 4 inches departure from the straight cut within every 2 feet. The edges of Portland cement concrete remaining in place shall be sawcut and shall have clean, solid vertical faces.

The Contractor is responsible for inspecting each location prior to submitting a bid.

Excavation in the street section adjacent to concrete replacement shall be a minimum width of 1-foot and a minimum depth of 6-inches or 1-inch greater than the existing AC section if greater than 6-inches in depth.

Remove and replace defective concrete work with new materials. Permission to patch any defective areas shall not be a waiver of the Engineer's right to require complete removal of defective work if patching does not restore quality and appearance of work.

The Contractor may stockpile sand or clean fill dirt within the street, except arterial streets, between the curb and 8-feet out, for no longer than 72 hours in any one location with prior approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the fronting residence 24 hours prior to stockpiling any material. Said stockpile shall not block the flow line of the gutter and shall be barricaded with flasher-equipped barriers. The Contractor shall ensure that the street is swept clean upon vacating the stockpile site. No excavated or removed dirt or concrete may be stockpiled in any street overnight.

The Contractor shall remove all debris and perform all cleanup work to the satisfaction of the Engineer within 3 working days after forms have been removed at any location.

TP-4

Concrete removed shall be replaced within five (5) days after removal. All restorations shall be completed a maximum of five (5) days after concrete placement (i.e. backfill, grading of dirt, asphalt repave etc.) One Hundred ($100) dollars per calendar day and location shall be charged to the Contractor for failure to comply with the above schedule as required by the Engineer.

SECTION 302 – ROADWAY SURFACING

302-5 ASPHALT CONCRETE (AC) PAVEMENT.

302-5.1 General. The Contractor shall establish designated asphalt truck routes and staging areas and shall communicate these routes and areas to truck drivers prior to the arrival at the job site.

This plan must be approved by the Engineer five (5) days prior to paving.

302-5.3 Prime Coat. Prime coat shall be applied to all subgrade surfaces prior to asphalt hot mix surfacing. The prime coat shall be Grade SC-250 liquid asphalt uniformity per Green Book requirements.

302-5.4 Tack Coat. Asphalt tack coat shall be applied to all existing asphalt surfaces prior to asphalt overlay.

Existing surfaces shall be cleaned utilizing a power sweeper and free of water prior to applying PG 64-10 or SS-1h asphalt tack coat per Green Book requirements. Tack coat shall uniformly cover all areas to be paved.

302-5.5 Distribution and Spreading.

BOTTOM DUMPING OF ASPHALT PAVING SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED.

302.5.6.2 Density and Smoothness. Failed areas shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense.

302-5.7 Joints. COLD JOINTS SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE ENGINEER. COLD JOINTS PLACED WITHOUT APPROVAL SHALL BE REMOVED AT THE SOLE EXPENSE OF THE CONTRACTOR.

302-9 APHALT RUBBER HOT MIX (ARHM).

302-9.1 General. The Contractor shall establish designated asphalt truck routes and staging areas and shall communicate these routes and areas to truck drivers prior to the arrival at the job site. This plan must be approved by the Engineer five (5) days prior to paving.

CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL TRACKED ASPHALT MATERIALS FROM CONCRETE SURFACES AND RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS.

302-9.3 Distribution and Spreading. Feather join edges shall be made along straight lines by hand raking out all heavy aggregates prior to rolling to produce a smooth uniform surface.

Compacted edge along gutter lip shall be 3/8 inch in height.

BOTTOM DUMPING OF ASPHALT PAVING SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED.

TP-5

302-9.5 Joints. JOINTS SHALL NOT BE ALLLOWED WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE ENGINEER. JOINTS PLACED WITHOUT APPROVAL SHALL BE REMOVED AT THE SOLE EXPENSE OF THE CONTRACTOR.

302-9.7 Rock Dust Blotter. Rock dust blotter shall be provided and uniformly applied using a mechanical spreader at a rate of approximately 1.65 kilogram per square meter.

302-15 ASPHALT TRACKING PAVEMENT AND MITIGATION. The purpose of this section is to address any tracking related problems caused by the Contractor. The City requires that all streets adjacent to the project remain track free during and after construction. Contractor shall prevent and mitigate asphalt tracking on all adjacent surfaces. The use of water or any other methods approved by the Engineer may be utilized. If tracking is present at the end of the work day, the Contractor shall use steam cleaning and a vacuum truck to remove tracking from all affected areas to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

SECTION 314 – TRAFFIC STRIPING, CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS,

AND PAVEMENT MARKERS

314-1 GENERAL. Furnishing and installation of traffic markings shall include all work required to place raised pavement markers, thermoplastic material and curb paint. Legends and crosswalks shall consist of thermoplastic material with glass bead finish.

Striping work and materials shall conform to the provisions of the Standard Specifications of the State of California, Department of Transportation, latest edition, and the Traffic Manual of the State of California, Department of Transportation. Installation of traffic markings shall be completed within 5 working days of paving.

314-4 APPLICATION OF TRAFFIC STRIPING AND CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKING.

314-4.1 GENERAL. Each fire hydrant in the project area shall be marked by placing a double- sided raised pavement marker with reflective blue markings on each side. The marker and adhesive shall be equivalent to Caltrans pavement markers.

Place one marker 6 inches from street centerline toward hydrant on a line projected approximately perpendicular to curb. Place two markers if hydrant is on a corner, one on each street.

PART 4 – EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS

SECTION 400 – PROTECTION AND RESTORATION

SECTION 401 - REMOVAL

401-3. CONCRETE AND MASONRY IMPROVEMENTS.

401-3.2 Concrete Curb, Walk, Gutters, Cross Gutters, Curb Ramps, Driveway, and Alley Intersections.

Concrete sidewalk construction shall include removal and disposal of existing interfering structures, tree roots, objects, soil, etc. Contractor shall remove and replace any inadequate existing base material with compacted CMB.

TP-6

Any damaged utility boxes, traffic signal pull boxes, etc., shall be replaced. All boxes shall be adjusted to grade and all costs for this work shall be incidental and included in this item of work.

Concrete curb and gutter construction shall include removal and disposal of existing interfering structures, objects, soil, etc.

Curb & gutter to be replaced shall be installed at the same location as the existing on a straight grade across the limits of the replacement.

Removal, disposal and construction of adjacent 2-feet wide asphalt hot mix paving (C2 PG64- 10) over 6-inch thick C.A.B. shall be included.

The Contractor shall regrade the area at the back of curb/gutter where the new curb/gutter is constructed at a different grade than existing curb/gutter. The graded area shall have a maximum slope of 3:1 and 2% in city parkways. Fill material, if required, for this grading shall be furnished by the Contractor. All landscaping and irrigation in the graded area shall be repaired

SECTION 402 – UTILITES

402-2 PROTECTION. The Contractor shall provide coordination with all utility companies involved and shall provide protection from damage to their facilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for repair or replacement to said facilities made necessary by its failure to provide required protection.

The Contractor shall be solely responsible to check all utility record maps, books, and/or other data in the possession of the CITY, other agencies, and/or all utility companies, and no allowance shall be made for any failure to have done so.

The Contractor shall utilize the services of “Underground Service Alert-Southern California” for utility locating in all public right-of-ways by calling 811 or 1-800-227-2600 at least 48 hours prior to any excavation.

Underground lines that are potentially hazardous such as oil company lines, natural gas mains, and electrical conduits will be carefully located by the owner as provided in the Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall take special precautions in determining the precise location and depth of these structures and coordinate work with the utility to ensure that they will not be damaged by its operations.

SECTION 403 – MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT AND RECONSRTUCTION

403-1 GENERAL. Adjustment of utility access openings shall include all work required to set access frames and covers flush with pavement. Adjustment of utility access openings shall be incidental to the associated item of work, and no additional payment will be made therefore.

TP-7

PART 6 - TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL

SECTION 600 - ACCESS

600-1 GENERAL.

600-1.1 Public Convenience and Safety Access. The Contractor shall provide temporary “No Parking” and all other signs which are necessary for the safe and orderly conduct of vehicular traffic as directed by the Engineer and as specified herein. Contractor shall also provide an approval barricaded area in the parking lane for pedestrian traffic during such time as the parkway is unfit to be used for pedestrian traffic.

At such times as driveways are inaccessible due to the Contractor’s work, they shall be blocked by two (2) Class II barricades or one (1) Class II barricade and two (2) delineators. Driveways that are ramped or planked for temporary access shall be provided with a barricade or delineator at each side. The Contractor shall give 24-hour notice to affected property owners prior to blocking any driveway.

The Contractor shall provide access for refuse collection on the regularly scheduled days. He shall also facilitate or assist in the collection where such work is hampered by his operations.

600-1.2 Street Closures, Detours, and Barricades. The Contractor shall not close any street within the City of Gardena without first obtaining the approval of the Engineer. Barricading, traffic control and detour diagrams in connection with street closures shall be submitted by the contractor as required by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide and install barricades, delineators, warning devices and construction signs in accordance with the California Manual of Temporary Traffic Controls or W.A.T.C.H. Handbook. During adverse weather or unusual traffic or working conditions additional traffic devices shall be placed as directed by the Engineer. All traffic signs and devices shall also conform to the California Manual of Temporary Traffic Controls or W.A.T.C.H.

Handbook.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain Type II barricades along excavation edges parallel to the flow of traffic at a maximum spacing of twenty-five feet. Type II barricades mounted with flashers shall be installed around work areas in parkways. Type II barricades shall have alternating reflective orange and reflective white stripes at an angle of 45 degrees. The strip width shall be in accordance with Table 5-1 “Barricade Characteristics” “Manual of Traffic Controls for Construction and Maintenance Work Zones”.

During paving operations, barricades may be supplemented with minimum size eighteen-inch high traffic cones and delineators such that spacing between barricades and/or cones or delineators is no greater than twenty feet. Traffic cones and delineators used within State right- of-way shall be a minimum size of twenty-eight inches high. At all access points such as intersecting streets, alleys and driveways, barricades and/or cones shall be provided at five-foot intervals so as to prevent vehicular access to the paving area. Where access from an intersecting street is prohibited, a “Road Closed” sign shall be provided at the nearest prior intersection. “No Left Turn” signs shall be provided wherever required by the Engineer.

When one-way access from a side street or alley is permitted, barricades and cones shall be provided at five-foot intervals for a distance of fifty feet on either side of the centerline of the intersecting street, or alley.

TP-8

Should the Contractor fail to furnish a sufficient number of traffic and/or pedestrian safety devices, the Agency will place such necessary items and the Contractor shall be liable to the Agency for providing such devices in accordance with the following provisions:

1. For placing of barricades: $5.00 per barricade for the first day or any part thereof and $2.00 per barricade, per day, for each day thereafter or any part thereof. For flashers: $2.50 per flasher for the first day or any part thereof and $1.00 per flasher, per day, for each day thereafter or any part thereof. For traffic cones:
$1.00 per cone for each day or any part thereof.

2. In the event that the services of the Agency are required between the hours of 5:00 P.M. and 8:00 A.M., during the normal week or at any time on Saturday, Sunday or a Agency holiday, there shall be an additional charge to the above set forth minimums of $188.00 for each service trip required.

Contractor shall relocate, preserve and maintain the visibility of all existing signs within the project limits which affect the flow of traffic, as directed by the Engineer. Any signs which are damaged or found to be missing during the course of construction shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense as directed by the Engineer. All other signs that interfere with the course of work and are not necessary for the safe flow of traffic will be removed and replaced by the Agency. Traffic control signs include Stop Signs, Speed Limit, Parking Restrictions and other regulatory signs.

SECTION 601 – TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR CONSTRUCTION AND

MAINTENANCE WORK ZONES

601-1 GENERAL. A minimum of two (2) lanes (one lane in each direction) shall be maintained at all times for a continuous flow of traffic, except as otherwise approved by the Engineer.

Lane closures shall be allowed between 8:00a.m. and 4:00p.m. only. No traveled lane shall be closed overnight without prior City approval. Access to private property shall be maintained at all times.

"Temporary No Parking" signs shall be posted no more than 100 feet apart at least 72 hours prior to work. The signs shall be mounted on either 1” x 2” X 3’ high wood stakes, Type II barricades, or 39-inch high delineators. Signs shall not be posted on trees, traffic signal poles, utility poles, streetlights, or any other street furniture. Signs shall be professionally made of moisture-resistant, heavy duty cardboard or other approved material. "Temporary No Parking" signs shall be maintained by the contractor at all times and shall be approved by the Engineer prior to posting. Cover existing street signs as directed by the Engineer.

"Temporary No Parking" signs shall be implemented for one week only (M-F) at a time. Signs shall be removed and reposted each week as needed and approved by the City.

DURING PAVING OPERATIONS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE INDIVIDUALS AND EQUIPMENT DESIGNATED TO PERFORM AND MAINTAIN TRAFFIC CONTROL ONLY. The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain all temporary traffic control devices required for the safe and orderly flow of vehicular and pedestrian traffic during construction. All Traffic control shall conform to the California Manual of Temporary Traffic Controls (California M.U.T.C.D.) or Work Area Traffic Control Handbook (W.A.T.C.H. Handbook).

If traffic control measures are not in conformance with these provisions, the project shall be stopped until conformance is attained to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

TP-9

At locations where excavations are left open overnight, flashing barricades shall be placed along the excavation at a maximum spacing of 20 feet. A minimum of 3 flashing barricades shall be placed at any one excavation.

Temporary striping will be permitted only on base course and pavement to be overlaid.

Temporary pavement markings to be placed on new asphalt shall be spaced at 25 ft maximum and shall be removable without damage to the new overlay. Method of temporary markings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at the preconstruction meeting.

The Contractor shall submit and obtain written approval of traffic control plans from the Engineer five (5) working days prior to implementing.

Temporary lane closures shall be allowed during working hours specified in these Technical Provisions. Temporary lane closures maintained beyond the normal working hours may have a negative economic effect on the local residential, commercial/industrial business, and traveling public. Unless the Contractor secures prior written approval from the Engineer to maintain temporary lane closures beyond the working hours allowed, the Engineer may deduct a fee from a progress payment or bond for each temporary lane closure maintained beyond the allowed working hours. The fee will be accessed at a rate of Five Hundred ($500) per each travel lane per each thirty (30) minute interval, or fraction thereof as required by the Engineer. In no event will work be allowed past 5 p.m.

PART 8 – LANDSCAPING AND IRRIGATION

SECTION 801 – INSTALLATION

801-4 PLANTING.

801-4.5 Tree and Shrub Planting. Tree species shall be 24” box (species as noted).

Payment for this item shall include the following:

A. All material and work for planting of the tree.

B. One-year maintenance period. If a tree requires replacement within the on year maintenance period, the new tree shall also have a one year maintenance period from the date of acceptance.

Note: City will tag trees prior to installation. Total maximum distance to tag all trees shall be limited to 80 miles roundtrip and 3 locations. Otherwise, trees shall be brought to the City for approval prior to planting. Rejected trees shall be removed from the job site immediately.

801-4.5.1 Tree Removal. Remove and dispose of existing tree, stump and roots are supplemental provisions to Section 300-1.2 and 300-1.3 of the Standard Specifications. Grind roots minimum of 12" from top of grade. Backfill with select material and prepare for P.C.C. construction or tree replacement where shown.

801-6 MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT. Maintenance period shall be one year and shall commence after work has been completed and approved by the City of Gardena Council.

TP-10

All trees shall be guaranteed by the contractor for the maintenance period. Contractor liability shall cover cost of labor, equipment and materials to replace trees of similar size during the covered period.

CSI TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

NAKAOKA COMMUNITY CENTER ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AND

CIVIC CENTER OUTDOOR LIGHTING UPGRADES
JN 528
APPENDIX – ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 260010 – Basic Electrical Requirements
Section 260519 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Section 260526 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 260529 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Section 260533.13 – Conduit for Electrical Systems
Section 260533.16 – Boxes for Electrical Systems
Section 260553 – Identification for Electrical Systems
Section 260573 – Power System Studies
Section 260583 – Wiring Connections
Section 260802 – Installation and Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems Section 262100 – Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance Section 262200 – Low-Voltage Transformers
Section 262413 – Switchboards
Section 262416 – Panelboards
Section 262513 – Low-Voltage Busways
Section 262713 – Electricity Metering
Section 262726 – Wiring Devices
Section 262813 – Fuses
Section 263213 – Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets
Section 263213 – Engine Generators
Section 263323 – Central Battery Equipment
Section 263600 – Transfer Switches
Section 263623 – Automatic Transfer Switch
Section 265120 – Automatic Lighting Control System
Section 265600 – Exterior Lighting
Basic Electrical Requirements 260010 - 1
SECTION 260010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE
A. This section supplements all sections of this division and shall apply to all phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of electrical systems for the Project. The work required under this division is not limited to the electrical specifications and drawings. Refer to all bid documents including Civil, Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical documents which may designate Work to be accomplished. The intent of the Specifications is to provide a complete and operable electrical system, which shall include all documents that are a part of the entire Project Contract.

1. Work included: Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation, skilled supervision necessary for, and incidental to, performing operations in connection with furnishing, delivery, and installation of the work in this division complete as shown or noted on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Refer to all sections in the general contract conditions, Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements.

C. Work Installed but Furnished by Others:

1. The electrical work includes the installation or connection of certain materials and equipment furnished by others. Verify installation details. Foundations for apparatus and equipment will be furnished by others unless otherwise noted or detailed.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Guarantee See General Conditions:

1. Except as may be specified under other Sections in the specification, guarantee equipment furnished under the specifications for a period of one year, except for equipment required to have a longer guarantee period, from date of final completion. Guarantee all work against defective workmanship, material, and improper installation. Upon notification of failure, correct deficiency immediately and without additional cost to the Owner.

2. Standard warranty of manufacturer shall apply for replacement of parts after expiration of the above period. Manufacturer shall furnish replacement parts to the Owner or his service agency as approved. Furnish to the Owner, through the Architect, printed manufacturer's warranties complete with material included and expiration dates, upon completion of project. Conform to Division 01.

Basic Electrical Requirements 260010 - 2
B. Equipment Safety: All electrical materials and equipment shall be new and shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories and bear their label, or listed and certified by a nationally recognized testing authority where UL does not have an approval. Custom made equipment must have complete test data submitted by the manufacturer attesting to its safety.

C. Codes and Regulations:

1. Design, manufacturer, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished under the requirements of these specifications shall conform to the latest publications or standard rules of the following:
a. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - IEEE b. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association - NEMA c. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. - UL
d. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA
e. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM
f. American National Standards Institute - ANSI
g. California Electrical Code - CEC, Title 24, Part 3
h. California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Subchapter 5 i. California Building Code-CBC, Title 24 Parts 1 &2
j. State & Municipal Codes in Force in the Specific Project Area k. Occupational Safety & Health Administration - OSHA
l. California State Fire Marshal
m. California Fire Code- CFC, Title 24 Part 9
n. National Electrical Testing Association - NETA

2. The term "Code", when used within the specifications, shall refer to the Publications, Standards, ordinances and codes, listed above. In the case where the codes have different levels of requirements the most stringent rules shall apply.

D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Codes, Permits, and Fees: Where the Contract Documents exceed minimum requirements, the Contract Documents take precedence. Where code conflicts Basic Electrical Requirements 260010 - 3
occur, the most stringent shall apply. The most stringent condition shall be as interpreted by the Engineer.
a. Comply with all requirements for permits, licenses, fees and Code. Permits, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the Contractor at his expense shall obtain the Work, unless otherwise specified.
b. Comply with the requirements of the applicable utility companies serving the Project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for proper coordination of the Work.

E. Shop Drawings:

1. See Division 01 for additional requirements.

2. Time Schedules for Submission and Ordering: The Contractor shall prepare, review and coordinate his schedule of submissions carefully, determining the necessary lead time for preparing, submitting, checking, ordering and delivery of materials and equipment for timely arrival. The Contractor shall be responsible for conformance with the overall construction schedule.

3. Submittals will be checked for general compliance with specifications only. The Contractor shall be responsible for deviations from the drawings or specifications and for errors or omissions of any sort in submittals.

4. Submit a complete list of materials and equipment proposed for the job, including manufacturers names and catalog numbers.

5. Shop drawings shall be submitted in completed groups of materials (i.e., lighting fixtures or switchgear). The Contractor shall add and sign the following paragraph on equipment and materials submitted for review. "It is hereby certified that the (equipment) (material) shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated into the project; is in compliance with the Contract Drawings and specifications and can be installed in the allocated spaces". Failure to add the above written statement for compliance will result in return of submittals without review.
a. Bind catalog cuts, plate numbers, descriptive bulletins and drawings, 11" x 17" (275 mm x 435 mm) or smaller, in sets with covers neatly showing titles.
b. The Contractor shall verify dimensions of equipment and be satisfied as to Code compliance for fit prior to submitting shop drawings for approval.
c. Where current limiting devices are specified, submit technical data to substantiate adequate protection of equipment cascaded
Basic Electrical Requirements 260010 - 4
downstream. Submittals shall not be reviewed unless supporting calculations and data are submitted therewith.
d. Include complete catalog information such as construction, ratings, insulation systems, as applicable.
e. For any material specified to meet UL or trade standards, furnish the manufacturers or vendor's certification that the material furnished for the work does in fact equal or exceed such specifications.
f. Reference listings to the specifications' Sections and Article to which each is applicable.
g. Equipment Floor Plans: After approval of material is secured prepare a floor plan of each electrical and communication equipment space, room or yard, drawn to scale at 1/2 inch equals 1 foot and submit for approval in the same manner as for shop drawings. The layout drawings shall be exact scale.

6. Contractor shall prepare coordinated drawings when required by Division 01 or where noted otherwise.

F. Interpretations: The Contractor through the Architect must make Requests for interpretations of drawings and specifications. Any such requests made by equipment manufacturers or suppliers will be referred to the Contractor.

G. Standard of Quality

1. The contract Drawings and Specifications establish the “MINIMUM STANDARD OF QUALITY” each product and/or system must meet to be considered acceptable. Products of other manufactures will be considered if the product and/or system meet or exceed the “MINIMUM STANDARD OF QUALITY” established by this Contract Document.

2. Items for similar application shall be of the same manufacturer.

3. The label of listing by UL shall appear on all materials and equipment for which standards have been established by the agency.

4. Where codes as listed in Section General Requirement Section of the Specifications that establish label or approved requirements, furnish all materials and equipment with either the required labels affixed or the necessary written approval.

5. Provide the type and quantity of electrical materials and equipment necessary to complete Work and all systems in operation, tested and ready for use.

Basic Electrical Requirements 260010 - 5

6. Provide and install all incidental items that belong to the Work described and which are required for complete systems.

7. All switchboards, distribution boards, panel boards and circuit breakers shall be of the same manufacturer.

8. All wiring devices such as switches and receptacles shall be of the same manufacturer.

H. Substitutions: Refer to Division 01
I. Submit comprehensive material list, shop drawings and complete technical data for the following equipment and materials:

1. General Requirements:
a. Main service and distribution switchboards.
b. Panelboards.
c. Conduits
d. Conductors, include all selected insulation types.
e. Fuses
f. Disconnect switches and Starters.
g. Pullboxes, manholes and handholes.
h. Standard lighting fixtures, specially fabricated fixtures, ballasts and lamps, with samples and sample of standard finish available (where requested).
i. Control devices, standard and special receptacles, switches, outlets and finish device plates.
j. Cabinets for signal and telephone system, special terminals and cabinets.

Include all cabinet dimensions.
k. Fire alarm system.
l. Transformers
J. Utility Service:

1. Contractor shall verify the locations shown on the drawings and shall include extensions of lines to building service from locations which are acceptable to the Owner.

Basic Electrical Requirements 260010 - 6

2. Verify electrical, civil, architectural and structural, dimensional and other requirements with the Owner.

3. Should any major modifications to the work indicated be necessary to comply with the Owner requirements, notify the Architect.

4. Contractor shall contact the utility company representatives to establish pre- construction coordination, obtain all necessary meters and/or approvals, and schedule utility work to coordinate with the construction schedule.

5. All utility services shall be installed per the utility company requirements. Verify final construction requirements with utility company service planners prior to construction.

K. Record Drawings: Refer to Division 01, Contract Closeout.

L. Work Responsibilities:

1. The drawings indicate diagrammatically the desired locations or arrangement of conduit runs, outlets, junction boxes and equipment and are to be followed. Execute the work so as to secure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations. The Contractor is responsible for the correct placing of his work. Where conflicts occur in plans and/or specifications, the most stringent application shall apply and shall be part of the base bid.

2. Locations shown on architectural plan or on wall elevations shall take precedence over electrical plan locations, but where a major conflict is evident, notify the Architect.

3. In the event minor changes in the indicated locations or arrangement are necessary due to developed conditions in the building construction or rearrangement of furnishings or equipment or due to interference with other trades, such changes shall be made without extra cost.

4. Verify dimensions and the correct location of Owner-Furnished equipment before proceeding with the roughing-in of connections.

5. All scaled and figured dimensions are approximate of typical equipment of the class indicated. Before proceeding with work carefully check and verify dimensions and sizes with the drawings to see that the furnished equipment will fit into the spaces provided without violation of applicable Codes.

6. Should any changes to the work indicated on the drawings or described in the specifications be necessary in order to comply with the above requirements, notify the Architect.

Basic Electrical Requirements 260010 - 7

7. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of coordinated drawings when required by the Architect.

8. Replace or repair, without additional compensation any work which does not comply with or which is installed in violation of any of these requirements.

M. Installation General: For special requirements, refer to specific equipment under these requirements.

1. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in the specifications, do all excavating necessary for the proper installation of the electrical work.

2. Locations of Openings: Locate chases, shafts and openings required for the installation of the electrical work during framing of the structure. Do any additional cutting and patching required. Cutting or drilling in any structural member is prohibited without approval of the Architect. Furnish all access panels to make all boxes, connections and devices accessible as required by CEC.

3. Location of Sleeves: Where conduits pass through concrete walls, suspended slabs or metal deck floors, install sleeves of adequate size to permit installation of conduit. Sleeves shall be installed prior to pouring of concrete and shall have ends flush with the wall or extend 2 inches above floor surfaces. Verify locations.

4. Wherever conduit extends through roof, install flashings in accordance with drawings and details.

5. Contractor shall be responsible for cutting and patching which may be required for the proper installation of the electrical work.

6. Protect work, materials and equipment and provide adequate and proper storage facilities during the progress of the work. Storage outdoors shall be weather protected and shall include space heaters to prevent condensation. Provide for the safety and good condition of all work until final acceptance of the work. Replace all damaged or defective work, materials and equipment before requesting final acceptance.

7. Conduit and Equipment to be Installed: Clean thoroughly to remove plaster, spattered paint, cement and dirt on both exterior and interior. All underground conduits shall be mandrelled prior to pulling wire.

8. Conduit and Equipment to be Painted: Clean conduit exposed to view in completed structure by removing plaster and dirt. Remove grease, oil and similar material from conduit and equipment by wiping with clean rags and suitable solvents in preparation for paint.

Basic Electrical Requirements 260010 - 8

9. Items with Factory Finish: Remove cement, plaster, grease and oil, and leave surfaces, including cracks and corners, clean and polished. Touch up scratched or bare spots to match finish.

10. Site Cleaning: Remove from site all packing cartons, scrap materials and other rubbish on a weekly basis. Vacuum out all cabinets, switchgear and panels and junction boxes prior to pulling any conductors.

11. Electrical equipment and materials exposed to public and in finished areas shall be finish-painted after installation in accordance with the Painting Section. All exposed screw-type fasteners, exterior, or interior in restrooms, shall be vandal- resistant spanner type; include tool.

N. Excavation, Cutting and Patching:

1. Excavating, trenching and backfilling required for the work of this Division in accordance with the applicable requirements of Division 2. Excavating and backfilling connected with electrical work, repaving cuts and providing and maintaining protective measures for the electrical work excavation required by the governing authorities having jurisdiction shall be performed as a part of the work of this Division.

2. Verify openings indicated on the drawings. Provide all cutting, patching and reinforcement of the construction of the building as required to install electrical work.

O. Tests

1. Equipment and systems for which the National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) has an approved or recommended procedure, shall be tested in accordance with that procedure. Test values shall equal values recommended by NETA. Copies of test reports shall be submitted as required under shop drawing submittals.

2. Resistance to ground tests shall be accomplished by a qualified independent testing firm to measure resistance to ground at grounding electrodes. Make tests before slabs or affected areas are poured in order that corrective measures, if required, may be taken. Submit a report showing the results of these measurements. If the resistances exceed values specified elsewhere or NETA test procedure recommendations, perform corrective measures required to reduce resistance to acceptable values.

3. Prior to energizing any motor, measure the service voltage for phase balance and report if unbalance exceeds 1% from mean.

4. Measure the three-phase voltage at no load and at maximum load conditions and submit to the engineer a report showing the results of these measurements.

Basic Electrical Requirements 260010 - 9

5. Upon completion of the work and adjustment of all equipment, conduct an operating test. Conduct the test in the presence of an authorized representative of the Owner's Representative. Demonstrate system and equipment to operate in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents and to be free from electrical and mechanical defects. Provide systems free from short circuits and grounds and show an insulation resistance between phase conductors and ground not less than the requirements of the governing electric code. Test circuits for proper neutral connection.

6. Complete tests prior to final inspection of project, including corrective work based on the results of the tests.

7. Perform special tests on systems and equipment as specified herein using personnel qualified to perform such tests.

P. Protection: Protect finish parts of the materials and equipment against damage during the progress of the work and until final completion and acceptance. Cover materials and equipment in storage and during construction in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged or marred. Keep moving parts clean, dry and lubricated.

Q. Cleaning Up:

1. Upon completion of the work and at various time during the progress of the work, remove from the building all surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from the work of this Division.

2. Thoroughly clean switchgear including busses, apparatus, exposed conduit, metal work including the exterior and interior, and accessories for the work of this Division, of cement, plaster and other deleterious materials; remove grease and oil spots with cleaning solvent; carefully wipe surfaces and scrape cracks and corners clean.

3. Thoroughly polish chromium or plated work. Remove dirt and stains from lighting fixtures.

4. Leave the entire installation in a clean condition.

R. Completion:

1. The work will not be reviewed for final acceptance until operating and maintenance data, manufacturer's literature, panel directories and nameplates specified herein have been approved and properly posted or installed and final cleaning of equipment and premises has been completed.

2. When the installation is complete and adjustments have been made, operate the system for a period of one week, during which time demonstrate that systems are completed and operating in conformance with the specifications.

Basic Electrical Requirements 260010 - 10
S. Operating and Maintenance Data: Submit complete and at one time, prior to acceptance of the installation, 4 copies of manufacturer's instructions for operation and maintenance of electrical equipment, including replacement parts lists. As specified in Division 01 T. Inspection and Acceptance Procedures: The Architect will submit observation reports periodically during the construction phase detailing Contract deficiencies. The Contractor is responsible for making corrections immediately. Notice of Completion of the project will not be made until all items have been corrected.

U. Final Completion of Electrical Systems:

1. Prior to Final Completion of operating electrical systems, the Contractor shall:
a. Provide materials of the type and quality specified and as necessary for proper operation, tested and ready for use.
b. Furnish the required Operating and Maintenance Data/Manuals. c. Clean up of the project pertaining to this Division of the work. d. After installation has been completed and adjustments made, operate the system for a period of one week, during which time, demonstrate to the Architect that systems are complete and operating in conformance with Contract Documents.
e. Conduct tests required and as specified in this Division and submit test reports and corrective actions taken.
f. Submission of warranties and guarantees.

2. Final Completion of Work Shall be Contingent On:
a. Contractor replacing defective materials and workmanship. b. Upon completion of work and adjustments made, Contractor shall conduct an operating test for each system for approval at such time as Architect directs. Conduct test in presence of authorized representative of Architect and demonstrate that systems and equipment do operate in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents and are free from electrical and mechanical defects.
c. Contractor shall provide the necessary training programs and instructions to the Owner's representative. Number of hours shall be a minimum of four (4) hours for each system or days as required under separate Sections of these Specifications. Complete operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided at least two (2) weeks prior to training.

Basic Electrical Requirements 260010 - 11
d. Submit copies of manufacturer's instructions and maintenance of electrical equipment including replacement parts lists. Each set shall include one set of shop drawings of equipment installed.

V. Submittals for Change Orders: When changes are made during the construction phase, deletions and additions shall be presented in a manner that will indicate the cost of each item of material and corresponding labor. Markup shall be then added in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions as modified by the Supplementary Conditions.

W. The Contractor at a time convenient to the Owner shall provide instruction to the Owner's operating personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. The instructors shall have received factory training and shall be thoroughly familiar with the equipment installed. The operating personnel shall receive the number of days instruction as indicated in other sections.

1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record Drawings: CAD: Use a computer aided drafting (CAD) system in the preparation of record drawings for this Project. Acceptable CAD systems shall be capable of producing files in AutoCAD Version 2012 compatible DWG or DXF format. Owner's consultant will furnish CAD backgrounds for use by the Contractor after construction is 85% complete except where prohibited by Contract.

B. Record Set During the Work: At site, maintain at least one set of Drawings as a Field Record Set. Also maintain at least one copy of all Addenda, Modifications, approved submittals, correspondence, and transmittals at site. Keep Drawings and data in good order and readily available to Architect and Owner.

C. Changes: Clearly and correctly mark Record Drawings to show changes made during the construction process at the time the changed work is installed. No such changes shall be made in the work unless authorized by the Architect.

D. Final Record Drawings: Conform to Division 01 requirements.

E. Preparation of Final Record Drawings: Contractor shall transfer recorded changes in the work indicated on the Field Record Set to the record set. Changes shall be neatly and clearly drawn and noted by skilled draftsmen, and shown technically correct.

F. Approval: Prior to Architect's inspection for Substantial Completion, submit the Final Record Drawings to the Architect for review, and make such revisions as may be necessary for Final Record Drawings to be a true, complete, and accurate record of the work.

G. Manuals: Obtain data from the various manufacturers and submit instruction, operation, and maintenance manuals as required and to the extent required under other Sections.

Basic Electrical Requirements 260010 - 12
H. At all times when the work is in progress, maintain at the workplace, fabrication shop or Project Site as applies, a complete separate, clean, undamaged set of the latest stamped, actioned submittals. As work progresses, maintain records of "as installed" conditions on this set in suitable ink or chemical fluid. Update the set daily. After successful completion of Project Site testing specified herein, and after completion of Punch List corrections, copy all records of "as installed" conditions on to originals.

I. Quantity:

1. Review sets: As for Shop and Field Drawings.

2. Record set: Refer to Division 01.

J. Content: All drawings required under "Field and Shop Drawings". Show "as installed" condition. Where room designations according to Project permanent signage differ from construction designations in the Contract Documents, show both designations.

K. Warranty Certificates: Comply with Division 01.

PART 2 - COMMISSIONING

2.1 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Include cost for commissioning requirements in the contract price.

B. Attend commissioning meetings scheduled by the CxA.

C. Prepare preliminary schedule for indoor lighting system inspections, O&M manual submission, training sessions, lighting controls testing, system verification, performance testing, and system completion for use by the CxA. Update schedule as appropriate throughout the construction period and provide updated schedule to the commissioning team.

D. Verify proper installation and performance of all electrical services provided.

E. Complete Title 24 Certificate(s) of Installation and manufacturer’s pre-start checklists prior to scheduling startup of HVAC and electrical equipment.

1. Retain Certificate(s) of Installation in a 3-ring binder in an organized fashion.

Binder is to remain on the job site

2. Make Certificate(s) of Installation available for CxA review upon request.

3. Retain calibration records for equipment provided with manufacturer calibrated sensors in the Certificate(s) of Installation binder.

F. Where applicable, complete the Certificate(s) of Acceptance per the contract documents.

Basic Electrical Requirements 260010 - 13

1. Retain Certificate(s) of Acceptance in a 3-ring binder in an organized fashion.

Binder is to remain on the job site

2. Provide copies of all Certificate(s) of Acceptance to the CxA.

3. Certificate(s) of Acceptance shall be conducted by companies who are certified as California Advanced Lighting Controls Training Program Acceptance Technician (CALCTP-AT) employer and only completed by those employees of said company who are certified to complete the respective acceptance test.

G. Monitor and respond to Resolution Tracking Forms distributed by the CxA in order to expedite corrective actions necessary to achieve design intent.

H. Participate in the Certificate(s) of Acceptance and Functional Performance Tests as required to achieve design intent.

I. Participate in the opposite-season testing as required to achieve design intent.

J. Participate in O&M Training as required by project specifications.

K. Ensure participation of major equipment manufacturers and their representatives as applicable.

L. Obtain O&M data on all equipment and assemble in binders using tabs as required.

M. Conduct a maintenance orientation and inspection with hands on training per the contract documents.

N. Provide written certification and completed Certificate(s) of Installation forms and checklists documenting that the following work has been completed in accordance with the plans and specifications and that they are functioning as designed.

1. Correct labeling of all circuits with connected equipment.

2. Lighting system controls operations, including occupancy sensors, automatic time controls or Energy Management control, override timers, manual dimming controls, exterior lighting controls, multi-level switching, as applicable to the Work.

END OF SECTION
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 1

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single conductor building wire.

B. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable.

C. Service entrance cable.

D. Wiring connectors.

E. Electrical tape.

F. Heat shrink tubing.

G. Wire pulling lubricant.

H. Cable ties.

I. Firestop sleeves.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding conductors and grounding connectors.

B. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

C. Section 312316.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013 (Reapproved 2018).

B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011 (Reapproved 2017).

C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes; 2010, with Editorial Revision (2020).

D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay- Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2020).

E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2017.

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 2 F. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2020.

G. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

H. NECA 121 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable (Type NM-B) and Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable (Type UF); 2007.

I. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; 2021.

J. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

L. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 267 - Outline of Investigation for Wire-Pulling Compounds; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

R. UL 493 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

S. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate the installation of direct burial cable with other trades to avoid conflicts with piping or other potential conflicts.

3. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 3

4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements.

Record actual routing for underground circuits.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required.

C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.

D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted.

E. Service entrance cable is not permitted.

F. Armored cable is not permitted.

G. Metal-clad cable is not permitted.

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation.

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 4 D. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.

E. Comply with NEMA WC 70.

F. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.

G. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.

H. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 260526.

I. Conductor Material:

1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.

2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwise indicated.

3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.

J. Minimum Conductor Size:

1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.
a. Exceptions:
1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.
2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.
3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.
4) 20A exterior circuits: 10 AWG..

2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.

K. Conductor Color Coding:

1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.

2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinyl color coding electrical tape.

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 5

3. Color Code:
a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:
1) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.
4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.
b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:
1) Phase A: Black.
2) Phase B: Red.
3) Phase C: Blue.
4) Neutral/Grounded: White.
c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.
d. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having jurisdiction. e. For control circuits, comply with manufacturer's recommended color code.

2.3 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
A. Manufacturers:

1. Copper Building Wire:
a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle.
b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.
c. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.
d. Rome Wire and Cable.
e. Okonite Wire
f. Pirelli Wire and Cable
g. Carol Cable
B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

C. Conductor Stranding:

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 6 a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

2. Control Circuits: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

E. Insulation:

1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below. a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2.
b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2.

2.4 UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH-CIRCUIT CABLE
A. Manufacturers:

1. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle.

2. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.

3. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type UF multiple-conductor cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 493, Type UF-B.

C. Provide equipment grounding conductor unless otherwise indicated.

D. Conductor Stranding:

1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.

2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

E. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

2.5 SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE
A. Manufacturers:

1. Copper Service Entrance Cable:
a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com/#sle.
b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com/#sle.
c. Service Wire Co: www.servicewire.com/#sle.
d. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com/#sle.

B. Conductor Stranding: Stranded.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 7

2.6 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable.

B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:

1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors.

2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors.

C. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:

1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs.

2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.

3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.

4. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors where connectors are required.

D. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with conductors without stripping insulation.

E. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.

F. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.

G. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy LLC; ______: www.burndy.com/#sle.
b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.

H. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 8

1. Manufacturers:
a. Burndy LLC; ______: www.burndy.com/#sle.
b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.
c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.

2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Electrical Tape:

1. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.

3. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service.

4. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of 125 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F.

5. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible, all-weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.

B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.

C. Wire Pulling Lubricant:

1. Listed and labeled as complying with UL 267.

2. Suitable for use with conductors/cables and associated insulation/jackets to be installed.

3. Suitable for use at installation temperature.

D. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application.

E. Firestop Sleeves: Listed; provide as required to preserve fire resistance rating of building elements.

1. Products:

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 9 a. HoldRite, a brand of Reliance Worldwide Corporation; HydroFlame Pro Series/HydroFlame Custom
Built: www.holdrite.com/#sle.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA

70. D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Circuiting Requirements:

1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required.

3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.

4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location indicated.

5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.

6. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.

7. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are indicated as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.

8. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 10 B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

D. Install underground feeder and branch-circuit cable (Type UF-B) in accordance with NECA 121.

E. Installation in Raceway:

1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants.

2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.

3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure.

4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer.

F. Direct Burial Cable Installation:

1. Provide trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 312316.13 - Trenching.

2. Install cable with minimum cover of 24 inches unless otherwise indicated or required.

3. Protect cables from damage in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 260553 along entire cable length.

G. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner.

H. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.

1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles.

2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds permissible limits.

I. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.

J. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.

K. Where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others, provide a minimum of 5 feet of slack.

Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 11 L. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures.

M. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.

N. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.

1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.

2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors.

3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.

4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.

5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.

O. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors.

1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing.
a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape.

2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing.
a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape.
b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape.

3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.

P. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.

Q. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260519 - 12 apply half overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible.

R. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 260553.

S. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section Firestopping.

T. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required.

1. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing. Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.

END OF SECTION
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 1

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grounding and bonding requirements.

B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.

C. Connectors for grounding and bonding.

D. Ground bars.

E. Ground rod electrodes.

F. Ground access wells.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 096500 - Resilient Flooring: Static control flooring.

B. Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.

C. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEEE 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System; 2012.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

C. NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; 2022.

D. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

F. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 2

1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding and bonding system components.

B. Field quality control test reports.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system components and connections.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion, integrity and continuity are verified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 3 C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system.

D. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

E. Grounding System Resistance:

1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless otherwise approved by Architect. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.

2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 25 ohms to ground, when tested according to IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method.

F. Grounding Electrode System:

1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form grounding electrode system.
a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.
b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end with bonding jumper.

2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s):
a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feet at an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the point of entrance to the building. b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe electrically continuous.
c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal of meter without disconnecting jumper.

3. Metal In-Ground Support Structure:
a. Provide connection to metal in-ground support structure that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Concrete-Encased Electrode:
a. Provide connection to concrete-encased electrode consisting of not less than 20 feet of either steel reinforcing bars or bare copper conductor not smaller than 4 AWG embedded within concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70.

Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 4

5. Ground Rod Electrode(s):
a. Provide two electrodes unless otherwise indicated or required. b. Space electrodes not less than 10 feet from each other and any other ground electrode.
c. Where location is not indicated, locate electrode(s) at least 5 feet outside building perimeter foundation as near as possible to electrical service entrance; where possible, locate in softscape (uncovered) area.
d. Provide ground access well for each electrode.

6. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding electrode system resistance.

7. Ground Bar: Provide ground bar, separate from service equipment enclosure, for common connection point of grounding electrode system bonding jumpers as permitted in NFPA 70. Connect grounding electrode conductor provided for service-supplied system grounding to this ground bar.
a. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required.
b. Where ground bar location is not indicated, locate in accessible location as near as possible to service disconnect enclosure. c. Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

8. Ground Riser: Provide common grounding electrode conductor not less than 3/0 AWG for tap connections to multiple separately derived systems as permitted in NFPA 70.

G. Service-Supplied System Grounding:

1. For each service disconnect, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral (grounded) service conductor to grounding electrode system. Unless otherwise indicated, make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in service disconnect enclosure.

2. For each service disconnect, provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral (grounded) bus to equipment ground bus where not factory- installed. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of service disconnect.

H. Grounding for Separate Building or Structure Supplied by Feeder(s) or Branch Circuits:

1. Provide grounding electrode system for each separate building or structure.

Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 5

2. Provide equipment grounding conductor routed with supply conductors.

3. For each disconnecting means, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect equipment ground bus to grounding electrode system.

4. Do not make any connections and remove any factory-installed jumpers between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground.

I. Separately Derived System Grounding:

1. Separately derived systems include, but are not limited to:
a. Transformers (except autotransformers such as buck-boost transformers).

2. Provide grounding electrode conductor to connect derived system grounded conductor to nearest effectively grounded metal building frame.

Unless otherwise indicated, make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in source enclosure.

3. Provide bonding jumper to connect derived system grounded conductor to nearest metal building frame and nearest metal water piping in the area served by the derived system, where not already used as a grounding electrode for the derived system. Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductor connection.

4. Where common grounding electrode conductor ground riser is used for tap connections to multiple separately derived systems, provide bonding jumper to connect the metal building frame and metal water piping in the area served by the derived system to the common grounding electrode conductor.

5. Outdoor Source: Where the source of the separately derived system is located outside the building or structure supplied, provide connection to grounding electrode at source in accordance with NFPA 70.

6. Provide system bonding jumper to connect system grounded conductor to equipment ground bus. Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductor connection. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of separately derived system disconnect.

7. Where the source and first disconnecting means are in separate enclosures, provide supply-side bonding jumper between source and first disconnecting means.

J. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:

1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally non-current-carrying Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 6 conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70.

2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.

3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus.

6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to accommodate conduit movement.

7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water pipe used as grounding electrode.
b. Metal gas piping.
c. Metal process piping.

8. Provide bonding for interior metal air ducts.

9. Provide bonding for metal building frame.

10. Provide bonding for metal siding not effectively bonded through attachment to metal building frame.

K. Communications Systems Grounding and Bonding:

1. Provide intersystem bonding termination at service equipment or metering equipment enclosure and at disconnecting means for any additional buildings or structures in accordance with NFPA 70.

2. Provide bonding jumper in raceway from intersystem bonding termination to each communications room or backboard and provide ground bar for termination.
a. Bonding Jumper Size: 6 AWG, unless otherwise indicated or required.

Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 7 b. Raceway Size: 3/4 inch trade size unless otherwise indicated or required.
c. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required.

2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:

1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.

B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 260526:

1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions:
1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth.
2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway).

C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:

1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections.

D. Ground Bars:

1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators.

2. Size: As indicated.

3. Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made.

E. Ground Rod Electrodes:

Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 8

1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.

2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel.

3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Where rod lengths of greater than 10 feet are indicated or otherwise required, sectionalized ground rods may be used.

F. Ground Access Wells:

1. Description: Open bottom round or rectangular well with access cover for testing and inspection; suitable for the expected load at the installed location.

2. Size: As required to provide adequate access for testing and inspection, but not less than minimum size requirements specified.

3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 10 inches.

4. Cover: Factory-identified by permanent means with word "GROUND".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed.

B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically. Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or bury horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or install at 45 degree angle or bury horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA

70. D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.

1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.

Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 260526 - 9

2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces.

3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.

E. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 260553.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

C. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions.

Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.

D. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified requirements.

E. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions taken.

END OF SECTION
Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260529 - 1

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Support and attachment requirements and components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2023.

C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2023.

D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.

E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with actual equipment and components to be installed.

2. Coordinate work to provide additional framing and materials required for installation.

3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at installed locations.

4. Coordinate arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts.

5. Notify Architect of conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents.

Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has cured; see Section 033000.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260529 - 2
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for channel/strut framing systems, nonpenetrating rooftop supports, and post- installed concrete/masonry anchors.

B. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or methods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications for Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Certified by fastener system manufacturer with current operator's license.

B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: Organization recognized by OSHA as Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:

1. Comply with the following. Where requirements differ, comply with most stringent.
a. NFPA 70.
b. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for complete installation of electrical work.

3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for purpose intended, where applicable.

4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless specifically indicated or permitted.

6. Steel Components: Use corrosion-resistant materials suitable for environment where installed.
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.

Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260529 - 3
b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.
c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps and clamps suitable for conduit or cable to be supported.

1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.

2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.

C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers and brackets suitable for boxes to be supported.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.
b. Emerson Electric Co; O-Z/Gedney: www.emerson.com/#sle. c. HoldRite, a brand of Reliance Worldwide
Corporation: www.holdrite.com/#sle.

D. Metal Channel/Strut Framing Systems:

1. Manufacturers:
a. ABB: www.electrification.us.abb.com/#sle.
b. Atkore International Inc; Unistrut: www.unistrut.us/#sle. c. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.

2. Description: Factory-fabricated, continuous-slot, metal channel/strut and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field assembly of supports.

3. Comply with MFMA-4.

4. Channel Material:
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel.
b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel.

E. Hanger Rods: Threaded, zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.

F. Nonpenetrating Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs:

Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260529 - 4

1. Manufacturers:
a. Atkore International Inc; Unistrut: www.unistrut.us/#sle. b. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.
c. Green Link, Inc: www.greenlinkengineering.com/#sle.

2. Description: Steel pedestals with thermoplastic or rubber bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring attachment to roof structure and not penetrating roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified.

3. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly.

4. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports.

5. Mounting Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under supported component to top of roofing.

G. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Manufacturers - Mechanical Anchors:
a. Dewalt: anchors.dewalt.com/#sle.
b. Hilti, Inc: www.hilti.com/#sle.
c. ITW Red Head, a division of Illinois Tool Works,
Inc: www.itwredhead.com/#sle.

2. Manufacturers - Powder-Actuated Fastening Systems:
a. Dewalt: anchors.dewalt.com/#sle.
b. Hilti, Inc: www.hilti.com/#sle.

3. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use anchor and fastener types indicated for specified applications.

4. New Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts.

5. Existing Concrete: Use expansion anchors.

6. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors.

7. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.

8. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.

9. Steel: Use welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M with lock washers and nuts or Beam clamps (MSS Type 19 21 23 25 or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.

Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260529 - 5

10. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.

11. Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

12. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic- restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

13. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.

14. Powder-actuated fasteners are not permitted.

15. Hammer-driven anchors and fasteners are not permitted.

16. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel/strut and spot inserts specifically designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors. a. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel/strut framing system.
b. Comply with MFMA-4.
c. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.

17. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) for compliance with applicable building code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install hangers and supports in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES) evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.

D. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.

Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260529 - 6
F. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck.

G. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer.

H. Equipment Support and Attachment:

1. Use metal, fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel/strut to support equipment as required.

2. Use metal channel/strut secured to studs to support equipment surface mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.

3. Use metal channel/strut to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.

4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support.

I. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour.

J. Secure fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

K. Remove temporary supports.

3.3 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete or Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)" as applicable.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturers written instructions.

Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 260529 - 7

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.

B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.

END OF SECTION
Conduit for Electrical Systems 260533.13 - 1

CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

B. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

C. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).

D. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).

E. Galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

F. Reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2020.

B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel (EMT-S); 2020.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

D. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); 2020.

E. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; 2014.

F. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Metal Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit; 2018.

G. NEMA TC 14 (SERIES) - Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings Series; 2015.

H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

I. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Conduit for Electrical Systems 260533.13 - 2
M. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 797A - Electrical Metallic Tubing - Aluminum and Stainless Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 1203 - Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with actual type and quantity of conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.

2. Coordinate arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment, and other potential conflicts.

3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment.

4. Coordinate work to provide roof penetrations that preserve integrity of roofing system and do not void roof warranty.

5. Notify Architect of conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents.

Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit between termination points is complete.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits and fittings.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and larger.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: Organization recognized by OSHA as Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70, manufacturer's instructions, and product listing.

Conduit for Electrical Systems 260533.13 - 3
B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use conduit types indicated for specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

C. Underground:

1. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid PVC conduit.

2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use rigid PVC conduit.

3. Where rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), stainless steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), stainless steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or schedule 80 rigid PVC conduit where emerging from underground.

4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduitlarger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.

5. Where galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) or galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has resistivity of less than 2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on soils report or local experience, use corrosion protection tape, factory-applied corrosion protection coating, or field-applied corrosion protection compound acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to provide supplementary corrosion protection.

6. Where galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT) is installed in direct contact with earth, use corrosion protection tape, factory-applied corrosion protection coating, or field-applied corrosion protection compound acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to provide supplementary corrosion protection.

7. Where galvanized rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT) emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape, factory-applied corrosion protection coating, or field-applied corrosion protection compound acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction to provide supplementary corrosion protection for minimum of 4 inches on either side of where conduit emerges.

D. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

E. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

F. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

G. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

Conduit for Electrical Systems 260533.13 - 4
H. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

I. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to:
a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or closets.

J. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), stainless steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or stainless steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

1. Locations subject to severe physical damage include, but are not limited to:
a. High traffic industrial and warehouse areas where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or closets.
b. Where exposed below 20 feet in industrial manufacturing areas.

K. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

L. Exposed, Exterior, Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), stainless steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or stainless steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

M. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

N. Corrosive Locations Above Ground: Use stainless steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), stainless steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), stainless steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).

O. Hazardous/Classified Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), stainless steel rigid metal conduit (RMC), galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), stainless steel intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

P. Flexible Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit (FMC).

1. Maximum Length: 6 feet.

Q. Flexible Connections to Vibrating Equipment:

1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit (FMC).

Conduit for Electrical Systems 260533.13 - 5

2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).

3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.

4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:
a. Transformers.
b. Motors.

R. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit (FMC), galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or stainless steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

2.2 CONDUIT - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is verified by pulling mandrel through them.

C. Provide conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for complete raceway system.

D. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for purpose intended.

E. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.

2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4-inch trade size.

3. Control Circuits: 1/2-inch trade size.

4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8-inch trade size.

5. Underground, Exterior: 1-inch trade size.

F. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

2.3 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit, a division of Atkore
International: www.alliedeg.com/#sle.

2. Nucor Tubular Products: www.nucortubular.com/#sle.

3. Rymco USA: www.rymcousa.com/#sle.

Conduit for Electrical Systems 260533.13 - 6
B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturers:
a. ABB; T&B: www.electrification.us.abb.com/#sle.
b. Allied Tube & Conduit, a division of Atkore
International: www.alliedeg.us/#sle.
c. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle.

2. Nonhazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B or UL 6.

3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless fittings, including set screw and compression/gland types, are not permitted.

2.4 STAINLESS STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. Manufacturers:

1. Calbrite, a division of Atkore International: www.calbrite.com/#sle.

2. Gibson Stainless & Specialty Inc: www.gibsonstainless.com/#sle.

3. Patriot Industries, a division of Patriot Aluminum Products LLC: www.patriotsas.com/#sle.

2.5 STAINLESS STEEL INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)

2.6 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

B. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil, 0.040 inch.

C. PVC-Coated Boxes and Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.

2. Nonhazardous Locations: Use boxes and fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514A, UL 514B, or UL 6.

3. Hazardous/Classified Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 1203 for classification of installed location.

Conduit for Electrical Systems 260533.13 - 7

4. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

5. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil,

0.040 inch.

D. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 15 mil, 0.015 inch.

2.7 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard-wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems.

B. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

2.8 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, a division of Atkore
International: www.afcweb.com/#sle.

2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com/#sle.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360.

C. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

2.9 GALVANIZED STEEL ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit, a division of Atkore
International: www.alliedeg.com/#sle.

2. Nucor Tubular Products: www.nucortubular/#sle.

3. Rymco USA: www.rymcousa.com/#sle.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.

C. Fittings:

Conduit for Electrical Systems 260533.13 - 8

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression/gland or set-screw type. a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.

4. Damp or Wet Locations, Where Permitted: Use fittings listed for use in wet locations.

2.10 STAINLESS STEEL ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT stainless steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797A.

B. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.

2. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression/gland or set-screw type. a. Do not use set-screw type connectors and couplings.

3. Damp or Wet Locations, Where Permitted: Use fittings listed for use in wet locations.

2.11 REINFORCED THERMOSETTING RESIN CONDUIT (RTRC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RTRC reinforced thermosetting resin conduit complying with NEMA TC 14 (SERIES).

B. Supports: As recommended by manufacturer.

C. Fittings: Same type and manufacturer as conduit to be connected.

2.12 ACCESSORIES
A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil, 0.020 inch.

B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive compound listed as complying with UL 2419; suitable for use with conduit to be installed.

C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed.

D. Epoxy Adhesive for RTRC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed.

E. Pull Strings: Use nylon or polyester tape with average breaking strength of not less than 1,250 lbf.

Conduit for Electrical Systems 260533.13 - 9
F. Sealing Systems for Concrete Penetrations:

1. Sleeves: Provide water stop ring or cement coating that bonds to concrete to prevent water infiltration.

2. Rate for minimum of 40 psig; suitable for sealing around conduits to be installed.

G. Flashing Panels for Exterior Wall Penetrations: Premanufactured components and accessories as required to preserve integrity of building envelope; suitable for conduits and facade materials to be installed.

H. Firestop Sleeves: Listed; provide as required to preserve fire resistance rating of building elements.

I. Duct Bank Spacers: Nonmetallic; designed for maintaining conduit/duct spacing for concrete encasement in open trench installation; suitable for conduit/duct arrangement to be installed.

J. Bore Spacers: Nonmetallic; designed for maintaining conduit/duct spacing for installation within casing; furnished with roller wheels to facilitate installation, openings to facilitate grout flow, and holes for stabilization cable; suitable for casing and conduit/duct arrangement to be installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install conduit in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

D. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by manufacturer.

E. Conduit Routing:

1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required.

3. Conceal conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.

Conduit for Electrical Systems 260533.13 - 10

4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Electrical rooms.
b. Mechanical equipment rooms.
c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.

5. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical.

6. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.

7. Arrange conduit to provide no more than equivalent of four 90-degree bends between pull points.

8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points.

9. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.

10. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect.

11. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems.

12. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Heaters.
b. Hot water piping.
c. Flues.

13. Group parallel conduits in same area on common rack.

F. Conduit Support:

1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by authorities having jurisdiction; see Section 260529.

2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.

Conduit for Electrical Systems 260533.13 - 11

4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit. a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide space between conduit and mounting surface.

5. Use metal channel/strut with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted conduits.

6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.

7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel/strut with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.

8. Use nonpenetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops, where approved.

9. Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is not permitted.

10. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted.

G. Connections and Terminations:

1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections.

2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.

3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.

4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors.

5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.

6. Provide insulating bushings, insulated throats, or listed metal fittings with smooth, rounded edges at conduit terminations to protect conductors.

7. Secure joints and connections to provide mechanical strength and electrical continuity.

H. Penetrations:

1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.

2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

Conduit for Electrical Systems 260533.13 - 12

3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.

4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.

5. Provide suitable sealing system where conduits penetrate exterior wall below grade.

6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane.

7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty.

8. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view.

9. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements; see Section 078400.

I. Underground Installation:

1. Provide trenching and backfilling; see Section 312316.13.

2. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a. Underground, Exterior: 18 inches.
b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab.

3. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 260553 along entire conduit length.

J. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated to be concrete-encased, provide concrete in accordance with Section Concrete with minimum concrete cover of 3 inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated.

K. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:

1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.

2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC) conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.

Conduit for Electrical Systems 260533.13 - 13

3. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.

L. Conduit Sealing:

1. Use foam conduit sealant to prevent entry of moisture and gases. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Where conduits enter building from outside.
b. Where service conduits enter building from underground distribution system.
c. Where conduits enter building from underground.

2. Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, use foam conduit sealant at accessible point near penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.
b. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.

M. Provide pull string in each empty conduit and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end.

N. Provide grounding and bonding; see Section 260526.

O. Identify conduits; see Section 260553.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

B. Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors.

Conduit for Electrical Systems 260533.13 - 14

END OF SECTION
Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533.16 - 1

BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull boxes.

B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.

C. Boxes and enclosures for integrated power, data, and audio/video.

D. Underground boxes/enclosures.

E. Accessories.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2016.

C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

D. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; 2014.

E. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; 2013 (Reaffirmed 2020).

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

G. SCTE 77 - Specifications for Underground Enclosure Integrity; 2017.

H. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533.16 - 2

1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.

4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.

5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.

6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.

7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted boxes where indicated.

8. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for floor boxes and underground boxes/enclosures.

B. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Keys for Lockable Enclosures: Two of each different key.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BOXES
A. General Requirements:

1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.

Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533.16 - 3

3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.

5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate.

B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.

2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.

3. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.

4. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.

5. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required.

6. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.

7. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.

8. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A.

9. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish with threaded hubs.

10. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required.

11. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted.

12. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a. Wiring Devices (Other Than Communications Systems Outlets): 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size. b. Communications Systems Outlets: 4 inch square by 2-1/8 inch (100 by 54 mm) trade size.

Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533.16 - 4
c. Ceiling Outlets: 4 inch octagonal or square by 1-1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size.

13. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 262726.

14. Manufacturers:
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Bell Products; ______: www.hubbell- rtb.com/#sle.
b. Hubbell Incorporated; RACO Products; ______: www.hubbell- rtb.com/#sle.

C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A.

2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1, painted steel. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R, painted steel.

3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
b. Boxes 6 square feet and Larger: Provide sectionalized screw- cover or hinged-cover enclosures.

4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes:
a. Provide lockable hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
b. Back Panels: Painted steel, removable.
c. Terminal Blocks: Provide voltage/current ratings and terminal quantity suitable for purpose indicated, with 25 percent spare terminal capacity.

5. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated.

6. Manufacturers:
a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation;
__________: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle.

Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533.16 - 5
b. Hoffman, a brand of Pentair Technical Products;
__________: www.hoffmanonline.com/#sle.
c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiegmann Products;
______: www.hubbell-wiegmann.com/#sle.

D. Boxes and Enclosures for Integrated Power, Data, and Audio/Video: Size and configuration as indicated or as required with partitions to separate services; field-connected gangable boxes may be used.

E. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:

1. Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with legend indicating type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts.

2. Size: As indicated on drawings.

3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 12 inches.

4. Applications:
a. Sidewalks and Landscaped Areas Subject Only to Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete
enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77 Tier 8 load rating.
b. Parking Lots, in Areas Subject Only To Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77 Tier 15 load rating.
c. Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehicular traffic.

5. Polymer Concrete Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Comply with SCTE

77. a. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell Incorporated; Quazite Products;
______: www.hubbellpowersystems.com/#sle.
b. Combination fiberglass/polymer concrete boxes/enclosures are acceptable.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Flashing Panels for Exterior Wall Penetrations: Premanufactured components and accessories as required to preserve integrity of building envelope; suitable for boxes and facade materials to be installed.

1. Manufacturers:

Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533.16 - 6
a. Quickflash Weatherproofing Products,
Inc: www.quickflashproducts.com/#sle.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems.

F. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface- mounted.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or permitted.

H. Box Locations:

1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section Access Panels as requiredwhere approved by the Architect.

2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate.

3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.
a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 262726.

4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.

5. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.

6. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.

7. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to- back. Provide minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.

Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533.16 - 7

8. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation.

9. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire resistance will not be reduced.
a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individual noncommunicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty pads.
b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or such that the total aggregate area of openings exceeds 100 square inches for any 100 square feet of wall area.

10. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 260533.13.

11. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect:
a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.
b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
c. Electrical rooms.
d. Mechanical equipment rooms.

I. Box Supports:

1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 260529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support system.

4. Use far-side support to secure flush-mounted boxes supported from single stud in hollow stud walls. Repair or replace supports for boxes that permit excessive movement.

J. Install boxes plumb and level.

K. Flush-Mounted Boxes:

Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533.16 - 8

1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.

2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface.

3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge of the box.

L. Floor-Mounted Cabinets: Mount on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 033000.

M. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.

N. Metallic Floor Boxes: Install box level at the proper elevation to be flush with finished floor.

O. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Cut box flush with finished floor after concrete pour.

P. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:

1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches deep.

2. Flush-mount enclosures located in concrete or paved areas.

3. Mount enclosures located in landscaped areas with top at 1 inch above finished grade.

4. Provide cast-in-place concrete collar constructed in accordance with Section 033000, minimum 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep, around enclosures that are not located in concrete areas.

5. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover bolted in place.

Q. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V.

R. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 078400.

S. Close unused box openings.

T. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use.

U. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.

V. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 260553.

Boxes for Electrical Systems 260533.16 - 9

3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.

3.3 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION
Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 - 1

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical identification requirements.

B. Identification nameplates and labels.

C. Wire and cable markers.

D. Voltage markers.

E. Underground warning tape.

F. Warning signs and labels.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.

B. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices - Lutron: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-marked wallplates.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011 (Reaffirmed 2017).

B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011 (Reaffirmed 2017).

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

D. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2024.

E. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to fabrication of identification products.

B. Sequencing:

Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 - 2

1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until identification products have been installed.

2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide schedule of items to be identified indicating proposed designations, materials, legends, and formats.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of product.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Identification for Equipment:

1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.
a. Switchboards:
1) Identify ampere rating and name.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
4) Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective device.
5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device.Identify spares and spaces.
b. Panelboards:
1) Identify ampere rating and name.

Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 - 3
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
4) Identify main overcurrent protective device. Use
identification label for panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate.
5) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil.
6) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch
device.Identify spares and spaces.
c. Transformers:
1) Identify kVA rating and name.
2) Identify voltage and phase for primary and secondary. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
4) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
d. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:
1) Identify voltage and phase.
2) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
e. Busway:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment.
f. Centralized Emergency Lighting Inverters:
1) Identify input and output voltage and phase.
2) Identify power source and circuit number for normal power source. Include location when not within sight of
equipment.

Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 - 4
3) Identify load(s) served. Include location.
g. Electricity Meters:
1) Identify load(s) metered.

2. Service Equipment:
a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means.
b. For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service, or any combination of branch circuits, feeders, and services, use identification nameplate or means of identification acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service disconnecting means to identify all other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying that building or structure. Verify format and descriptions with authority having jurisdiction.

3. Emergency System Equipment:
a. Use identification nameplate or voltage marker to identify emergency system equipment in accordance with NFPA 70.
b. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify type and location of on-site emergency power sources. c. Use identification nameplate to identify emergency operating instructions for emergency system equipment.

4. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with remote disconnecting means.

5. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the available fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring documentation by NFPA 70 including but not limited to the following.
a. Service equipment.
b. Industrial control panels.
c. Motor control centers.
d. Elevator control panels.
e. Industrial machinery.

6. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.

Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 - 5
a. Minimum Size: 3.5 by 5 inches.
b. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the word message "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do not operate controls or open covers without appropriate personal protection equipment; Failure to comply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA 70E for minimum PPE requirements" or approved equivalent.

7. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and other guarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V nominal or less with the word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized personnel only" or approved equivalent.

8. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all buildings, vaults, rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT".

9. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for equipment, compartments, and enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP OUT".

10. Use warning labels, identification nameplates, or identification labels to identify electrical hazards for equipment where multiple power sources are present with the word message "DANGER; Hazardous voltage; Multiple power sources may be present; Disconnect all electric power including remote disconnects before servicing" or approved equivalent.

B. Identification for Conductors and Cables:

1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 260519.

2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.

3. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations:
a. At each source and load connection.
b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present.
c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the enclosure.

Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 - 6

4. Use wire and cable markers to identify connected grounding electrode system components for grounding electrode conductors.

C. Identification for Raceways:

1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet.

2. Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags to identify circuits enclosed for accessible conduits at wall penetrations, at floor penetrations, at roof penetrations, and at equipment terminations when source is not within sight.

3. Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags to identify spare conduits at each end. Identify purpose and termination location.

4. Use underground warning tape to identify underground raceways.

D. Identification for Boxes:

1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present.

2. Use identification labels or handwritten text using indelible marker to identify circuits enclosed.
a. For exposed boxes in public areas, use only identification labels.

E. Identification for Devices:

1. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 262726.

2. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles.
a. For receptacles in public areas or in areas as directed by Architect, provide identification on inside surface of wallplate.

3. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify load controlled for wall-mounted control devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control location and for multiple wall-mounted control devices installed at one location.

F. Identification for Luminaires:

1. Use permanent red dot on luminaire frame to identify luminaires connected to emergency power system.

2.2 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Identification Nameplates:

1. Manufacturers:

Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 - 7
a. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.
b. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co; ______: www.kolbipipemarkers.com/#sle. c. Seton Identification Products; ______: www.seton.com/#sle.

2. Materials:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates. b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use.

3. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text.
a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch when any dimension is greater than 4 inches.

4. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text.

5. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text.

6. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.

B. Identification Labels:

1. Manufacturers:
a. Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradyid.com/#sle.
b. Brother International Corporation: www.brother-usa.com/#sle. c. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com/#sle.

2. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant.

3. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated.

C. Format for Equipment Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.

2. Legend:
a. Equipment designation or other approved description.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 - 8

4. Minimum Text Height:
a. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch.
b. Other Information: 1/4 inch.

5. Color:
a. Normal Power System: White text on black background. 1) 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase Equipment: White text on
__________ background.
2) 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase Equipment: White text on
__________ background.
b. Emergency Power System: White text on red background.

D. Format for Caution and Warning Messages:

1. Minimum Size: 2 inches by 4 inches.

2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and safe operation and maintenance.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 1/2 inch.

5. Color: Black text on yellow background unless otherwise indicated.

E. Format for Receptacle Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.

2. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.

5. Color: Black text on clear background.

F. Format for Control Device Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.

2. Legend: Load controlled or other designation indicated.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.

5. Color: Black text on clear background.

2.3 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS
Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 - 9
A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.

B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties.

C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.

D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

E. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.

F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 VOLTAGE MARKERS
A. Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl, self-adhesive vinyl cloth, or vinyl snap-around type markers.

B. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self- adhesive vinyl or self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers.

C. Minimum Size:

1. Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be identified.

2. Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches.

3. Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches.

D. Legend:

1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present.

E. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Manufacturers:

1. Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradyid.com/#sle.

2. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.

B. Materials: Use non-detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Non-detectable Type Tape: 6 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 4 mil.

D. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.

Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 - 10
E. Color:

2.6 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com/#sle.

2. Clarion Safety Systems, LLC; ______: www.clarionsafety.com/#sle.

3. Insite Solutions, LLC; ______: www.stop-painting.com/#sle.

B. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.

C. Warning Signs:

1. Materials:
a. Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self-adhesive vinyl signs.
b. Outdoor Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid aluminum signs.

2. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners.

3. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated.

D. Warning Labels:

1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969. a. Do not use labels designed to be completed using handwritten text.

2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer.

3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Identification for Electrical Systems 260553 - 11
B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:

1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.

2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.

3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access.

4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.

5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.

6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.

7. Conduits: Legible from the floor.

8. Boxes: Outside face of cover.

9. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.

10. Devices: Outside face of cover.

C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.

D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.

E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed.

F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade.

G. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws.

H. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper adhesion.

END OF SECTION
Power System Studies 260573 - 1

POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Short-circuit study.

B. Protective device coordination study.

C. Arc flash and shock risk assessment.

1. Includes arc flash hazard warning labels.

D. Criteria for the selection and adjustment of equipment and associated protective devices not specified in this section, as determined by studies to be performed.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for arc flash hazard warning labels.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011 (Reaffirmed 2017).

B. IEEE 141 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants; 1993 (Reaffirmed 1999).

C. IEEE 242 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems; 2001, with Errata (2003).

D. IEEE 399 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems Analysis; 1997.

E. IEEE 551 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Calculating Short-Circuit Currents in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems; 2006.

F. IEEE 1584 - IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations; 2018, with Errata (2019).

G. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2021.

H. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

J. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2024.

Power System Studies 260573 - 2

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Existing Installations: Coordinate with equipment manufacturer(s) to obtain data necessary for completion of studies.

2. Coordinate the work to provide equipment and associated protective devices complying with criteria for selection and adjustment, as determined by studies to be performed.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Submit study reports prior to or concurrent with product submittals.

2. Do not order equipment until matching study reports and product submittals have both been evaluated by Architect.

3. Verify naming convention for equipment identification prior to creation of final drawings, reports, and arc flash hazard warning labels (where applicable).

C. Scheduling:

1. Arrange access to existing facility for data collection with Owner.

2. Where work of this section involves interruption of existing electrical service, arrange service interruption with Owner.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Study reports, stamped or sealed and signed by study preparer.

1.6 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
A. Scope of Studies:

1. Perform analysis of new electrical distribution system as indicated on drawings.

2. Except where study descriptions below indicate exclusions, analyze system at each bus from primary protective devices of utility source down to each piece of equipment involved, including parts of system affecting calculations being performed (e.g. fault current contribution from motors).

3. Include in analysis alternate sources and operating modes (including known future configurations) to determine worst case conditions. a. Known Operating Modes:

Power System Studies 260573 - 3
1) Utility as source.
2) Generator as source.

B. General Study Requirements:

1. Comply with NFPA 70.

2. Perform studies utilizing computer software complying with specified requirements; manual calculations are not permitted.

C. Data Collection:

1. Compile information on project-specific characteristics of actual installed equipment, protective devices, feeders, etc. as necessary to develop single-line diagram of electrical distribution system and associated input data for use in system modeling.
a. Utility Source Data: Include primary voltage, maximum and minimum three-phase and line-to-ground fault currents,
impedance, X/R ratio, and primary protective device information. 1) Obtain up-to-date information from Utility Company.
2) Utility Company: As indicated on drawings.
b. Generators: Include manufacturer/model, kW and voltage ratings, and impedance.
c. Motors: Include manufacturer/model, type (e.g. induction, synchronous), horsepower rating, voltage rating, full load amps, and locked rotor current or NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. d. Transformers: Include primary and secondary voltage ratings, kVA rating, winding configuration, percent impedance, and X/R ratio.
e. Protective Devices:
1) Circuit Breakers: Include manufacturer/model, type (e.g. thermal magnetic, electronic trip), frame size, trip rating, voltage rating, interrupting rating, available field-adjustable trip response settings, and features (e.g. zone selective interlocking).
2) Fuses: Include manufacturer/model, type/class (e.g. Class J), size/rating, and speed (e.g. time delay, fast acting). f. Protective Relays: Include manufacturer/model, type, settings, current/potential transformer ratio, and associated protective device.

Power System Studies 260573 - 4
g. Conductors: Include feeder size, material (e.g. copper, aluminum), insulation type, voltage rating, number per phase, raceway type, and actual length.

2. Existing Installations:
a. Provide the services of field testing agency or equipment manufacturer's representative to perform field data collection. b. Collect data on existing electrical distribution system necessary for completion of studies, including field verification of available existing data (e.g. construction documents, previous studies).

Include actual settings for field-adjustable devices.

D. Short-Circuit Study:

1. Comply with IEEE 551 and applicable portions of IEEE 141, IEEE 242, and IEEE 399.

2. For purposes of determining equipment short circuit current ratings, consider conditions that may result in maximum available fault current, including but not limited to:
a. Maximum utility fault currents.
b. Maximum motor contribution.
c. Known operating modes (e.g. utility as source, generator as source, utility/generator in parallel, bus tie breaker open/close positions).

3. For each bus location, calculate the maximum available three-phase bolted symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. For grounded systems, also calculate the maximum available line-to-ground bolted fault currents.

E. Protective Device Coordination Study:

1. Comply with applicable portions of IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.

2. Analyze alternate scenarios considering known operating modes (e.g. utility as source, generator as source, utility/generator in parallel, bus tie breaker open/close positions).

3. Analyze protective devices and associated settings for suitable margins between time-current curves to provide adequate protection for equipment and conductors while achieving full selective coordination.

F. Arc Flash and Shock Risk Assessment:

1. Comply with NFPA 70E.

Power System Studies 260573 - 5

2. Perform incident energy and arc flash boundary calculations in accordance with IEEE 1584 (as referenced in NFPA 70E Annex D), where applicable.

3. Analyze alternate scenarios considering conditions that may result in maximum incident energy, including but not limited to:
a. Maximum and minimum utility fault currents.
b. Maximum and minimum motor contribution.
c. Known operating modes (e.g. utility as source, generator as source, utility/generator in parallel, bus tie breaker open/close positions).

G. Study Reports:

1. General Requirements:
a. Identify date of study and study preparer.
b. Identify study methodology and software product(s) used. c. Identify scope of studies, assumptions made, implications of possible alternate scenarios, and any exclusions from studies. d. Identify base used for per unit values.
e. Include single-line diagram and associated input data used for studies; identify buses on single-line diagram as referenced in reports, and indicate bus voltage.
f. Include conclusions and recommendations.

2. Short-Circuit Study:
a. For each scenario, identify at each bus location:
1) Calculated maximum available symmetrical and
asymmetrical fault currents (both three-phase and line-to- ground where applicable).
2) Fault point X/R ratio.
3) Associated equipment short circuit current ratings.
b. Identify locations where the available fault current exceeds the equipment short circuit current rating, along with
recommendations.

3. Protective Device Coordination Study:
a. For each scenario, include time-current coordination curves plotted on log-log scale graphs.

Power System Studies 260573 - 6
b. For each graph include (where applicable):
1) Partial single-line diagram identifying the portion of the system illustrated.
2) Protective Devices: Time-current curves with applicable tolerance bands for each protective device in series back to the source, plotted up to the maximum available fault current at the associated bus.
3) Conductors: Damage curves.
4) Transformers: Inrush points and damage curves.
5) Generators: Full load current, overload curves, decrement curves, and short circuit withstand points.
6) Motors: Full load current, starting curves, and damage curves.
7) Capacitors: Full load current and damage curves.
c. For each protective device, identify fixed and adjustable characteristics with available ranges and recommended settings. 1) Circuit Breakers: Include long time pickup and delay, short time pickup and delay, and instantaneous pickup.
2) Include ground fault pickup and delay.
3) Include fuse ratings.
4) Protective Relays: Include current/potential transformer ratios, tap, time dial, and instantaneous pickup.
d. Identify cases where either full selective coordination or adequate protection is not achieved, along with recommendations.

4. Arc Flash and Shock Risk Assessment:
a. For the worst case for each scenario, identify at each bus location:
1) Calculated incident energy and associated working
distance.
2) Calculated arc flash boundary.
3) Bolted fault current.
4) Arcing fault current.
5) Clearing time.
6) Arc gap distance.

Power System Studies 260573 - 7
b. For purposes of producing arc flash hazard warning labels, summarize the maximum incident energy and associated data reflecting the worst case condition of all scenarios at each bus location.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Study Preparer Qualifications: Professional electrical engineer licensed in the State in which the Project is located and with minimum five years experience in preparation of studies of similar type and complexity using specified computer software.

B. Computer Software for Study Preparation: Use the latest edition of commercially available software utilizing specified methodologies.

1. Products:
a. EasyPower LLC: www.easypower.com/#sle.
b. ETAP/Operation Technology, Inc: www.etap.com/#sle.
c. Power Analytics Corporation: www.poweranalytics.com/#sle. d. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc: www.skm.com/#sle.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ARC FLASH HAZARD WARNING LABELS
A. Provide warning labels complying with ANSI Z535.4 to identify arc flash hazards for each work location analyzed by the arc flash and shock risk assessment.

1. Materials: Comply with Section 260553.

2. Legend: Provide custom legend in accordance with NFPA 70E based on equipment-specific data as determined by arc flash and shock risk assessment.
a. Include orange header that reads "WARNING" unless otherwise indicated.
b. Include the text "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required" or approved equivalent.
c. Include the following information:
1) Arc flash boundary.
2) Available incident energy and corresponding working
distance.
3) Site-specific PPE (personnel protective equipment)
requirements.

Power System Studies 260573 - 8
4) Nominal system voltage.
5) Limited approach boundary.
6) Restricted approach boundary.
7) Equipment identification.
8) Study preparer, report reference, and date calculations were performed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install arc flash warning labels in accordance with Section 260553.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Adjust equipment and protective devices for compliance with studies and recommended settings.

D. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from studies. Obtain direction before proceeding.

END OF SECTION
Wiring Connections 260583 - 1

WIRING CONNECTIONS

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical connections to equipment.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2020).

B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2021.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.

2. Determine connection locations and requirements.

B. Sequencing:

1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required.

2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

Wiring Connections 260583 - 2
C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.

1. Colors: Comply with NEMA WD 1.

2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.

3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection.

B. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 262726.

C. Boxes: As specified in Section 260533.16.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.

3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered.

D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.

E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.

F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.

G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements.

H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.

I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements.

Wiring Connections 260583 - 3

END OF SECTION
Installation & Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems 260802 - 1

INSTALLATION & ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)

INTRODUCTION

1.1 TITLE 24 REQUIRES THE COMPLETION OF ALL APPLICABLE CERTIFICATES OF INSTALLATION AND CERTIFICATES OF ACCEPTANCE FOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS.

THIS SHALL INCLUDE INDOOR AND OUTDOOR LIGHTING SYSTEMS.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Contract drawings and specifications, general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions, electrical provisions and Division-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Complete all Title 24 required Certificate(s) of Installation (NRCI) and Certificate(s) of Acceptance (NRCA) to be completed per the contract documents.

1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES OF INSTALLING CONTRACTORS
A. General Contractor (GC)

1. Ensure that all contractors identified as the contractor responsible for acceptance testing and completion of the Title 24 Certificate(s) of Acceptance are certified by the State of California or its designated body to conduct each respective test.

B. Electrical Contractor (EC)

1. Verify proper installation and performance of all electrical services provided.

2. Meet with acceptance tester at beginning of construction to review project requirements.

3. Complete Title 24 Certificate(s) of Installation and manufacturer’s pre- start checklists prior to scheduling startup/programming of lighting control equipment.
a. Retain Certificate(s) of Installation in a 3-ring binder in an organized fashion. Binder is to remain on the job site
b. Make Certificate(s) of Installation available for building inspector’s review.

Installation & Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems 260802 - 2 c. Retain calibration records for equipment provided with manufacturer calibrated sensors in the Certificate(s) of Installation binder.
d. Correct labeling of all circuits with connected equipment.

4. Complete the Certificate(s) of Acceptance per the contract documents. a. The company installing the lighting systems must be an authorized Lighting Controls Acceptance Test Employer certified by a Lighting Controls Acceptance Test Technician Certification Provider or include in their bid the cost of retaining and overseeing a contractor who is an authorized Lighting Controls Acceptance Test Employer to complete the acceptance testing.
b. All required acceptance testing must be completed by a Lighting Controls Acceptance Test Technician employed by the Lighting Controls Acceptance Test Employer. The acceptance tester shall be present for all commissioning efforts.
c. Retain Certificate(s) of Acceptance in a 3-ring binder in an organized fashion. Binder is to remain on the job site
d. Upload all Certificate(s) of Acceptance to the California Title 24 Certificates of Acceptance database, if, at the time of project completion, the database is available to the public.

5. Successful completion of the required Acceptance Tests is the responsibility of the installing contractor. Any costs associated with modifications necessary to obtain compliance and re-testing of systems shall be included in the base bid of this project.

END OF SECTION
Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance 262100 - 1

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - PRODUCTS

1.1 ELECTRICAL SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide new electrical service consisting of all required conduits, conductors, equipment, metering provisions, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for connection between Utility Company point of supply and service entrance equipment.

B. Electrical Service Characteristics: As indicated on drawings.

C. Electrical Service Characteristics:

1. Service Type: Underground.

2. Service Voltage: 480Y/277 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz.

D. Division of Responsibility: As indicated on drawings.

E. Products Furnished by Contractor: Comply with Utility Company requirements.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that ratings and configurations of service entrance equipment are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

2.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Utility Company requirements.

B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.

D. Provide required trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 312316.13.

E. Construct cast-in-place concrete pads for utility equipment in accordance with Utility Company requirements and Section 033000.

F. Provide required protective bollards in accordance with Utility Company requirements.

Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance 262100 - 2
G. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 260529.

H. Provide grounding and bonding for service entrance equipment in accordance with Section 260526.

I. Identify service entrance equipment, including main service disconnect(s) in accordance with Section 260553.

2.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed equipment from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION
Low-Voltage Transformers 262200 - 1

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General purpose transformers.

B. K-factor transformers rated for nonlinear loads.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 260533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Flexible conduit connections.

E. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 10 CFR 431, Subpart K - Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment - Distribution Transformers; Current Edition.

B. IEEE C57.94 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Installation, Application, Operation, and Maintenance of Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers; 2015.

C. IEEE C57.96 - IEEE Standard Guide for Loading Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers; 2013.

D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

E. NECA 409 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers; 2015.

F. NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General Applications; 2021.

G. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

H. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

Low-Voltage Transformers 262200 - 2
J. UL 506 - Standard for Specialty Transformers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 1561 - Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.

4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include voltage, kVA, impedance, tap configurations, insulation system class and rated temperature rise, efficiency, sound level, enclosure ratings, outline and support point dimensions, weight, required clearances, service condition requirements, and installed features.

1. Vibration Isolators: Include attachment method and rated load and deflection.

2. K-factor Rated Transformers: Include K-factor ratings.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views of transformers and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated.

1. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.

C. Manufacturer's equipment seismic qualification certification.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

Low-Voltage Transformers 262200 - 3
C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure, and finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.

B. Schneider Electric: www.se.com/#sle.

C. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.

D. Source Limitations: Provide transformers produced by same manufacturer as other electrical distribution equipment used for project and obtained from single supplier.

2.2 TRANSFORMERS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, dry type transformers for 60 Hz operation designed and manufactured in accordance with NEMA ST 20 and listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

B. Unless noted otherwise, transformer ratings indicated are for continuous loading according to IEEE C57.96 under the following service conditions:

1. Altitude: Less than 3,300 feet.

2. Ambient Temperature:
a. Greater than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 104 degrees F.
b. Less than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 77 degrees F.

C. Core: High grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Keep magnetic flux densities substantially below saturation point, even at 10 percent primary overvoltage.

Tightly clamp core laminations to prevent plate movement and maintain consistent pressure throughout core length.

D. Impregnate core and coil assembly with non-hydroscopic thermo-setting varnish to effectively seal out moisture and other contaminants.

Low-Voltage Transformers 262200 - 4
E. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV.

F. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copper grounding strap.

G. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts.

H. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data, ratings, wiring diagrams, and overload capacity based on rated winding temperature rise.

2.3 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS
A. Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561; ratings as indicated on the drawings.

B. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise:

1. Less than 15 kVA: Class 180 degrees C insulation system with 115 degrees C average winding temperature rise.

2. 15 kVA and Larger: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C average winding temperature rise.

C. Coil Conductors: Continuous copper windings with terminations brazed or welded.

D. Winding Taps:

1. Less than 3 kVA: None.

2. 3 kVA through 15 kVA: Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.

3. 15 kVA through 300 kVA: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and four 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.

4. 500 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.

E. Energy Efficiency: Comply with 10 CFR 431, Subpart K.

F. Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20 G. Mounting Provisions:

1. Less than 15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting.

2. 15 kVA through 75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting.

3. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.

H. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:

Low-Voltage Transformers 262200 - 5
a. Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 2.
b. Outdoor locations: Type 3R.

2. Construction: Steel.
a. Less than 15 kVA: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated. b. 15 kVA and Larger: Ventilated.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations.

4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.

I. Accessories:

1. Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets.

2. Weathershield Kits: Provide for ventilated transformers installed outdoors to provide a listed NEMA 250, type 3R assembly.

3. Lug Kits: Sized as required for termination of conductors as indicated on the drawings.

2.4 K-FACTOR TRANSFORMERS RATED FOR NONLINEAR LOADS
A. Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 1561, and designed to supply nonlinear loads to the degree designated by the UL defined K-factor; ratings as indicated on the drawings.

B. K-factor Rating: K-4, or higher.

C. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C average winding temperature rise.

D. Coil Conductors: Continuous aluminum windings with terminations brazed or welded. Individually insulate secondary conductors and arrange to minimize hysteresis and eddy current losses at harmonic frequencies. Size secondary neutral conductor at twice the secondary phase conductor ampacity.

E. Winding Taps: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and four 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage.

F. Neutral Bus: Sized to accommodate twice the rated secondary current.

G. Energy Efficiency: Comply with 10 CFR 431, Subpart K.

H. Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20 I. Mounting Provisions:

1. Up to 75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting.

2. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting.

Low-Voltage Transformers 262200 - 6
J. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:

2. Construction: Steel, ventilated.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations.

4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test transformers according to NEMA ST 20.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install transformers in accordance with NECA 409 and IEEE C57.94.

D. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 260533.13, 2 feet minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.

E. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances as specified on transformer nameplate and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

F. Install transformers plumb and level.

G. Transformer Support:

1. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 260529, where not furnished by transformer manufacturer.

2. Use integral transformer flanges to support wall-mounted transformers.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted transformers on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 033000.

4. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) to support suspended transformers. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.

I. Remove shipping braces and adjust bolts that attach the core and coil mounting bracket to the enclosure according to manufacturer's recommendations in order to reduce audible noise transmission.

Low-Voltage Transformers 262200 - 7
J. Where not factory-installed, install lugs sized as required for termination of conductors as indicated.

K. Where furnished as a separate accessory, install transformer weathershield per manufacturer's instructions.

L. Identify transformers in accordance with Section 260553.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS Sections 7.2.1.1 and 7.2.1.2.

Tests and inspections listed as optional are not required.

1. 167 kVA single phase, 500 kVA three phase and smaller:
a. Perform turns ratio tests at all tap positions.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments.

B. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from transformer components according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION
Switchboards 262413 - 1

SWITCHBOARDS

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Low-voltage (600 V and less) switchboards and associated accessories for service and distribution applications.

B. Overcurrent protective devices for switchboards.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 262713 - Electricity Metering: For interface with equipment specified in this section.

D. Section 262813 - Fuses: Fuses for fusible switches.

E. Section 264300 - Surge Protective Devices.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; 2013e, with Amendment (2017).

B. IEEE C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers; 2016.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

D. NECA 400 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Switchboards; 2007.

E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

F. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.

G. NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards; 2011.

H. NEMA PB 2.1 - General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2013.

I. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

Switchboards 262413 - 2
K. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 891 - Switchboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 1053 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

4. Coordinate with manufacturer to provide shipping splits suitable for the dimensional constraints of the installation.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Service Entrance Switchboards:

1. Coordinate with Utility Company to provide switchboards with suitable provisions for electrical service and utility metering, where applicable.

2. Coordinate with Owner to arrange for Utility Company required access to equipment for installation and maintenance.

3. Obtain Utility Company approval of switchboard prior to fabrication.

4. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section to review requirements with Utility Company representative.

5. Arrange for inspections necessary to obtain Utility Company approval of installation.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
Switchboards 262413 - 3
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for switchboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, voltage, bus ampacities, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.

1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of switchboards and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated.

2. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.

C. Manufacturer's equipment seismic qualification certification.

D. Service Entrance Switchboards: Include documentation of Utility Company approval of switchboard.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of switchboards and final equipment settings.

G. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Enclosure Keys: Two of each different key.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NECA 400, and NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Store in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent condensation (including outdoor switchboards, which are not weatherproof until completely and properly installed). Where necessary, provide temporary enclosure space heaters or temporary power for permanent factory-installed space heaters.

Switchboards 262413 - 4
C. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

D. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within required service conditions during and after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Switchboards - Basis of Design: Eaton.

B. Switchboards:

1. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.

2. Schneider Electric: www.se.com/#sle.

3. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.new.siemens.com/#sle.

2.2 SWITCHBOARDS
A. Provide switchboards consisting of all required components, control power transformers, instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Description: Dead-front switchboard assemblies complying with NEMA PB 2, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 891; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.

D. Service Entrance Switchboards:

1. Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A.

2. For solidly-grounded wye systems, provide factory-installed main bonding jumper between neutral and ground busses, and removable neutral disconnecting link for testing purposes.

3. Comply with Utility Company requirements for electrical service.

4. Utility Metering Provisions: Provide separate barriered compartment complying with Utility Company requirements where indicated or where required by Utility Company. Include hinged sealable door and provisions for Utility Company current transformers (CTs), potential transformers (PTs), or potential taps as required.

Switchboards 262413 - 5
E. Service Conditions:

1. Provide switchboards and associated components suitable for operation at indicated ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.

F. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide switchboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

2. Listed series ratings are not acceptable.

G. Main Devices: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. Provide separate pull section and/or top-mounted pullbox as indicated or as required to facilitate installation of incoming feed.

H. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 891 temperature rise requirements.

1. Through bus (horizontal cross bus) to be fully rated through full length of switchboard (non-tapered). Tapered bus is not permitted.

2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus through full length of switchboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

3. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.

4. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

I. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

1. Line Conductor Terminations:
a. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
b. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

2. Load Conductor Terminations:
a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.
b. Lug Type:
1) Provide mechanical lugs.
2) Provide compression lugs where indicated.

J. Enclosures:

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:

Switchboards 262413 - 6
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1 or Type 2 (drip-proof). b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

3. Outdoor Enclosures:
a. Enclosure Type: Non-walk-in type unless otherwise indicated. b. Color: Manufacturer's standard.
c. Access Doors: Lockable, with all locks keyed alike.

K. Future Provisions:

1. Prepare designated spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.

2. Equip distribution sections with full height vertical bussing to accommodate maximum utilization of space for devices.

3. Where designated spaces for future device provisions are not indicated, include provisions for minimum of 6 device(s) rated at 25 percent of rating of switchboard main or incoming feed.

4. Arrange and equip through bus and ground bus to accommodate future installation of additional switchboard sectionswhere indicated.

L. Surge Protective Devices: Where factory-installed, internally mounted surge protective devices are provided in accordance with Section 264300, list switchboards as a complete assembly including surge protective device.

M. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed and labeled as complying with UL 1053.

1. Where overcurrent protective devices equipped with integral ground fault protection are used, provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable.

2. Where accessory ground fault sensing and relaying equipment is used, equip companion overcurrent protective devices with ground-fault shunt trips.
a. Use zero sequence or residual ground fault detection method unless otherwise indicated.
b. Provide test panel and field-adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay settings.

N. Arc Flash Energy-Reducing Maintenance Switching: For circuit breakers rated 1200 A or higher, provide a local accessory switch with status indicator light that Switchboards 262413 - 7
permits selection of a maintenance mode with alternate electronic trip unit settings for reduced fault clearing time.

O. Owner Metering: Comply with Section 262713.

P. Instrument Transformers:

1. Comply with IEEE C57.13.

2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices.

3. Current Transformers: Connect secondaries to shorting terminal blocks.

4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means.

2.3 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Fusible Devices:

1. Fusible Switches:
a. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, dead-front fusible switch units complying with NEMA KS 1, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
b. Fuse Clips: As required to accept indicated fuses.
c. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position. Provide means for locking switch cover in the closed position. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.

B. Circuit Breakers:

1. Interrupting Capacity:
a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than specified minimum requirements.
b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated.

2. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
a. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip- free, trip-indicating circuit breakers; listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

Switchboards 262413 - 8
1) Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.
2) Provide electronic trip circuit breakers where indicated. b. Minimum Interrupting Capacity:
1) 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC. 2) 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC.
c. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection.
d. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true rms sensing trip units.
e. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation:
1) Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test switchboards according to NEMA PB 2, including the following production (routine) tests on each switchboard assembly or component:

1. Dielectric tests.

2. Mechanical operation tests.

3. Grounding of instrument transformer cases test.

4. Electrical operation and control wiring tests, including polarity and sequence tests.

5. Ground-fault sensing equipment test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the switchboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive switchboards.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
Switchboards 262413 - 9
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install switchboards in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 400, and NEMA PB 2.1.

C. Arrange equipment to provide required clearances and maintenance access, including accommodations for any drawout devices.

D. Where switchboard is indicated to be mounted with inaccessible side against wall, provide minimum clearance of 1/2 inch between switchboard and wall.

E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 260529.

F. Install switchboards plumb and level.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.

H. Install all field-installed devices, components, and accessories.

I. Provide fuses complying with Section 262813 for fusible switches as indicated.

J. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as required to complete installation.

K. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settingsas directed.

L. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settingsas directed.

M. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in switchboards.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing. Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected.

B. Before energizing switchboard, perform insulation resistance testing in accordance with NECA 400 and NEMA PB 2.1.

C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

D. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.1.

E. Fusible Switches: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section

7.5.1.1. F. Molded Case and Insulated Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers and circuit breakers larger than 200 amperes. Tests listed as optional are not required.

G. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as required by NFPA 70.

Switchboards 262413 - 10

1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.14. The insulation-resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is not required.

H. Instrument Transformers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.10. The dielectric withstand tests on primary windings with secondary windings connected to ground listed as optional are not required.

I. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.

J. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective switchboards or associated components.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

B. Adjust alignment of switchboard covers and doors.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from switchboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred surfaces to match original factory finish.

3.6 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed switchboards from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION
Panelboards 262416 - 1

PANELBOARDS

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Power distribution panelboards.

B. Lighting and appliance panelboards.

C. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; 2013e, with Amendment (2017).

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; 2015.

D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; 2011.

F. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2013.

G. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

I. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Panelboards 262416 - 2
L. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted panelboards where indicated.

4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed circuiting arrangements.

D. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

Panelboards 262416 - 3
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA 407.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of panelboards:

1. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.

B. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.

C. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.

D. Source Limitations: Provide panelboards and associated components produced by same manufacturer as other electrical distribution equipment used for project and obtained from a single supplier.

2.2 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions:

1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.

Panelboards 262416 - 4

2. Ambient Temperature:
a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

C. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

D. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.

F. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.

1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection.

2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

G. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

H. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.
b. Increase gutter space as required where sub-feed lugs, feed- through lugs, gutter taps, or oversized lugs are provided. c. Provide removable end walls for NEMA Type 1 enclosures. d. Provide painted steel boxes for surface-mounted panelboards where indicated, finish to match fronts.

3. Fronts:

Panelboards 262416 - 5
a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.
b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough opening.
c. Finish for Painted Steel Fronts: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated.

4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.

I. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.

J. Load centers are not acceptable.

2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Conductor Terminations:

1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.

2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing:

1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.

2. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

D. Circuit Breakers:

1. Provide bolt-on type.

2. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakersfor circuit breaker frame sizes less than 225 amperes.

3. Provide electronic trip circuit breakersfor circuit breaker frame sizes 225 amperes and above.

E. Enclosures:

1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosuresas indicated.

2. Fronts: Provide door-in-door trim with hinged cover for access to load terminals and wiring gutters, and separate lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts.

Panelboards 262416 - 6

3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.

B. Conductor Terminations:

1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.

2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing:

1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices.

2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.

3. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Enclosures:

1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.

3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.

2.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip- indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

2. Interrupting Capacity:
a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than:
1) 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC. 2) 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC.

Panelboards 262416 - 7
b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated.

3. Conductor Terminations:
a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.
b. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.

4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection.

5. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor- based, true rms sensing trip units.

6. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.

7. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated:
a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with UL 943, class A for protection of personnel.

8. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

9. Provide multi-pole circuit breakers for multi-wire branch circuits as required by NFPA 70.

10. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation:
a. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator.
b. Handle Pad-Lock Provision: For locking circuit breaker handle in OFF position.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

Panelboards 262416 - 8
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install panelboards in accordance with NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.

D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 260529.

F. Install panelboards plumb.

G. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered.

H. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.

I. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush- mounted panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.

J. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.

K. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.

L. Multi-Wire Branch Circuits: Group grounded and ungrounded conductors together in the panelboard as required by NFPA 70.

M. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers and circuit breakers larger than _____ amperes. Tests listed as optional are not required.

C. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.

D. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.

E. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components.

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.

3.5 CLEANING
Panelboards 262416 - 9
A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION
Low-Voltage Busways 262513 - 1

LOW-VOLTAGE BUSWAYS

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete curbs for busway floor penetrations.

B. Section 078400 - Firestopping.

C. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEC 60529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code); 1989 (Corrigendum 2019).

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

C. NECA 408 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Busways; 2015.

D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

E. NEMA BU 1.1 - General Instructions for Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Busway Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2010.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

G. UL 857 - Busways; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the arrangement of busway with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid installation of obstructions within busway required clearances.

2. Coordinate arrangement of busway with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.

4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

Low-Voltage Busways 262513 - 2

5. Where busway extends through roof, coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.

6. Notify of any conflicts with or deviations Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to performing field measurements for busway fabrication drawings; require attendance of all affected installers. Review proposed routing, sequence of installation, and protection requirements for installed busway.

C. Sequencing:

1. Perform field measurements prior to busway fabrication. Where necessary, perform field measurement for custom lengths after installation of adjacent sections.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store busway in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NECA 408, and NEMA BU 1.1.

B. Store products indoors in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent condensation (including outdoor busway, which is not weatherproof until completely and properly installed). Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle products carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within required service conditions during and after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Busway System:

Low-Voltage Busways 262513 - 3

1. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.

2. Schneider Electric: www.se.com/#sle.

3. Source Limitations: Provide busway system and associated components produced by single manufacturer and obtained from single supplier.

2.2 BUSWAY SYSTEM
A. Provide new busway system consisting of all required components, fittings, devices, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Description: Prefabricated sectionalized enclosed bus assemblies and associated fittings and devices; listed and labeled as complying with UL 857.

D. Busway General Requirements:

1. Busway Type: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated; suitable for installation in any mounting orientation the busway is designed for (e.g horizontal flatwise, horizontal edgewise, vertical) without derating.

2. Temperature Rise: Not exceeding 55 degrees C, when operating at continuous rated current in an ambient temperature of 104 degrees F.

3. Busbars and stabs to be suitably plated at all electrical contact points.

4. Busbar Insulation: NEMA Class B, rated 266 degrees F.

5. Housing: Steel or aluminum, with manufacturer's standard finish unless otherwise indicated.

6. Single-Bolt Type Joints:
a. Use torque-indicating bolts with visual indication that proper torque has been applied.
b. Bolts to be at ground potential to allow adjustment without requiring de-energizing of busway.
c. Designed such that tightening of joints only requires access to one side of busway.
d. Allows for length adjustment of plus/minus 0.125 inch.

E. Service Conditions:

1. Provide busway system and associated components suitable for operation under the following service conditions without derating:
a. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.

Low-Voltage Busways 262513 - 4
b. Ambient Temperature:
1) Busway Lengths and Fittings: Between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

2. Provide busway system and associated components suitable for operation at indicated ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.

F. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide busway system and associated components with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

2.3 FEEDER BUSWAY
A. General Requirements:

1. Outdoor Feeder Busway: Weatherproof, NEMA 250 Type 3R, with sealed joint covers and drain holes with removable plugs.

2. Indoor Feeder Busway: Standard (not splash resistant), with IEC 60529 rating of IP 40.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that the ratings of busway system components are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive busway and associated supports.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Perform insulation resistance testing on individual current-carrying busway system components prior to installation in accordance with NECA 408 and NEMA BU 1.1.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install busway in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 408, and NEMA BU 1.1.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, arrange busway to be parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

Low-Voltage Busways 262513 - 5
D. Arrange busway to provide required clearances and maintenance access.

E. Install busway plumb and level, with sections aligned and with horizontal runs at the proper elevation.

F. Maintain proper phase sequence throughout busway system, accounting for phase transitions where applicable.

G. Provide suitable expansion fittings where busway is subject to movement, including but not limited to:

1. Where busway crosses structural joints intended for expansion.

2. Long straight busway runs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Provide end closures at unconnected ends of busway runs.

I. Busway Support:

1. Use manufacturer's recommended hangers and supports, located at intervals complying with NFPA 70 and manufacturer's requirements.

Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 260529, where not furnished by busway manufacturer.

2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

3. Provide sway bracing as indicated or as required to keep busway runs straight and prevent rotation and movement, accounting for unbalanced weight distribution of plug-in units where applicable.

J. Penetrations:

1. Provide suitable flanges where busway penetrates building elements. Use weatherproof flanges for exterior wall or roof penetrations. Seal roof penetrations as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty.

2. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of building elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 078400.

3. Where busway penetrates floor, provide 4 inch high concrete curb constructed in accordance with Section 033000 around openings in accordance with NFPA 70.

K. Outdoor Feeder Busway: Arrange busway to prevent water infiltration through drain holes from rain or snow. Seal joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and remove drain hole plugs.

L. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.

1. Where integral housing ground is utilized, verify joint covers and other components required for continuity are properly installed.

Low-Voltage Busways 262513 - 6

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Electrically isolate busway system before energizing and perform insulation resistance testing in accordance with NECA 408 and NEMA BU 1.1.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective busway system components.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

B. Adjust supports as required to minimize strain on busway and associated components.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from busway enclosure and components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not use compressed air or a blower in order to prevent debris infiltration.

B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect busway system from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION
Electricity Metering 262713 - 1

ELECTRICITY METERING

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - PRODUCTS

1.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Electricity Meters:

1. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.

2. Schneider Electric: www.se.com/#sle.

3. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.new.siemens.com/#sle.

1.2 EQUIPMENT FOR OWNER ELECTRICITY METERING
A. Provide microprocessor-based digital electricity metering systems including all instrument transformers, wiring, and connections necessary for measurements specified.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Provide electricity metering systems and associated components compatible with the equipment and associated circuits to be metered.

D. Service Conditions: Provide electricity meters suitable for operation under the service conditions at the installed location.

E. Enclosures:

1. Where not furnished by manufacturer, provide required cabinets and enclosures in accordance with Section 260533.16.

2. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

F. Instrument Transformers:

1. Comply with IEEE C57.13, where applicable.

2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices.

3. Current Transformers: Compatible with connected meters; replace meters damaged by connection of incompatible current transformers.

Provide shorting terminal blocks for connection of secondaries where applicable.

Electricity Metering 262713 - 2

4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means.

1.3 SINGLE CIRCUIT ELECTRICITY METERS
A. Single Circuit Electricity Meter - Basis of Design: Veris Industries; E5x Series Enhanced Power and Energy Meter with LCD screen interface; 5-year warranty; utilizes voltage mode CTs that do not require terminal shorting blocks; compatible with solid-core, split-core, and rope CTs.

1. Accuracy:
a. Real/Active Power/Energy: Revenue grade; plus/minus 0.2 percent, complying with ANSI C12.20 accuracy and IEC 62053- 22, Class 0.2S.
b. Reactive Power/Energy: Plus/minus 2.0 percent, complying with IEC 62053-23, Class 2.

2. Measured Parameters:
a. Real/active energy (kWh); per phase and total of all phases. b. Reactive energy (kVARh) and apparent energy (kVAh); total of all phases.
c. Net present demand over a user-specified interval (block or sliding window); real/active power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), and apparent power (kVA).
d. Maximum (peak) demand intervals; real/active power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), and apparent power (kVA).
e. Real/active power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), and apparent power (kVA); per phase and total of all phases.
f. Models Available with Bi-directional Energy Measurements:
1) Real/active energy (kWh) and apparent energy (kVAh); imported (from the grid), exported (to the grid), and signed net total.
2) Reactive energy (kVARh); imported (from the grid) and exported (to the grid), per quadrant as defined by IEEE 1459.
3) Maximum demand; real/active power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), and apparent power (kVA); imported (from the
grid) and exported (to the grid).
g. Current; per phase and average of all phases.

Electricity Metering 262713 - 3
h. Voltage; line-to-line and line-to-neutral; per phase and average of all phases.
i. Power factor; per phase and average of all phases.
j. Frequency.

3. Models Available with Data Logging: Logs and retains in non-volatile memory up to 5760 measurement records at time intervals determined by Demand Interval duration setting (up to 60 days of readings at 15 minute intervals).

4. Alarm capability, with configurable setpoints.
a. Low power factor.
b. Current over range.
c. Voltage over range.
d. Frequency out of range.
e. Models available with pulse output overrun.

5. Models Available with Pulse Contact Accumulator Input(s): Up to two; user-configurable to support measurement of other related energy values (gas, water, steam, etc.) using pulse-output transducers.

6. Outputs:
a. Models Available with Phase Loss Alarm Output: One; user- configurable phase loss threshold.
b. Models Available with Pulse Output(s): Up to two.

7. Communications: Compatible with connected systems. Provide all accessories necessary for proper interface.
a. Models available with Serial Communications:
1) RS-485, 2-wire; support for Modbus RTU protocol.
2) RS-485, 2-wire; support for BACnet MS/TP protocol.
3) LON FT, 2-wire; support for LonTalk protocol.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Electricity Metering 262713 - 4
C. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 260529.

D. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.

E. Provide fuses complying with Section 262813 as required.

2.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Meters: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.11.2.

D. Instrument Transformers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.10. The dielectric withstand tests on primary windings with secondary windings connected to ground listed as optional are not required.

E. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective metering system components.

2.3 ADJUSTING
A. Program system parameters according to requirements of Owner.

2.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

2.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed system components from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION
Wiring Devices 262726 - 1

WIRING DEVICES

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall switches.

B. Receptacles.

C. Wall plates and covers.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; 2014h, with Amendments (2017).

B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification); 2014g, with Amendment (2017).

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

D. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2016.

E. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2020).

F. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2021.

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

H. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Wiring Devices 262726 - 2
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.

2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings.

4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations.

1. Wall Dimmers: Include derating information for ganged multiple devices.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.

C. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com.

D. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us

2.2 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS
Wiring Devices 262726 - 3
A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.

B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit.

C. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.

D. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.

E. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens.

F. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.

G. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices.

2.3 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES
A. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: White with white nylon wall plate.

C. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: White with white nylon wall plate.

D. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate.

E. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof cover.

2.4 WALL SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle.

3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc : www.legrand.us/#sle.

B. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.

1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

C. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

Wiring Devices 262726 - 4

2.5 RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.

3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Designer Style: www.lutron.com/#sle.

4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America,
Inc: www.legrand.us
B. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings.

1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.

C. Convenience Receptacles:

1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

2. Automatically Controlled Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; controlled receptacle marking on device face per NFPA 70; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

3. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SD suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.

D. GFCI Receptacles:

1. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed- through protection and light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complying with UL 943, class A.

2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style.

3. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SD suitable for installation in damp or wet locations.

E. Locking Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, configuration as indicated on the drawings.

Wiring Devices 262726 - 5

1. Standard Locking Convenience Receptacles: Single, 20A, 125V, NEMA L5-20R.

2. Locking Receptacles for __________: __________.

2.6 WALL PLATES AND COVERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.

3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com.

4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America,
Inc: www.legrand.us
B. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.

1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices.

2. Size: Standard.

3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.

C. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic.

D. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel.

E. Weatherproof Receptacle Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type.

F. Weatherproof Switch Covers for Wet or Damp Locations: Gasketed, metallic, with externally operable actuating means and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.

Wiring Devices 262726 - 6
E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260533.16 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section.

1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor.
b. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter.

2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated.

3. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate.

4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

5. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V.

E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long.

Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.

F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

Wiring Devices 262726 - 7
G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

H. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not use feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.

I. Where split-wired duplex receptacles are indicated, remove tabs connecting top and bottom receptacles.

J. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.

K. Install wall switches with OFF position down.

L. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left.

M. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.

N. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use.

O. Identify wiring devices in accordance with Section 260553.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.

B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized to verify proper operation.

C. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.

D. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions.

E. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION
Fuses 262813 - 1
FUSES

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fuses.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; 2012.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

C. UL 248-1 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

D. UL 248-4 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 4: Class CC Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

E. UL 248-10 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 10: Class L Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

F. UL 248-12 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 12: Class R Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

G. UL 248-15 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 15: Class T Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for compatibility with indicated fuses.

2. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for actual equipment to be installed.

3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current ratings, interrupting ratings, time-current curves, and current limitation curves.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fuses 262813 - 2
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Bussmann, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.

B. Littelfuse, Inc: www.littelfuse.com.

C. Mersen: ep-us.mersen.com.

2.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Individual Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay.

2.3 FUSES
A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required for a complete operating system.

C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch.

D. Comply with UL 248-1.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class and ratings as indicated.

F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.

G. Class R Fuses: Comply with UL 248-12.

1. Class RK1, Time-Delay Fuses:

2. Class RK1, Fast-Acting, Non-Time-Delay Fuses:

3. Class RK5, Fast-Acting, Non-Time-Delay Fuses:

H. Class L Fuses: Comply with UL 248-10.

1. Class L, Fast-Acting, Non-Time-Delay Fuses:

I. Class T Fuses: Comply with UL 248-15.

J. Class CC Fuses: Comply with UL 248-4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
Fuses 262813 - 3
A. Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for equipment.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive spare fuse cabinet.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized.

B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.

END OF SECTION
Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 1

DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Diesel engine.

2. Diesel fuel-oil system.

3. Control and monitoring.

4. Generator overcurrent and fault protection.

5. Generator, exciter, and voltage regulator.

6. Outdoor engine generator enclosure (where selected).

7. Vibration isolation devices (where applicable).

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 262313 "Paralleling Low-Voltage Switchgear" for controls and paralleling equipment for large or multiple parallel engine generators.

2. Section 263343 "Battery Chargers" for remote engine battery chargers.

3. Section 263600 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine generators.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. EPS: Emergency power supply.

B. EPSS: Emergency power supply system.

C. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

2. Include thermal damage curve for generator.

3. Include time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.

4. Include fuel consumption in gallons per hour (liters per hour) at 0.8 power factor at

0.5, 0.75, and 1.0 times generator capacity.

5. Include generator efficiency at 0.8 power factor at 0.5, 0.75, and 1.0 times generator capacity.

6. Include airflow requirements for cooling and combustion air in cubic feet per minute (cubic meters per minute) at 0.8 power factor, Provide Drawings indicating requirements and limitations for location of air intake and exhausts.

Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 2

7. Include generator characteristics, including, but not limited to, kilowatt rating, efficiency, reactances, and short-circuit current capability.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: With engine and generator mounted on rails, identify center of gravity and total weight for provided components; fuel tank, enclosure, silencer, base tank, each piece of equipment not integral to the engine generator.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Identify fluid drain ports and clearance requirements for proper fluid drain.

4. Design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

5. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights.

6. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Complete schematic, wiring, and interconnection diagrams indicating terminal markings for engine generators and functional relationship between all electrical components.

7. Rigging Information: Indicate location of each lifting attachment, generator -set center of gravity, and total package weight in submittal drawings.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for engine generator, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

B. Source Quality-Control Reports: Including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Certified summary of prototype -unit test report. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Provide the following test results:
a. Maximum Power Level
b. Maximum Motor Starting (sKVA)
c. Structural Soundness
d. Torsional Analysis
e. Transient Response
f. Alternator Temperature Rise
g. Engine Cooling Requirements (unit mounted radiator)
h. Harmonic Analysis (per IEEE-115 and ANSI-100)
i. Voltage Regulation
j. Endurance Testing

2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not identical, to those tested on prototype unit.

3. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, indicating evidence of compliance with specified requirements.

4. Report of sound generation.

5. Report of exhaust emissions indicating compliance with applicable regulations.

Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 3

6. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.

C. Field quality-control reports. Field start up report and unit in- service documentation, including load bank test results if applicable.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance and periodic testing plan in accordance with NFPA 110, Chapter 8.

B. Furnish extra materials required by local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and defined in project documents that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The generator set covered by these specifications shall be designed, tested, rated, assembled and installed in accordance with all applicable standards below:

1. CSA C22.2, No. 14-M91 Industrial Control Equipment.

2. CSA C22.2, No. 100 Motors and Generators

3. CSA 282-15

4. EN 61000-6

5. EN 55011

6. FCC Part 15 Subpart B

7. ISO 8528

8. IEC 61000

9. UL 508

10. UL 2200

11. UL 142

12. UL 6200

13. Designed to allow for installed compliance to NFPA 37, NFPA 70, NFPA 99 and NFPA 110
B. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Current certificate holder for ISO 9001 compliance.

2. The power system shall be produced by a manufacturer who has produced this type of equipment for a period of at least 25 years and who maintains a service organization of factory -authorized generator technicians available twenty -four hours a day throughout the year.

3. Manufacturing and assembly of products must be done in the United States using domestically sourced materials to the extent practical.

C. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and certified by the manufacturer on stationary power systems.

Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 4

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty: 2 Year Limited from date of Substantial Completion.

2. A Comprehensive Warranty is defined as the manufacturer covering replacement parts, labor, and limited technician travel costs for covered warranty repairs during the listed warranty period. A Limited warranty is defined as the manufacturer covering replacement parts, labor, and limited technician travel costs for the first 2 years and then replacement parts for the remainder of the listed warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Generac Power Systems, Inc.; 600 kW, 18.1L with a K0600124Y23 - 600kW alternator. The Three Phase generator shall be rated for 600 kW at 480 volts and 60 Hz, at 0.8 power factor lagging while operating at a maximum ambient temperature of 104 Fahrenheit and maximum altitude of 3500 feet above sea level without reduction in electrical output capacity. Comparable products by one of the following will also be considered:

1. Caterpillar, Inc.

2. Cummins Power Generation.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged engine generators and auxiliary components from single source from single manufacturer. "Source Limitations: Obtain packaged engine generators and auxiliary components from single supplier. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of NEC and all applicable local codes and regulations. All equipment shall be new, of current production. There shall be one source responsibility for warranty; parts and service through a local representative with factory certified service personnel.

C. Requests for substitutions shall be made a minimum of ten (10) days prior to bid date.

Manufacturers catalog data and a completed generator sizing model using the proposed manufacturer's generator sizing software shall accompany each request and authorized acceptance shall be addenda only. Should any substitutions be made, the contractor shall bear responsibility for the installation, coordination and operation of the system as well as any engineering and redesign costs, which may result from such substitutions.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. NFPA Compliance:

1. Comply with NFPA 37.

2. Comply with NFPA 70.

3. Comply with NFPA 99.

4. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 EPSS.

B. UL Compliance: Engine generator assembly and factory enclosure (if provided) shall be UL 2200 listed.

Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 5
C. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable US EPA, State and Local Government requirements. Diesel Stationary Emergency: Engines shall be certified by the manufacturer to comply with 40 CFR Part 60 Subpart IIII.

2.3 ENGINE GENERATOR ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Factory-assembled and - tested, water -cooled engine, with brushless generator and accessories.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

C. Power Rating: Standby.

D. Service Load: The generator set shall be a Generac model 600 kW, 18.1L with a K0600124Y23 - 600kW alternator. It shall provide 600 kW and 750 kVA while operating at the maximum ambient operating temperature and elevation specified in the project documents.

E. Power Factor: 0.8 lagging.

F. Frequency: 60 Hz.

G. Voltage: 480 Volts ac.

H. Phase: Three Phase, Three Wire.

I. Induction Method: Turbocharged.

J. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.

K. Mounting Frame: Structural steel framework to maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation. Provide lifting attachments sized and spaced to prevent deflection of base during lifting and moving.

L. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer’s name, model and serial number of component.

1. Coordinate "Capacities and Characteristics" Paragraph below with prototype test requirements in "Informational Submittals" and "Source Quality Control" articles.

M. Engine Generator Performance:

1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load.

2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10.21 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease at unity power factor. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.

3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.

4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady- state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 6

5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 3.5 Hertz variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease at unity power factor. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds.

6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics.

Telephone influence factor, determined in accordance with NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a three-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full -load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components.

8. Start time to comply with NFPA system requirements.

2.4 ENGINE PERFORMANCE
A. Fuel: ASTM D975, diesel fuel oil, Grade 2-D S15. Engine shall be capable of operating on hydrotreated vegetable oil blends (up to HVO 100) conforming to the EN 15940 specification without modification.

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

C. Lubrication System to be engine mounted.

1. Oil filter shall be engine- mounted replaceable cartridge type with integral bypass valve, in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

D. Jacket Coolant Heater: Jacket water heater shall be sized per NFPA110 and UL listed to ensure that genset will start within the specified time period and ambient conditions.

E. Integral Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine generator set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.

1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene- glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gauge glass and petcock.

3. Temperature Control: Self -contained, thermostatic -control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

4. Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature on Radiator: 122 degrees F (50 degrees C).

5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, UV-, and abrasion-resistant fabric. a. Rating: 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F (82 deg C), and noncollapsible under vacuum.
b. Meets SAE 100R1A Type S, EN853 1SN, ISO 1436-1 Type 1SN c. a Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections.

Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 7
F. Muffler/Silencer:

1. Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.

G. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy duty, engine -mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry -filter element and "blocked filter" indicator.

H. Starting System: 12 or 24-V electric, with negative ground.

1. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified.

2. Battery: Lead acid, with capacity within ambient temperature range specified in "Performance Requirements" Article to provide specified cranking cycle as required by NFPA 110 for system level specified.

3. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid- state voltage regulation and 35 minimum continuous rating.

4. Battery Charger: Current -limiting, automatic -equalizing, and float -charging type designed for lead- acid batteries. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and NFPA 110 Section 5.6.4.6 for Level 1 systems.:

2.5 FUEL SYSTEM – DIESEL
A. Comply with NFPA 37.

B. Piping: Fuel-oil piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel, complying with requirements in Section 231113 "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping." Cast iron, aluminum, copper, and galvanized steel shall not be used in the fuel-oil system.

C. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine to provide primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions.

D. Fuel Filtering: Remove water and contaminants larger than 2 microns.

E. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source.

F. Subbase-Mounted, Double-Wall, Fuel-Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel-oil tank. Features include the following:

1. Tank level indicator.

2. Fuel-Tank Capacity: Sized for 48 running hours at 100% of rated generator load between fuel refills.

3. Leak detection in interstitial space.

4. Vandal-resistant fill cap.

5. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Secondary containment basin, sized at a minimum of 110% of the tank capacity to prevent escape of fuel into the environment in the event of a primary tank rupture.

6. Normal and emergency vents on the main tank and secondary containment space, sized according to UL 142.

7. Fuel Spill Containment : The fuel tank shall have a containment basin/container installed at the primary fuel inlet to the fuel tank.

8. Overfill Prevention: At the primary fuel inlet, a fuel overfill prevention valve shall be installed. It will prevent the tank from filling past 95% of fuel tank capacity.

Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 8

9. Extended Tank Venting: The fuel tank normal vent shall be extended 12 ft. above adjacent grade.

2.6 CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode- selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of engine generator. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, engine generator starts. The off position of same switch initiates engine generator shutdown. When engine generator is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down engine generator and initiate alarms.

B. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on- off switch on the generator control panel to the on position starts engine generator. The off position of same switch initiates engine generator shutdown. When engine generator is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down engine generator and initiate alarms.

C. Provide minimum run time control set for 15 minutes with override only by operation of a remote emergency-stop switch.

D. Control panel must comply with UL 6200. The controller shall meet ASTM B117 (salt spray test).

E. Connection to Building Management: Provide connections for data transmission of indications to remote data terminals via Modbus.

F. Environmentally Hardened Design: Open circuit boards, edge cards, and PC ribbon cable connections are unacceptable.

G. PCB Construction: Circuit boards with surface-mounted components to provide vibration durability. Circuit boards utilizing large capacitors or heat sinks must utilize encapsulation methods to securely support these components.

H. Configuration:

1. Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gauges shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the engine generator. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from engine generator vibration. Panel powered from the engine generator battery.

I. Control and Monitoring Panel:

1. Digital engine generator controller with integrated touch screen, controls, and microprocessor, capable of local and remote control, monitoring, and programming, with battery backup.

2. Instruments: Located on the control and monitoring panel and viewable during operation.
a. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gauge.
b. Engine-coolant temperature gauge.
c. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
d. Running-time meter.
e. AC voltmeter, for each phase.

Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 9
f. AC ammeter, for each phase.
g. AC frequency meter.
h. Generator-voltage adjusting feature.

3. Controls and Protective Devices: Controls, shutdown devices, and common alarm indication, including the following:
a. Cranking control equipment.
b. Run-Off-Auto switch.
c. Control switch not in automatic position alarm.
d. Overcrank alarm.
e. Overcrank shutdown device.
f. Low-water temperature alarm.
g. High engine temperature pre-alarm.
h. High engine temperature.
i. High engine temperature shutdown device.
j. Overspeed alarm.
k. Overspeed shutdown device.
l. Low fuel main tank.
1) Low-fuel-level alarm shall be initiated when the level falls below that required for operation for duration required for the indicated EPSS class.
m. Coolant low-level alarm.
n. Coolant low-level shutdown device.
o. Coolant high-temperature prealarm.
p. Coolant high-temperature alarm.
q. Coolant low-temperature alarm.
r. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device.
s. EPS load indicator.
t. Battery high-voltage alarm.
u. Low cranking voltage alarm.
v. Battery-charger malfunction alarm.
w. Battery low-voltage alarm.
x. Lamp test.
y. Contacts for local and remote common alarm.
z. Remote manual stop shutdown device.
aa. Total engine run hours, non-resettable.
bb. Engine generator metering, including voltage, current, hertz, kilowatt, kilovolt ampere, and power factor.

J. Engine Generator Metering: Comply with [Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."] [Section 262713 "Electricity Metering."] [Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" and Section 262713 "Electricity Metering."] K. External Alarm & Status Relays: Provide a separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C dry contacts, for each alarm and status condition required by Building Management or other external systems as shown on electrical drawings.

L. Common Remote Panel with Common Audible Alarm: Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel. Remote panel shall be powered from the engine generator battery.

M. Remote Alarm Annunciator: An LED indicator light labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event, and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 10
condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface - or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.

1. Overcrank alarm.

2. Low water-temperature alarm.

3. High engine temperature pre-alarm.

4. High engine temperature alarm.

5. Low lube oil pressure alarm.

6. Overspeed alarm.

7. Low fuel main tank alarm.

8. Low coolant level alarm.

9. Low cranking voltage alarm.

10. Contacts for local and remote common alarm.

11. Audible-alarm silencing switch.

12. Air shutdown damper when used.

13. Run-Off-Auto switch.

14. Control switch not in automatic position alarm.

15. Fuel tank derangement alarm.

16. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm.

17. Lamp test.

18. Low-cranking voltage alarm.

19. Generator overcurrent-protective-device not-closed alarm.

N. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Provide remote emergency stop switch in quantity and style as shown on electrical drawings. Electrical contractor to coordinate exact location with engineer and local AHJ.

O. Data Logging:

1. Event Logging – the controller keeps a record of up to 8,000 events with date and time locally for warning and shutdown faults. This event log can be downloaded onto a USB storage device or onto a PC through the service program.

2. Event Snapshot – the control system shall capture 15 seconds of critical data around the time a fault or warning. This data shall be viewable on the controller and downloadable.

3. Data Logging – the controller shall allow customized parameters to be logged based on a start trigger from the controller interface. a. The parameters are selectable from all monitored parameters. b. The sample period shall be configurable from 1 second to 1 day. c. The collected data shall be stored on a USB storage device plugged into the control panel.

2.7 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A. Overcurrent protective devices shall be coordinated to optimize selective tripping when a short circuit occurs.

1. Overcurrent protective devices for the entire EPSS shall be coordinated to optimize selective tripping when a short circuit occurs. Coordination of protective devices shall consider both utility and EPSS as the voltage source.

Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 11

2. Overcurrent protective devices for the EPSS shall be accessible only to authorized personnel.

B. Generator Overcurrent Protective Device:

1. Unit mounted circuit breakers. Rating, ampacity, accessories, as shown on drawings or as listed below:

2. Molded-case circuit breaker, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with UL 489:
a. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long- time and short -time delay and instantaneous.
b. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve. c. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when engine generator is shut down by other protective devices.
d. Mounting: Adjacent to, or integrated with, control and monitoring panel.

C. Generator Controller Integrated Alternator Protective Functions:

1. Short-time I^2t function : Generator controller -based function shall continuously monitor current level in each phase of alternator output, integrate alternator heating effect over time, and predict when thermal damage of alternator will occur. As overcurrent heating effect on the alternator approaches the thermal damage point of the unit, protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect device, and shuts down the engine generator. When signaled by generator protector or other engine generator protective devices, a shunt-trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits.

2. Long-time function: Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds.

Indication for this alarm is integrated with other engine generator malfunction alarms. Contacts shall be available for load shed functions.

3. Short-circuit fault clearing: Under single- or three -phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percent of rated full-load current for up to 10 seconds.

4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot.

2.8 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.

C. Electrical Insulation: Class H.

D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required.

E. Range: Provide range of output voltage by adjusting the excitation level.

F. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity. Stator shall be skewed construction to minimize harmonic voltage distortion.

Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 12
G. Enclosure: Drip proof.

H. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.

I. Voltage Regulator:

1. Voltage Regulator: Solid- state type, separate from exciter. The digital voltage regulator shall be microprocessor based with fully programmable operating and protection characteristics. The regulator shall maintain steady -state generator output voltage within +/- 0.25% for any constant load between no load and full load.

The regulator shall be capable of sensing true RMS. The regulator shall provide an adjustable Volts/Hz slope regulation characteristic in order to optimize voltage and frequency response for site conditions.

2. Alternator Excitation: Permanent Magnet Generator (PMG) shall provide excitation power for optimum motor starting and short circuit performance.

3. The generator must accept rated load in one-step.

4. System Transient Voltage Performance: Alternator shall be capable of supplying 1610 sKVA with a voltage dip not more than 35% at 0.3 starting power factor.

Sustained voltage dip data or manufacturer -published SKVA numbers based on unity PF alternator-only dynamometer testing will not be accepted.

J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

2.9 OUTDOOR ENGINE GENERATOR ENCLOSURE
A. Basis of design is a Sound Level 2.

B. Generator packaged within manufacturer's weather protective, sound attenuated enclosure. Enclosure and generator set shall be UL 2200 Listed as a system.

C. Enclosure Construction: Minimum 14 gauge construction. Roof construction shall be raised-seam, gasket -free interlocking panels. Rivets shall not be used on external painted surfaces. Design shall be rodent resistant.

D. Doors shall be equipped with lift -off pin and sleeve type hinges to allow access to the engine, alternator, and control panel. Hinges shall be adjustable for door alignment.

Hinges and all exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel. Each door shall be equi pped with minimum 2 -point latching mechanism and identical keys. Perimeter of all door openings shall include polyethylene gasket.

E. Upward discharging exhaust hood for engine cooling airflow and exhaust.

F. Engine exhaust silencer mounted within enclosure discharge hood.

G. Enclosure Finish: Electrostatic applied powered paint, baked and finished to manufacturer's specifications. Finish system shall be subjected to the following tests:

1. ASTM D1186 - 87; 2.5+ mil Paint Thickness

2. ASTM D3363 - 92a; Material Hardness

3. ASTM D522 - B; Resistance to Cracking

4. ASTM D3359 - B; Adhesion

5. ASTM B117 D 1654; Resistant to Salt Water Corrosion

6. ASTM D1735 D 1654; Resistant to Humidity

7. ASTM 2794 93 (2004); Impact Resistance

8. SAE J1690 - UV Protection"
Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 13
H. Enclosure Color: Manufacturer's standard color, or custom color matched based on architect's design with color sample provided to generator manufacturer.

I. Wind Rating: Enclosure shall be constructed to attain basic wind speed rating of 110 MPH; WIF 1.15, Exposure Category "C", Building Classification "Enclosed", Topographic Factor Kzt = 1. Wind Design Pressures: windward, 20.6 lb/ft^2; leeward, -12.9 lb/ft^2; roof, -18.0 lb/ft^2."
J. Snow Load Rating: Minimum 70 pounds per square foot.

K. Engine-Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for two hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.

L. Sound Insulation: Enclosure and air discharge hood completely lined with reflective silver mylar faced sound attenuating closed cell foam that meets UL 94 HF1 standards for flammability (FMVSS 302 test method). Roof sound insulation panels shall include additional mechanical retention.

M. Sound Performance: The engine generator, while operating at full rated load, shall not exceed 75.00 dBA average measured at 23 ft (7 meters) from the engine generator in a free field environment.

N. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Stormproof and drainable louvers prevent entry of rain and snow.

O. Convenience Outlet: Factory -wired convenience 120v duplex -outlet within enclosure, GFCI.

2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES
A. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil - and water -resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cu t to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment for units with a ratings 750kw or below.

1. Material: Standard neoprene separated by steel shims.

B. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint for units with a rating larger than 750kw.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory -drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment -mounting and - leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load.

4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 14

5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.

6. Minimum Deflection: 0.5.

C. Vibration isolation devices shall not be used to accommodate misalignments or to make bends.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine generator using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.

1. Tests: Comply with IEEE 115 and with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters.

B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine generator and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project.

Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:

1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.

2. Test generator, exciter, and voltage regulator as a unit.

3. Full load run.

4. Maximum power.

5. Voltage regulation.

6. Transient and steady-state governing.

7. Single-step load pickup.

8. Safety shutdowns.

9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.

2.12 FINISHES
A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine generator performance.

B. Examine roughing- in for piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine generator installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 15
only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service in accordance with requirements indicated:

1. Notify Project Manager in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without written permission.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 404.

B. Comply with packaged engine generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.

C. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install packaged engine generators on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases or steel dunnage as indicated on drawings.

2. Coordinate size and location of mounting bases for packaged engine generators.

3. Install unit with vibration isolation devices described in section 2.11.

D. Tests and Inspections: The supplier of the electric generating plant and associated items covered herein shall provide factory certified technicians to inspect the completed installation and to perform an initial startup inspection to include:

1. Ensuring the engine starts (both hot and cold) within the specified time.

2. Verification of engine parameters within specification.

3. Verify no load frequency and voltage, adjusting if required.

4. Test all automatic shutdowns of the engine-generator.

5. Perform a load test of the electric plant, ensuring full load frequency and voltage are within specification by using building load.

E. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here, including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.

F. Battery and Charger Tests:

1. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions.

2. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications." G. System Integrity Tests: Verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

H. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

I. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation for generator and associated equipment.

J. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

K. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest and reinspect as specified above.

Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 16
L. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations, and retest until specified requirements are met.

M. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections: The supplier of the electric generating plant and associated items covered herein shall provide factory certified technicians to inspect the completed installation and to perform an initial startup inspection to include:

1. Ensuring the engine starts (both hot and cold) within the specified time.

2. Verification of engine parameters within specification.

3. Verify no load frequency and voltage, adjusting if required.

4. Test all automatic shutdowns of the engine-generator.

5. Perform a load test of the electric plant, ensuring full load frequency and voltage are within specification by using building load.

B. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here, including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.

C. Battery and Charger Tests:

1. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions.

2. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications." D. System Integrity Tests: Verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

E. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation for generator and associated equipment.

G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest and reinspect as specified above.

I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations, and retest until specified requirements are met.

J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations.

Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator sets 263213 - 17

3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Repair Service Capabilities:

1. The generator set supplier shall maintain service parts inventory for the entire power system at a central location which is accessible to the service location 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. The manufacturer of the generator set shall maintain a cent ral parts inventory to support the supplier, covering all the major components of the power system, including: engines, alternators, control systems, paralleling electronics, and power transfer equipment.

2. The generator set shall be serviced by a local service organization that is trained and factory certified in generator set service. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of power system replacement parts in the local service location. Service vehicles shall be stocked with critical replacement parts. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per year. The service organization shall be physically located within 50 miles of the site.

3. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records of each generator set provided for at least 20 years.

B. Preventative Maintenance Service Agreement: The supplier shall include as a line item adder in the proposal, a one- year maintenance service agreement. The maintenance shall be performed by factory authorized service technicians capable of servicing both the engine generator set(s) and the transfer switch(es). This agreement shall include semi-annual preventative maintenance visits to verify operation and/or complete the following:

1. All periodic engine maintenance as recommended by the service manual.

2. All electrical controls maintenance and calibrations as recommended by the manufacturer.

3. All auxiliary equipment as a part of the emergency systems.

4. The supplier shall guarantee emergency service.

5. All expendable maintenance items are to be included in this agreement.

6. A copy of this agreement and a schedule shall be provided in the submittal documents, detailing scope of work and preventative maintenance service visit interval.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators.

END OF SECTION

Engine Generators 263213 - 1

ENGINE GENERATORS

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Packaged engine generator system and associated components and accessories:

1. Engine and engine accessory equipment.

2. Alternator (generator).

3. Generator set control system.

4. Generator set enclosure.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 231113 - Facility Fuel-Oil Piping:

1. Diesel fuel piping.

C. Section 235100 - Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks: Engine exhaust piping.

D. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

E. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

F. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

G. Section 263600 - Transfer Switches.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D975 - Standard Specification for Diesel Fuel; 2023a.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

C. NECA/EGSA 404 - Standard for Installing Generator Sets; 2014.

D. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2021.

E. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code; 2024.

F. NFPA 37 - Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines; 2021.

G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

Engine Generators 263213 - 2
H. NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities Code; 2021, with Amendment.

I. NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems; 2022.

J. UL 142 - Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

K. UL 1236 - Battery Chargers for Charging Engine-Starter Batteries; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 2200 - Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate compatibility of generator sets to be installed with work provided under other sections or by others.
a. Transfer Switches: See Section 263600.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment or other potential obstructions within the spaces dedicated for engine generator system.

3. Coordinate arrangement of equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

4. Coordinate the work to provide electrical circuits suitable for the power requirements of the actual auxiliary equipment and accessories to be installed.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section; require attendance of all affected installers.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Manufacturer's factory emissions certification.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following:

1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).

2. NFPA 37 (Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines).

3. NFPA 30 (Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code).

Engine Generators 263213 - 3
B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store generator sets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA/EGSA 404.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage to generator set components, enclosure, and finish.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Packaged Engine Generator Set:

1. Generac Power Systems;
_______: www.generac.com/industrial/#sle.Generac Power Systems; _______: www.generac.com/industrial/#sle.Generac Power Systems; _______: www.generac.com/industrial/#sle.

2.2 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM
A. Provide new engine generator system consisting of all required equipment, sensors, conduit, boxes, wiring, piping, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system that provides the functional intent indicated.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. System Description:

1. Application: Emergency/standby.

2. Configuration: Single packaged engine generator set operated independently (not in parallel).

D. Packaged Engine Generator Set:

1. Type: Diesel (compression ignition).

2. Power Rating: _____ kW, standby.

Engine Generators 263213 - 4

3. Voltage: As indicated on drawings.

4. Main Line Circuit Breaker:
a. Type: Thermal magnetic.
b. Trip Rating: Select according to generator set rating.

E. Generator Set General Requirements:

1. Prototype tested in accordance with NFPA 110 for Level 1 systems.

2. Factory-assembled, with components mounted on suitable base.

3. List and label engine generator assembly as complying with UL 2200.

4. Power Factor: Unless otherwise indicated, specified power ratings are at

0.8 power factor for three phase voltages and 1.0 power factor for single phase voltages.

5. Provide suitable guards to protect personnel from accidental contact with rotating parts, hot piping, and other potential sources of injury.

6. Main Line Circuit Breakers: Provide factory-installed line side connections with suitable lugs for load side connections.

F. Service Conditions: Provide engine generator system and associated components suitable for operation under the service conditions at the installed location.

G. Starting and Load Acceptance Requirements:

1. Cranking Method: Cycle cranking complying with NFPA 110 (15 second crank period, followed by 15 second rest period, with cranking limiter time-out after 3 cycles), unless otherwise required.

2. Cranking Limiter Time-Out: If generator set fails to start after specified cranking period, indicate overcrank alarm condition and lock-out generator set from further cranking until manually reset.

3. Start Time: Capable of starting and achieving conditions necessary for load acceptance within 10 seconds (NFPA 110, Type 10).

4. Maximum Load Step: Supports 100 percent of rated load in one step.

H. Exhaust Emissions Requirements:

1. Comply with federal (EPA), state, and local regulations applicable at the time of commissioning; include factory emissions certification with submittals.

2. Do not make modifications affecting generator set factory emissions certification without approval of manufacturer and Engineer. Where such Engine Generators 263213 - 5
modifications are made, provide field emissions testing as necessary for certification.

2.3 ENGINE AND ENGINE ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
A. Provide engine with adequate horsepower to achieve specified power output at rated speed, accounting for alternator efficiency and parasitic loads.

B. Engine Fuel System - Diesel (Compression Ignition):

1. Fuel Source: Diesel, ASTM D975 No. 2-D or approved cold weather diesel blends.

2. Fuel Storage: Sub-base fuel tank.

3. Engine Fuel Supply: Provide engine-driven, positive displacement fuel pump with replaceable fuel filter(s), water separator, check valve to secure prime, manual fuel priming pump, and relief-bypass valve. Provide fuel cooler where recommended by manufacturer.

4. Engine Fuel Connections: Provide suitable, approved flexible fuel lines for coupling engine to fuel source.

5. Sub-Base Fuel Tank:
a. Provide sub-base mounted, double-wall fuel tank with secondary containment; listed and labeled as complying with UL 142. b. Tank Capacity: Size for minimum of 24 hours of continuous engine generator operation at 100 percent rated load, but not larger than permissible by applicable codes.
c. Features:
1) Direct reading fuel level gauge.
2) Normal atmospheric vent.
3) Emergency pressure relief vent.
4) Fuel fill opening with lockable cap.
5) Dedicated electrical conduit stub-up area.

C. Engine Starting System:

1. System Type: Electric, with DC solenoid-activated starting motor(s).

2. Battery(s):
a. Battery Type: Lead-acid.
b. Battery Capacity: Size according to manufacturer's
recommendations for achieving starting and load acceptance requirements under worst case ambient temperature; capable of Engine Generators 263213 - 6
providing cranking through two complete periods of cranking limiter time-outs without recharging.
c. Provide battery rack, cables, and connectors suitable for the supplied battery(s); size battery cables according to
manufacturer's recommendations for cable length to be installed.

3. Battery-Charging Alternator: Engine-driven, with integral solid-state voltage regulation.

4. Battery Charger:
a. Provide dual rate battery charger with automatic float and equalize charging modes and minimum rating of 10 amps; suitable for maintaining the supplied battery(s) at full charge without manual intervention.
b. Capable of returning supplied battery(s) from fully discharged to fully charged condition within 24 hours, as required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 applications while carrying normal loads.
c. Recognized as complying with UL 1236.
d. Furnished with integral overcurrent protection; current limited to protect charger during engine cranking; reverse polarity protection.
e. Provide integral DC output ammeter and voltmeter with five percent accuracy.
f. Provide alarm output contacts as necessary for alarm indications.

D. Engine Speed Control System (Governor):

1. Single Engine Generator Sets (Not Operated in Parallel): Provide electronic isochronous governor for controlling engine speed/alternator frequency.

2. Frequency Regulation, Electronic Isochronous Governors: No change in frequency from no load to full load; plus/minus 0.25 percent at steady state.

E. Engine Lubrication System:

1. System Type: Full pressure, with engine-driven, positive displacement lubrication oil pump, replaceable full-flow oil filter(s), and dip-stick for oil level indication. Provide oil cooler where recommended by manufacturer.

F. Engine Cooling System:

1. System Type: Closed-loop, liquid-cooled, with unit-mounted radiator/fan and engine-driven coolant pump; suitable for providing adequate cooling while operating at full load under worst case ambient temperature.

Engine Generators 263213 - 7

2. Fan Guard: Provide suitable guard to protect personnel from accidental contact with fan.

G. Engine Air Intake and Exhaust System:

1. Air Intake Filtration: Provide engine-mounted, replaceable, dry element filter.

2. Engine Exhaust Connection: Provide suitable, approved flexible connector for coupling engine to exhaust system.

2.4 ALTERNATOR (GENERATOR)
A. Alternator: 4-pole, 1800 rpm (60 Hz output) revolving field, synchronous generator complying with NEMA MG 1; connected to engine with flexible coupling; voltage output configuration as indicated, with reconnectable leads for 3 phase alternators.

B. Exciter:

1. Exciter Type: Brushless; provide permanent magnet generator (PMG) excitation system; self-excited (shunt) systems are not permitted.

2. PMG Excitation Short-Circuit Current Support: Capable of sustaining 300 percent of rated output current for 10 seconds.

3. Voltage Regulation (with PMG excitation): Plus/minus 0.5 percent for any constant load from no load to full load.

C. Temperature Rise: Comply with UL 2200.

D. Insulation System: NEMA MG 1, Class H; suitable for alternator temperature rise.

E. Enclosure: NEMA MG 1, drip-proof.

F. Total Harmonic Distortion: Not greater than five percent.

2.5 GENERATOR SET CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Provide microprocessor-based control system for automatic control, monitoring, and protection of generator set. Include sensors, wiring, and connections necessary for functions/indications specified.

B. Control Panel:

1. Control Panel Mounting: Unit-mounted unless otherwise indicated; vibration isolated.

2. Generator Set Control Functions:
a. Automatic Mode: Initiates generator set start/shutdown upon receiving corresponding signal from remote device (e.g. automatic transfer switch).

Engine Generators 263213 - 8
b. Manual Mode: Initiates generator set start/shutdown upon direction from operator.
c. Reset Mode: Clears all faults, allowing generator set restart after a shutdown.
d. Emergency Stop: Immediately shuts down generator set (without time delay) and prevents automatic restarting until manually reset. e. Cycle Cranking: Programmable crank time, rest time, and number of cycles.
f. Time Delay: Programmable for shutdown (engine cooldown) and start (engine warmup).
g. Voltage Adjustment: Adjustable through range of plus/minus 5 percent.

3. Generator Set Status Indications:
a. Voltage (Volts AC): Line-to-line, line-to-neutral for each phase. b. Current (Amps): For each phase.
c. Frequency (Hz).
d. Real power (W/kW).
e. Reactive power (VAR/kVAR).
f. Apparent power (VA/kVA).
g. Power factor.
h. Duty Level: Actual load as percentage of rated power. i. Engine speed (RPM).
j. Battery voltage (Volts DC).
k. Engine oil pressure.
l. Engine coolant temperature.
m. Engine run time.
n. Generator powering load (position signal from transfer switch).

4. Generator Set Protection and Warning/Shutdown Indications:
a. Comply with NFPA 110; configurable for NFPA 110 Level 1 or Level 2, or NFPA 99 systems including but not limited to the following protections/indications:
1) Overcrank (shutdown).

Engine Generators 263213 - 9
2) Low coolant temperature (warning).
3) High coolant temperature (warning).
4) High coolant temperature (shutdown).
5) Low oil pressure (shutdown).
6) Overspeed (shutdown).
7) Low fuel level (warning).
8) Low coolant level (warning/shutdown).
9) Generator control not in automatic mode (warning).
10) High battery voltage (warning).
11) Low cranking voltage (warning).
12) Low battery voltage (warning).
13) Battery charger failure (warning).
b. In addition to NFPA 110 requirements, provide the following protections/indications:
1) High AC voltage (shutdown).
2) Low AC voltage (shutdown).
3) High frequency (shutdown).
4) Low frequency (shutdown).
5) Overcurrent (shutdown).
c. Provide contacts for local and remote common alarm.
d. Provide lamp test function that illuminates all indicator lamps.

5. Other Control Panel Features:
a. Event log.

C. Remote Annunciator:

1. Remote Annunciator Mounting: Wall-mounted; Provide flush-mounted annunciator for finished areas and surface-mounted annunciator for non- finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

2. Generator Set Status Indications:
a. Generator powering load (via position signal from transfer switch). b. Communication functional.

Engine Generators 263213 - 10

3. Generator Set Warning/Shutdown Indications:
a. Comply with NFPA 110; configurable for NFPA 110 Level 1 or Level 2, or NFPA 99 systems including but not limited to the following indications:
1) Overcrank (shutdown).
2) Low coolant temperature (warning).
3) High coolant temperature (warning).
4) High coolant temperature (shutdown).
5) Low oil pressure (shutdown).
6) Overspeed (shutdown).
7) Low fuel level (warning).
8) Low coolant level (warning/shutdown).
9) Generator control not in automatic mode (warning).
10) High battery voltage (warning).
11) Low cranking voltage (warning).
12) Low battery voltage (warning).
13) Battery charger failure (warning).
b. Provide audible alarm with silence function.
c. Provide lamp test function that illuminates all indicator lamps.

2.6 GENERATOR SET ENCLOSURE
A. Enclosure Type: Sound attenuating, weather protective.

B. Enclosure Material: Steel or aluminum.

C. Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

D. Color: Manufacturer's standard.

E. Access Doors: Lockable, with all locks keyed alike.

F. Openings: Designed to prevent bird/rodent entry.

G. External Drains: Extend oil and coolant drain lines to exterior of enclosure for maintenance service.

H. Sound Attenuating Enclosures: Line enclosure with non-hydroscopic, self- extinguishing sound-attenuating material.

Engine Generators 263213 - 11
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of generator sets and auxiliary equipment are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that rough-ins for field connections are in the proper locations.

D. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive equipment.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install generator sets and associated accessories in accordance with NECA/EGSA 404.

D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, mount generator set on properly sized, minimum 6 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 033000.

F. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 260529.

G. Use manufacturer's recommended oil and coolant, suitable for the worst case ambient temperatures.

H. Provide diesel fuel piping and venting in accordance with Section 231113, where not factory installed.

I. Provide engine exhaust piping in accordance with Section 235100, where not factory installed.

1. Include piping expansion joints, piping insulation, thimble, condensation trap/drain, rain cap, hangers/supports, etc. as indicated or as required.

2. Do not exceed manufacturer's maximum back pressure requirements.

J. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.

K. Identify system wiring and components in accordance with Section 260553.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

Engine Generators 263213 - 12
B. Notify Owner and Architect at least two weeks prior to scheduled inspections and tests.

C. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel.

D. Provide all equipment, tools, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing, including load bank and fuel.

E. Preliminary inspection and testing to include, at a minimum:

1. Inspect each system component for damage and defects.

2. Verify tightness of mechanical and electrical connections are according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

3. Check for proper oil and coolant levels.

F. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

G. Perform acceptance test in accordance with NFPA 110.

H. Provide field emissions testing where necessary for certification.

I. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with Contract Documents.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed engine generator system from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION
Central Battery Equipment 263323 - 1

CENTRAL BATTERY EQUIPMENT

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Standard-transfer interruptible power supply (IPS) centralized emergency lighting inverters.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEEE C62.41.2 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (Corrigendum 2012).

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

C. NECA 416 - Recommended Practice for Installing Energy Storage Systems (ESS); 2016.

D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

E. NETA ATS - Standard For Acceptance Testing Specifications For Electrical Power Equipment And Systems; 2021.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

H. NFPA 111 - Standard on Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power Systems; 2022.

I. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

J. UL 2043 - Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate compatibility of centralized emergency lighting inverters to be installed with work provided under other sections or by others.

Central Battery Equipment 263323 - 2

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances required by NFPA 70.

3. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

4. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following:

1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).

2. NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code).

3. NFPA 111; meet requirements for Level 1 system.

B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage to inverter system components, enclosure, and finish.

D. Do not exceed maximum ambient temperature requirements for batteries at any time, which reduces battery service life. Replace batteries exposed to temperatures in excess of manufacturer's requirements.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CENTRALIZED EMERGENCY LIGHTING INVERTERS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide complete centralized emergency lighting inverter system consisting of all required equipment, conduit, boxes, wiring, supports, accessories, system Central Battery Equipment 263323 - 3
programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system that provides the functional intent indicated.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Inverter Assemblies: Manufactured units consisting of inverters, batteries, enclosures, and associated components specifically designed for emergency lighting applications; microprocessor-based utilizing pulse width modulation (PWM) with insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT's); listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.

1. Battery Run Times of 90 Minutes: Listed as complying with UL 924 for "emergency lighting and power equipment".

2. Battery Run Times Other than 90 Minutes: Listed as complying with UL 924 for "auxiliary lighting and power equipment".

D. Provide inverters and associated components suitable for operation at indicated ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.

E. Increase indicated power ratings as required to accommodate any applicable inverter load restrictions.

F. Inverters Installed in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: Plenum rated; listed and labeled as complying with UL 2043, suitable for use in air-handling spaces.

G. Battery System:

1. Provide battery capacity as required for achieving battery run time indicated.

2. Battery Charger: Microprocessor-controlled, temperature compensated; capable of returning supplied battery(s) from fully discharged to fully charged condition within time required by NFPA 111 and UL 924 unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide automatic low voltage battery disconnect to prevent battery "deep discharge" damage.

H. Enclosures:

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:
a. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R or Type 4.

2. Hinged Doors: Lockable, with all locks keyed alike.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

Central Battery Equipment 263323 - 4
I. Short Circuit Current Rating: Provide inverter assemblies with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.

J. Surge Tolerance: Capable of withstanding characteristic surges according to IEEE C62.41.2, location category B.

K. Automatic Sequence of Operations:

1. Upon failure or degradation of primary/normal input power, transfer load to battery power.

2. When primary/normal input power has been restored, retransfer load to primary/normal power and recharge battery.

L. Features (Units 500 VA and Larger):

1. Control Functions:
a. Automatic mode.
b. Manual Test Mode: Simulates failure of primary/normal source. c. Automatic Shutdown Mode (IPS Inverters Only): Upon applicable inverter circuit trouble/fault unit shuts down.
d. Self-testing/self-diagnostics.

2. Status Indications:
a. Connected to primary/normal source.
b. Connected to battery power.
c. Primary/normal source available.
d. Battery charging.

3. Alarm Indications:
a. Output overload/overcurrent.
b. High temperature.
c. Low battery.

4. Other Features:
a. Input circuit breaker.
b. Event log.

2.2 STANDARD-TRANSFER INTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (IPS) CENTRALIZED

EMERGENCY LIGHTING INVERTERS
A. Manufacturers:

Central Battery Equipment 263323 - 5

1. Acuity Brands, Inc; __________: www.acuitybrands.com/#sle.

B. Description: Offline/standby type inverters with maximum 50 ms transfer time to battery power source upon loss of normal power source; suitable for operation of incandescent, LED, and fluorescent light sources (not suitable for HID light sources).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of inverter assemblies are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that rough-ins for field connections are in the proper locations.

D. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive inverter assemblies.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

B. Install inverter assemblies in accordance with applicable requirements of NECA 416.

C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.

E. Install inverter assemblies plumb and level.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted inverter assemblies on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 033000.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Notify Owner and Architect at least two weeks prior to scheduled inspections and tests.

C. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel.

D. Provide all equipment, tools, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing, including load bank.

E. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Central Battery Equipment 263323 - 6
F. Perform acceptance test in accordance with NFPA 111.

G. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

H. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.22.2.

I. Batteries and Charger: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.18.

J. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies with Contract Documents.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed inverter assemblies from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION
Transfer Switches 263600 - 1

TRANSFER SWITCHES

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Transfer switches for low-voltage (600 V and less) applications and associated accessories:

1. Automatic transfer switches.

2. Includes service entrance rated transfer switches.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2020.

C. NEMA ICS 10 Part 1 - Industrial Control and Systems Part 1: Electromechanical AC Transfer Switch Equipment; 2020.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

E. UL 1008 - Transfer Switch Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate compatibility of transfer switches to be installed with work provided under other sections or by others.

3. Coordinate arrangement of equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.

Transfer Switches 263600 - 2

4. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.

5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following:

1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).

B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store transfer switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage to transfer switch components, enclosure, and finish.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Provide complete power transfer system consisting of all required equipment, conduit, boxes, wiring, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system that provides the functional intent indicated.

B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Applications:

D. Construction Type: Either "contactor type" (open contact) or "breaker type" (enclosed contact) transfer switches complying with specified requirements are acceptable.

E. Automatic Transfer Switch:

Transfer Switches 263600 - 3

1. Basis of Design Product(s): Generac Power Systems;
www.generac.com/industrial/#sle.

2. Transfer Switch Type: As indicated on the drawings.

3. Voltage: As indicated on the drawings.

4. Ampere Rating: As indicated on the drawings.

5. Neutral Configuration: Solid neutral (unswitched), except as indicated.

F. Comply with NEMA ICS 10 Part 1, and list and label as complying with UL 1008 for the classification of the intended application (e.g. emergency, optional standby).

G. Do not use double throw safety switches or other equipment not specifically designed for power transfer applications and listed as transfer switch equipment.

H. Load Classification: Classified for total system load (any combination of motor, electric discharge lamp, resistive, and tungsten lamp loads with tungsten lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of the continuous current rating) unless otherwise indicated or required.

I. Switching Methods:

1. Obtain control power for transfer operation from line side of source to which the load is to be transferred.

J. Service Conditions: Provide transfer switches suitable for continuous operation at indicated ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.

K. Enclosures:

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations:

2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

L. Short Circuit Current Rating:

M. Automatic Transfer Switches:

1. Description: Transfer switches with automatically initiated transfer between sources; electrically operated and mechanically held.

2. Control Functions:
a. Automatic mode.
b. Test Mode: Simulates failure of primary/normal source. c. Voltage and Frequency Sensing:
1) Undervoltage sensing for each phase of primary/normal source; adjustable dropout/pickup settings.

Transfer Switches 263600 - 4
2) Undervoltage sensing for alternate/emergency source; adjustable dropout/pickup settings.
3) Underfrequency sensing for alternate/emergency source; adjustable dropout/pickup settings.
d. Outputs:
1) Contacts for engine start/shutdown (except where direct generator communication interface is provided).
2) Auxiliary contacts; one set(s) for each switch position. e. Adjustable Time Delays:
1) Engine generator start time delay; delays engine start signal to override momentary primary/normal source
failures.
2) Transfer to alternate/emergency source time delay.
3) Retransfer to primary/normal source time delay.
4) Engine generator cooldown time delay; delays engine
shutdown following retransfer to primary/normal source to permit generator to run unloaded for cooldown period.
f. Engine Exerciser: Provides programmable scheduled exercising of engine generator selectable with or without transfer to load; provides memory retention during power outage.

3. Status Indications:
a. Connected to alternate/emergency source.
b. Connected to primary/normal source.
c. Alternate/emergency source available.

4. Automatic Sequence of Operations:
a. Upon failure of primary/normal source for a programmable time period (engine generator start time delay), initiate starting of engine generator where applicable.
b. When alternate/emergency source is available, transfer load to alternate/emergency source after programmable time delay. c. When primary/normal source has been restored, retransfer to primary/normal source after a programmable time delay. Bypass time delay if alternate/emergency source fails and primary/normal source is available.

Transfer Switches 263600 - 5
d. Where applicable, initiate shutdown of engine generator after programmable engine cooldown time delay.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of transfer switches are consistent with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that rough-ins for field connections are in the proper locations.

D. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive transfer switches.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.

D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 260529.

E. Install transfer switches plumb and level.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted transfer switches on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 033000.

G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.

H. Identify transfer switches and associated system wiring in accordance with Section 260553.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed transfer switches from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION
Automatic Transfer switch 263623 - 1

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope

Furnish and install automatic transfer switch(es) with number of poles, amperage, voltage, and withstand current ratings as shown on the plans. Basis of design is a Generac TX Series Non- Service Entrance Rated Automatic Transfer Switch, Open - In Phase Transfer, 1000 A, 3 Pole 4 Wire 480V, Transfer Switch in a NEMA 3R Enclosure. Each automatic transfer shall consist of a mechanically held power transfer switch unit and a microprocessor controller, interconnected to provide complete automatic operation. All transfer switches and control panels shall be the product of the same manufacturer.1.2 Acceptable Manufacturers Automatic transfer switches shall be Generac TX Series. Any alternative shall be submitted to the consulting engineer in writing at least 10 days prior to bid. Each alternate bid must list any deviations from this specification.

1.3 Codes and Standards

The automatic transfer switches and accessories shall conform to the requirements of:

A. UL 1008 - Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (2017 version and later for start circuit monitoring)
C. NEC Articles 700, 701, 702, 708
D. NFPA 99 – Health Care Facilities
E. NFPA 110 – Emergency and Standby Power Systems
F. IEEE Standard 446 – IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications G. NEMA Standards ICS10, MG1, MG250, ICS6, AB1
H. ANSI C62.41
I. International Standards Organization: ISO 8528, 9001.

J. Where seismic rating and/or certification is required: IBC 2018, OSHPD PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Mechanically Held Transfer Switch

A. The basis of design is the Generac TX Series Transfer switch that utilities a knife blade mechanically latching design with maintenance free contacts. The transfer switch unit shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The open transition switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two possible positions, normal or emergency. The delayed transition switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure one of three possible positions, normal and emergency.

B. The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary outages so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and temperature rise at the contacts is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life.

Automatic Transfer switch 263623 - 2
C. All main contacts shall be silver composition. Switches shall have segmented blow- on construction for high withstand current capability and be protected by separate arcing contacts.

D. A manual operating handle shall be provided for maintenance purposes.

E. Designs utilizing components of or parts thereof which are not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching, or transfer between two active power sources are not acceptable.

F. Where neutral conductors must be switched, the ATS shall be provided with fully rated neutral transfer contacts.

G. Where neutral conductors are to be solidly connected, a neutral terminal plate with fully rated AL-CU pressure connectors shall be provided.

H. The switch shall be capable of the following methods of transfer: Open with In-Phase transition only, Time Delay in Neutral transition, or In-Phase transition with a default to Time Delay in Neutral.

I. The transfer switch shall have a Seismic Certification to the requirements of the international Building Code of electrical equipment.

2.2 ATS Control with Integrated User Interface Panel

A. The basis of design is the Generac TXC-100 Controller with Integrated User Interface Panel which is voltage agnostic for service purposes removing the need for technicians to carry and support control panels for every available voltage. Any manufacturers that provide a controller or control panel that does not meet this requirement should notify the consulting engineer before bidding.

B. The controller shall be connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness. The harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the controller to be disconnected from the transfer switch for routine maintenance.

C. The controller shall direct the operation of the transfer switch. The controller's sensing and logic shall be controlled by a built-in microprocessor for maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and include standard on-board serial communications capability.

D. A user accessible USB port shall be provided to facilitate firmware updates, uploading of switch operational parameters, downloading of event history and switch operational statistics. This USB port shall be front accessible without opening the ATS door.

E. The controller shall provide single and three phase capability for maximum application flexibility and minimal spare part requirements. Voltage sensing shall be true RMS type and shall be accurate to ± 1% of nominal voltage. Frequency sensing shall be accurate to ± 0.1Hz. Time delay settings shall be accurate to ±0.5% of the full-scale value of the time delay. The panel shall be capable of operating over a temperature range of -20 to + 70 degrees C.

F. The controller power supply shall be field-configurable to operate on 120V through 480V systems without the need for transformers.

Automatic Transfer switch 263623 - 3

G. Control logic shall be backed up with a rechargeable, user-replaceable lithium-ion battery that shall also maintain control power for up to 60 minutes in the event no source power is available.

H. The controller shall be enclosed with a protective cover and be mounted separately from the transfer switch unit for safety and ease of maintenance.

I. The controller shall meet or exceed the requirements for Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) as follows:

1. IEC 61000 – 4 – 3 Radiated RF Field Immunity

2. IEC 61000 – 4 – 4 Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity

3. IEC 61000 – 4 – 5 Surge Immunity

4. IEC 61000 – 4 – 6 Conducted RF Immunity

5. IEC 61000 – 4 -11 Voltage Dips and Interruptions

6. EN 61000 – 6 - 2 Industrial Immunity Requirements EN 61000-6-4 - Radiated Emissions

7. EN 61000 – 6 - 4 Conducted Emissions

8. CISPR 11 – Conducted RF Emissions and Radiated RF Emissions

2.3 Enclosure

The basis of design is a Generac TX Series Non-Service Entrance Rated Transfer Switch in a NEMA 3R enclosure, with dimensions no larger than 78 Inches in Height, 30 Inches in Width, and 24 Inches In Depth. Larger enclosures than the basis of design will need to be approved by the Consulting Engineer to ensure there is enough wall space and appropriate clearance.

A. Provide a temperature and humidity controlled anti-condensation heater for all NEMA 3R and 4X enclosed units. Heater shall be an available option on NEMA 1 enclosures, when called for on plans. Heater cover to indicate a hot surface.

B. The switch mechanism and controller shall be easily removable from the enclosure in the field. This requirement will facilitate easy single-person installation on wall mounted switches, conduit fitting, and cable pulling while minimizing risk of damage and/or contamination of ATS components during the installation process.

C. Controller human interface and USB port shall be visible and operational through the enclosure door, without the need for personal protective equipment, avoiding arc- flash hazard for routine checks of the controller status.

PART 3 - OPERATIONS

3.1 Controller Display and Keypad

A. A backlit four-line graphical LCD display and human interface shall be an integral part of the controller for viewing all available data and setting desired operational parameters. Operational parameters shall also be available for viewing and limited control through the RS-485 communications port.

B. All instructions and controller settings shall be easily accessible, readable, and accomplished without the use of codes, calculations, or instruction manuals.

Automatic Transfer switch 263623 - 4
C. The user interface shall be provided with test/reset modes. The test mode will simulate a normal source failure. The reset mode shall bypass the time delays on either transfer to emergency or retransfer to normal.

D. The following parameters shall only be adjustable only by authorized service personnel:

1. Nominal line voltage and frequency

2. Single or three phase sensing on normal

3. Transfer operating mode configuration, (open transition, or delayed transition)

3.2 Voltage and Frequency Sensing

A. Voltage and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources (as noted below) shall be continuously monitored, with the following pickup, dropout, and trip settings capabilities; values shown as percentage of nominal unless otherwise specified.

Voltage and Frequency
Settings
Range Default Value
Source 1 (Normal) is Genset Yes or No No
Source 1 Undervoltage
Dropout
50-97% 85%
Source 1 Undervoltage Pickup 52-99% 90%
Source 1 Overvoltage Dropout 105-120% 110%
Source 1 Overvoltage Pickup 103-118% 105%
Source 1 Underfrequency
Dropout
90-97% 90%
Source 1 Underfrequency
Pickup
91-99% 95%
Source 1 Overfrequency
Dropout
103-110% 105%
Source 1 Overfrequency
Pickup
101-109% 102%
Source 1 Voltage Imbalance
Drop
5-20% 5%
Source 1 Voltage Imbalance
Pickup
3-18% 3%
Source 1 Warmup Time 0-1800s 3s
Source 1 Cooldown Time 0-1800s 1800s
Source 1 Minimum Run Time 300-1800s 1200s
Automatic Transfer switch 263623 - 5
Source 2 is Generator Yes or No Yes
Source 2 Undervoltage
Dropout
50-97% 85%
Source 2 Undervoltage Pickup 52-99% 90%
Source 2 Overvoltage Dropout 105-120% 110%
Source 2 Overvoltage Pickup 103-118% 105%
Source 2 Underfrequency
Dropout
90-97% 90%
Source 2 Underfrequency
Pickup
91-99% 99%
Source 2 Overfrequency
Dropout
103-110% 105%
Source 2 Overfrequency
Pickup
101-109% 102%
Source 2 Voltage Imbalance
Drop
5-20% 5%
Source 2 Voltage Imbalance
Pickup
3-18% 3%
Source 2 Minimum Run Time 300-1800s 1200s
Source 2 Warmup Time 0-1800s 3s
Source 2 Cooldown Time 0-1800s 1800s
Phase Rotation Check ABC, CBA, OFF ABC
Supply Overvoltage 350 VAC Fixed
Manual Return to Normal Yes or No
Time Delay Settings
Transfer to Emergency 120s max 30s
Re-transfer to Normal 1,800s max 1,800s
Time Delay Neutral 120s max 30s
Engine Cool Down 300-1,800s 1,800s
Delayed Transition Time 120s max 120s
Elevator Signal 120s max 30s
In Phase Transfer Yes or No
In Phase Synchronization Time 60-3600s 300s
Automatic Transfer switch 263623 - 6
Preferred Source S1, S2 S1
Voltage Imbalance Enable Yes or No
Voltage Imbalance Timeout 10-30s max 20s

B. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within 1% at +25C.

C. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments either locally with the display and keypad or remotely via RS-485 communications port access.

D. Source status screens shall be provided for both normal & emergency to provide digital readout of voltage and frequency.

E. The backlit graphical display shall have multiple language capability. Languages can be selected from the user interface.

3.3 Time Delays

A. A Line Interrupt delay shall be provided to override momentary normal source outages, delay all transfer and engine starting signals; adjustable 0 to 120 seconds. It shall be possible to bypass the time delay from the controller user interface.

B. An Engine Warm Up delay shall be provided for extended engine RPM stabilization where fast transfer to the emergency source is not required; adjustable 0 to 1,800 seconds. It shall be possible to bypass the time delay from the controller user interface.

C. A Transfer to Emergency delay shall be provided for controlled sequencing of loads to the emergency source; adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds. It shall be possible to bypass the time delay from the controller user interface.

D. A Retransfer to Normal delay shall be provided to ensure stability of the normal source, adjustable from 0 to 1,800 seconds. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and normal source is acceptable.

E. An Engine Minimum Runtime delay shall be provided to reduce nuisance starts when the normal source power is unstable but does not trigger a transfer to the emergency source, adjustable from 5 to 30 minutes. Operates in conjunction with Engine Cool Down delay.

F. An Engine Cool Down delay shall be provided; adjustable 300 – 1,800 seconds.

G. A Delayed Transition delay shall be provided to ensure sufficient time for motor voltage decay for transition between live sources; adjustable from 0 – 120 seconds.

H. An Elevator Signal Before Transfer output signal shall be provided to drive an external relay for selective load disconnect control. The controller shall have the ability to activate an adjustable 0 to 120 second delay in any of the following modes:

1. Prior to transfer only.

2. Prior to and after transfer.

3. Normal to emergency only.

4. Emergency to normal only.

5. Normal to emergency and emergency to normal.

6. All transfer conditions or only when both sources are available.

Automatic Transfer switch 263623 - 7

I. For special applications (i.e., three sources), the option to select the Preferred Source.

J. All adjustable time delays shall be field adjustable without the use of special tools or software.

Time Delay Summary Table:

Time Delay Description Range Default Value
Line Interrupt Delay 0 – 120 sec. 3 sec.

Engine Warm Up Delay 0 – 1,800 sec. 3 sec.

Transfer to Emergency 0 – 120 sec. 3 sec.

Retransfer to Normal 0 – 1,800 sec. 1,800 sec.

Engine Minimum Run Time 5 – 30 min. 5 min.

Engine Cool Down 300 – 1,800 sec. 1,800 sec.

Delayed Transition (Center Off
Position)
0 – 120 sec. 120 sec.

Elevator Signal Before Transfer 0 – 120 sec. 0 sec.

Preferred Source Normal (S1), Emerg.
(S2)
Normal (S1)

3.4 External Control Interfaces and Indicators

A. Communications connectors, user interface and display shall be accessible and usable without presenting an
arc-flash hazard.

B. Customer inputs shall be optically isolated for wider compatibility with external systems.

This will protect the controller from external surges and transient voltages.

C. Surge Protection for the ATS controls shall be provided.

D. Replaceable fuses to protect the power supply to the ATS control panel.

E. A set of contacts rated 5 amps, 30 VDC shall be provided for a low-voltage engine start signal. The start signal shall prevent dry cranking of the engine by requiring the generator set to reach proper output and run for the duration of the Engine Minimum Runtime setting, regardless of whether the normal source restores before the load is transferred.

F. Engine starting contacts shall facilitate start-circuit monitoring to comply with the 2017 and later versions of NFPA 70 Article 700.10 (D)(3).

G. Two sets of Form-C auxiliary contacts rated 10 amps, 250 VAC shall be provided to indicate the switch actuator position, including center-off for Time Delay Neutral switches or a Permissive (Emergency Inhibit) condition.

H. A single General Alarm (summary alarm) indication shall light up the alert indicator and de-energize the configured common alarm output relay for external monitoring.

I. LED indicating lights shall be provided; one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the normal source and one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the emergency source.

J. LED indicating lights shall be provided and energized by controller outputs. The lights shall provide true source availability of the normal and emergency source, as determined Automatic Transfer switch 263623 - 8
by the voltage sensing trip and reset settings for each source.

K. LED indicating light shall be provided to indicate switch not in automatic mode (manual).

L. LED indicating light shall be provided to indicate any alarm condition.

M. The controller shall have two programmable inputs and one programmable output as standard; with an optional expansion board to add up to four programmable input/outputs. Programmable I/O conditions shall include:

Programmable Output Programmable Input
Source 1 – Two Wire Start Permissive (Emergency Inhibit) Source 2 – Two Wire Start Remote Engine Fast Test
Engine Exercising Remote Engine Normal Test
Engine Warmup ATS Timer
Signal Before Transfer Initiate Demand Response
General Alarm
Source 1 Good
Source 2 Good

N. System Status - The controller LCD display shall include a System Status screen which shall be accessible from any point in the menu system by depressing the “ESC” key until you arrive at the System Status screen. This screen shall display a clear description of the active operating sequences and switch position. Operational status information displayed shall include:

1. Source 1 status (good or bad)

2. Source 2 status (good or bad)

3. Any active timer

4. Permissive (Emergency Inhibit when active)

3.5 Transfer and Exercise Controls

The following standard features shall be built into the controller, capable of being activated through keypad programming as required by the user:

A. Provide the ability to select “commit/no commit to transfer” to determine whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if the normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load.

B. An engine generator exercising timer shall be provided to configure daily, day of week, weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly testing of an engine generator set at a specified time of day with or without load for a programmable period (Engine Minimum Runtime).

C. Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact to signal the ATS to transfer to emergency for remote test. Test signal can be enabled through the keypad or digital input. Transfer to emergency for demand response can be enabled by digital input.

D. For In-Phase Transfer Switch Designs: An in-phase monitor shall be provided in the controller such that the transfer occurs with less than ten degrees phase angle difference between sources. The monitor shall control transfer so that motor load inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents and shall not require external control of power sources. In-phase switch transfer time shall not exceed 25ms.

E. For Delayed Transition Transfer Switch Designs: Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact to signal the ATS to load-shed (Permissive is removed) and move to a center-off position. When the load-shed signal is removed (Permissive is restored), the Automatic Transfer switch 263623 - 9
ATS shall reclose to the emergency. If normal source is good during load-shed the ATS shall transfer to and remain on normal source.

3.6 Data Logging and Diagnostics

Controllers that require multiple screens to determine system status or display “coded” system status messages, which must be explained by references in the operator’s manual are not permissible.

A. Controller & Contactor Health Monitoring with visual and auxiliary contact status shall be provided.

B. Communications Interface – The controller shall be capable of interfacing, through a standard RS-485 serial communication port with a network of transfer switches.

C. Data Logging – The controller shall have the ability to log data and to maintain the last 200 events, even in the event of total power loss. The following events shall be time and date stamped and maintained in a non-volatile memory:

1. Date, time and reason for transfer normal to emergency.

2. Date, time and reason for transfer emergency to normal.

3. Date, time and reason for engine start.

4. Date and time engine stopped.

5. Date and time emergency source available.

6. Date and time emergency source not available.

PART 4 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES

4.1 Additional Optional Features

A. Line Interrupt Time Delay. - Not Selected

B. Integrating Metering with current transformer. - Not Selected

C. Manual Retransfer to Generator. - Not Selected

D. Permissive (Emergency Inhibit). - Not Selected

E. Chicago Toolkit. - Not Selected

F. Expanded Input/Output Module. - Not Selected

G. Pad lockable controller cover (Standard on NEMA 3R). Pad lockable user interface cover shall be provided with the ability to protect the user interface from the environment

H. Temperature and Humidity Controlled Heater for NEMA 1. An enclosure heater strip shall be supplied inside the transfer switch enclosure and shall be controlled by an adjustable humidistat.

I. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS). - Not Selected

PART 5 - ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

5.01 Withstand and Closing Ratings
Automatic Transfer switch 263623 - 10

A. The ATS shall be rated to close on and withstand the available RMS symmetrical short circuit current at the ATS terminals with the type of overcurrent protection shown on the plans. The basis of design for this project is a Generac TX Series Non-Service Entrance Rated Automatic Transfer Switch with a 100ka 3 Cycle Rating, 100ka (.05 seconds) Time Based Rating, and a 125ka Specific Breaker Rating transfer switches from other manufacturers with ratings less than provided in this section will need to be approved by the Consulting Engineer to ensure compatibility with the project.

B. Provide a temperature and humidity controlled anti-condensation heater for all NEMA 3R and 4X enclosed units. Heater shall be an available option on NEMA 1 enclosures, when called for on plans. Heater cover to indicate a hot surface.

C. The switch mechanism and controller shall be easily removable from the enclosure in the field. This requirement will facilitate easy single- person installation on wall mounted switches, conduit fitting, and cable pulling while minimizing risk of damage and/or contamination of ATS components during the installation process.

D. Controller human interface and USB port shall be visible and operational through the enclosure door, without the need for personal protective equipment, avoiding arc -flash hazard for routine checks of the controller status.

5.2 Tests and Certification

A. The complete ATS shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation of the individual components and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency, and time delay settings are in compliance with the specification requirements.

B. The ATS manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001: 2015 International Quality Standard and the manufacturer shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, installation, and servicing in accordance with ISO 9001: 2015.

5.3 Service Representation

A. The ATS manufacturer shall support a service organization of company-employed personnel located throughout the contiguous United States. The service center's personnel must be factory trained and must be on call 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

B. The manufacturer shall maintain records of switch shipments, by serial number, for a minimum of 10 years.

5.4 Warranty

A. The basis of design is a Generac TX Series Non-Service Entrance Rated Automatic Transfer Switch Basic 2 Year Warranty.

B. A Basic Warranty is defined as the manufacturer covering replacement parts for the listed amount of the warranty period.

C. The Comprehensive Warranty is defined as the manufacturer covering replacement parts, labor, and limited technician travel costs for covered warranty repairs during the listed warranty period.

Automatic Transfer switch 263623 - 11

D. The switch mechanism and controller shall be easily removable from the enclosure in the field. This requirement will facilitate easy single-person installation on wall mounted switches, conduit fitting, and cable pulling while minimizing risk of damage and/or contamination of ATS components during the installation process.

E. Controller human interface and USB port shall be visible and operational through the enclosure door, without the need for personal protective equipment, avoiding arc-flash hazard for routine checks of the controller status.

END OF SECTION

Automatic Lighting Control System 265120 - 1

AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide and design an automatic lighting control system as described in this specification and as called for on the drawings.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in manufacturing and installing this type of system.

B. The Contractor shall provide a list of recent jobs completed during the last 5 years with the name and phone number of a contact person.

C. All components and assemblies are to be pre-tested and assembled at the factory prior to installation.

D. Provide a factory-trained technician on site. The technician shall functionally test each component in the system after installation to verify proper operation and confirm that the panel wiring and addressing conform to the wiring documentation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The following list includes the required shop drawings and product data information that shall be submitted.

1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) listing and factory test reports.

2. Internal and system wiring diagrams.

3. Single line diagram of the system configuration. Typical riser diagrams are not acceptable.

4. Dimensions of the equipment layout.

5. Control wiring and conduits layout and connections.

6. Floor plans to scale showing the location of each device and equipment.

7. Product data of all the components including but not limited to programmable central controllers, transceivers panels, input relays, switches and other ancillary equipment.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. UL 916 Energy Management Equipment.

Automatic Lighting Control System 265120 - 2
B. FCC Emissions Standards specified in Part 15, subpart J for Class A, Applications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide and microprocessor controlled relay panels for the Lighting Control System. The system shall include programmable standalone master panel, switch inputs, wiring, power supplies, relays and ancillary relays.

B. Panels shall be capable of standing alone or operating as part of a network.

1. The system shall provide intelligence to operate as follows:
a. Store all user operating data.
b. Initiate all relay output commands based on:
1) Operator inputs
2) Automatic operating schedule
3) Binary type field sensors
4) Universal override switch inputs
5) Internal 56K Baud modem
c. Provide automatic system diagnostics and alarming based on detected faults in the controller, transceiver panels, relays, and data line.

2. System shall include a memory back up to be able to survive an indefinite length of power failure.

C. Lighting Control Panel (LCP): Microprocessor based, complete prewired assemblies consisting of the following:

1. Stand alone panel controller capable of receiving and acting upon programs downloaded from the central computer. Programs downloaded from the network shall be capable of continuing to operate even if the network should fail. Battery Back up provides 8 days of memory retention. Panel shall be part of a system that can control up to 750 relays and receive up to 500 switch inputs. Panel shall have an USB input for local programming and trouble shooting from a laptop computer.

2. Internal digital clock with self control power.

3. Output modules: Plug in type to receive coded digital commands from the panel controller and pulse output relays to the appropriate state. Actual status feedback of the relays are to be fed back to the panel controller and from there to the central computer. Actual status of each Automatic Lighting Control System 265120 - 3
relay is to be indicated by a pilot LED on the control board. Each Module controls 8 or 16 relays.

4. Switch input modules: Plug-in type, actuated by remote external contact closures. These contact closures may be either momentary or maintained. The action of the contact is noted by the panel controller and acted upon as programmed by software. The action of the contact can command any group of output relays to the desired state. Either 8 or 24- input channels as shown on the plans.

5. Output Relays
a. Type: Momentary pulsed, mechanically latched with pilot light contact.
b. Rating: 20 Ampere, 277VAC
c. Number per panel: 16,32 or 48 as required to satisfy this project scope.

6. The low voltage and high voltage sections of the lighting control cabinet shall be separated by a 14 gage steel barrier in which the relays are mounted. In areas where both 120 volt and 277 volt loads are present the high voltage compartment shall have a 14 gage steel barrier between the relays that carry 120 VAC and the relays that carry 277VAC. Each section shall be clearly labeled as to the voltage in that compartment.

7. Panel power supply shall be dual primary 115/277 volts AC, 60 Hz. ± 10%. Low voltage side shall be protected from power line surges and spikes on the input power. The low voltage section shall be protected against short circuit faults and relay failures.

8. Panels shall be UL approved and shall have a short circuit withstand current rating at 14,000 AIC.

9. Manufacturer: Lighting Control and Design, or G.E. or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The Lighting Control System shall be installed and wired completely as required by the equipment manufacturer by the contractor, who shall make all necessary wiring connections to the lighting fixtures, override switches, photo cells and equipment.

B. The Contractor shall provide on-site programming time with factory-trained personnel for the system set-up. The Contractor shall set up the software program and program the entire system in accordance with the Owner's instructions.

C. Documentation
Automatic Lighting Control System 265120 - 4

1. Accurate "as-built" drawings shall be provided by the Contractor. These shall indicate the load controlled by each relay and the identification number for that switch connected to an input and the identification number of that input. Three sets of space plans or reflected ceiling plans shall be provided by the contractor indicating which fixtures are controlled by each relay.

2. A separate data grade private line with RJ45 jack shall be furnished for each modem.

3.2 SERVICE AND SUPPORT
A. Startup: After the system has been installed, the Contractor shall provide the services of a factory trained representative of the manufacturer to verify correct operation of all system components. The contractor shall guarantee all material and workmanship involving the system for three years after startup.

B. Training: After system startup and after all the programming is completed, the Contractor shall arrange for a factory trained representative to train the Owner's personnel. The trainer shall instruct the Owner's personnel in how to program the system and demonstrate a typical operating program for an area. The Contractor shall allow for 24 hours' instruction time for the Owner's training.

C. Factory Support: Factory support shall be available free of charge during the three-year warranty period to answer programming and application questions. The manufacturer, or his representative, shall have a remote terminal capable of programming the system to support the Owner's personnel during this period. The Contractor shall include a modem, necessary cabling and telephone extension to support this telecommunications operation. The Contractor shall provide a three-year maintenance service contract as part of the cost.

D. The Contractor shall also provide a software site licensing so that the Owner will be able to transfer the software program from the main computer to the other computers. This transfer shall not be an extra cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION
Exterior Lighting 265600 - 1

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

GARDENA CIVIC CENTER
(JN 528)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior luminaires.

B. Ballasts.

C. Lamps.

D. Poles and accessories.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 260533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Optical and Electrical Measurements of Solid- State Lighting Products; 2019.

B. IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Maintenance of Light Output Characteristics of Solid-State Light Sources; 2021.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

D. NECA/IESNA 501 - Standard for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2000 (Reaffirmed 2006).

E. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2020.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

G. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate placement of poles and associated foundations with utilities, curbs, sidewalks, trees, walls, fences, striping, etc. installed under other sections or by others. Coordinate elevation to obtain specified foundation height.

Exterior Lighting 265600 - 2

2. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer.

2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon request.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective projected area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.

1. LED Luminaires:
a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.

2. LED Retrofit Luminaire Conversion Kits: Include list of compatible luminaires and/or criteria for compatibility.

C. Samples:

1. Provide one sample(s) of each luminaire proposed for substitution upon request.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for installation.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers.

Exterior Lighting 265600 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.

2.2 LUMINAIRES
A. Manufacturers:

1. Acuity Brands, Inc; __________: www.acuitybrands.com/#sle.

B. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

C. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.

D. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp and distribute the light.

F. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

G. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

H. Provide luminaires listed and labeled as suitable for wet locations unless otherwise indicated.

I. LED Luminaires:

1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.

2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.

3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.

2.3 BALLASTS AND DRIVERS
A. Manufacturers:

1. California Accent Lighting, Inc; __________; www.calilighting.com/#sle.

2. General Electric Company/GE Lighting;
__________: www.gelighting.com/#sle.

3. OSRAM Sylvania, Inc; __________: www.osram.us/ds/#sle.

B. Ballasts/Drivers - General Requirements:

Exterior Lighting 265600 - 4

1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).

2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.

3. Electronic Ballasts/Drivers: Inrush currents not exceeding peak currents specified in NEMA 410.

2.4 LAMPS
A. Lamps - General Requirements:

1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire.

2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed.

Where lamps are not specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp efficiency standards.

4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined by the Architect to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature.

2.5 POLES
A. All Poles:

1. Provide poles and associated support components suitable for the luminaire(s) and associated supports and accessories to be installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.

D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

Exterior Lighting 265600 - 5
B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260533.16 as required for installation of luminaires provided under this section.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install luminaires in accordance with NECA/IESNA 501.

D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 260529.

E. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.

F. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

G. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

H. Install lamps in each luminaire.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each product for damage and defects.

B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.

C. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products.

Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.

3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.

3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

B. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.

3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

Exterior Lighting 265600 - 6

END OF SECTION

NOTICE OF EXEMPTION
TO:  Office of Planning & Research  County Clerk / Registrar Recorder 1400 Tenth Street ATTN: Environmental Filings Clerk Sacramento, CA 95814 12400 East Imperial Highway, Room 1101 Norwalk, CA 90650

Project Title: Nakaoka Community Center Electrical System and Civic Center Outdoor Lighting Upgrades, JN 528 ________________________________________________ Project Location (Specific): 1670 W. 162nd Street Gardena CA 90247

Project Location (City): Gardena Location (County): Los Angeles County Description of nature, purpose and beneficiaries of project: This project will upgrade the existing electrical system, the lighting system, and add a emergency generator.

Name of public agency approving project: City of Gardena

Name of person or agency carrying out project: City of Gardena

Exempt Status: (Check One)

 Ministerial: (P.R.C. Sec. 21080[b][1]; Guidelines Sec. 15268)  Declared Emergency: (P.R.C. Sec. 21080[b][3]; Guidelines Sec. 15269[a])  Emergency Project (P.R.C. Sec. 21080[b][4]; Guidelines Sec. 15269[b][c]) X Categorical Exemption: Section 15301 Class 1, Existing Facilities Other: Guidelines Sec. 15061):
_______________________________________________________________________ Reason why project is exempt: This project consists of minor alteration of existing public facilities and involves negligible or no expansion of use beyond that previously existing.

Contact person: Jose Espinoza Telephone: 310-217-9529

If filed by applicant:

1. Attach certified document of exempting finding.

2. Has a notice of exemption been filed by the public agency approving the project?  Yes  No

Date received for filing:

CLINT OSORIO Date
Environmental Quality Officer

NOTE: Exempt from Dept. of Fish & Game Wildlife Fee in accordance with de minimis impact finding (735.5[c])

City of Gardena
Gardena City Council
Meeting

AGENDA REPORT

SUMMARY

Agenda Item No. 17B.

Section: DEPARTMENTAL

ITEMS - PUBLIC WORKS
Meeting Date: August 12,
2025

TO: THE HONORABLE MAYOR AND MEMBERS OF THE GARDENA CITY COUNCIL AGENDA TITLE: INTRODUCTION OF ORDINANCE NO. 1885, Amending Chapter 10.32 Special Speed Zones of the Gardena Municipal Code and Declare California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) Exemption.

COUNCIL ACTION REQUIRED:

Staff Recommendation:
-Open the public hearing
-Receive testimony from the public; allow (3) minutes for each speaker -Close the public hearing
Staff Recommendation for Motion:
-Introduce Ordinance No. 1885;
-Find the action is exempt from the California Environmental Quality Act pursuant to the Common Sense Exemption of CEQA Guidelines Section 15061(b)(3)
RECOMMENDATION AND STAFF SUMMARY:

The City contracted with AGA Engineers, Inc. to conduct an Engineering and Traﬃc Survey. The purpose of this survey is to update the speed limits at various segments throughout the City of Gardena.

In California, cities and counties must comply with California Vehicle Code (CVC) Sections 22357 and 22358 to establish speed limits within their jurisdictions. Roadways within business and residential districts have a statutory speed limit of 25 miles per hour, while alleys and blind intersections are limited to15 miles per hour. These statutory limits are established by state law. As such they are not typically included in the study. Intermediate speed limits between 15 and 65 miles per hour may be established by local authorities based on the results of an engineering and traﬃc survey.

This engineering speed study was conducted per CVC Section 627 and includes documentation of existing roadway conditions, radar spot speed surveys, and mid-block collision analysis. A total of 63 roadway segments throughout the City were surveyed. The collision rate for these segments was found well below the expected collision rates published by the State of California.

Based on the radar speed survey, collision history and ﬁeld conditions, it is recommended that most existing posted speed limits remain unchanged. However, reductions are recommended for 7 of the 63 segments surveyed (See attached report for details). Engineering and Traﬃc Surveys are typically updated every ﬁve years, and once completed, any necessary revisions must be reﬂected in the Gardena Municipal Code.

Accordingly, staff recommends that the City Council introduce Ordinance No. 1885, amending Chapter 10.32, "Special Speed Zones", of the Gardena Municipal Code to align with the updated Engineering and Traﬃc Survey ﬁndings.

Additionally, declare that the adoption of this ordinance is categorically exempt under California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA), Article 5, Section 15061 (b), (3), "the common sense exemption". The action is largely administrative in nature and designed to improve, not degrade, environmental quality, such that there is no possibility that adopting this Ordinance would adversely affect the environment in any manner that could be signiﬁcant.

FISCAL IMPACT/COST:

None

APPROVED:
___________________________
Clint Osorio, City Manager
Attachments
Ordinance No.1885.docx.pdf
Engineering and Traﬃc Survey - 2025.pdf
ORDINANCE NO. 1885

AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF
GARDENA, AMENDING CHAPTER 10.32 (SPECIAL SPEED

ZONES) OF THE GARDENA MUNCIPAL CODE TO

DESIGNATING SPEED LIMITS ON CERTAIN STREETS IN

THE CITY OF GARDENA AND FINDING THE ACTION IS

EXEMPT FROM THE CALIFORNIA ENVIRONMENTAL

QUALITY ACT PURSUANT TO THE COMMON SENSE
EXEMPTION OF CEQA GUIDELINES SECTION 15061
(b)(3)

WHEREAS, Cities and Counties in California are required to follow the California Vehicle Code (CVC) Sections 22357 and 22358 to establish speed limits within their jurisdictions; and

WHEREAS, CVC Sections 22357 and 22358 grant the City authority to determine and declare speed limits, other than those established as prima facie by CVC Section 22352, by ordinance; and

WHEREAS, Engineering and Traffic Surveys were conducted for various roadway segments throughout the City consistent with Section 627 of the CVC; and

WHEREAS, the City Council of the City of Gardena has considered all evidence presented, both written and oral, at a public hearing held on the 12th day of August 2025; and

WHEREAS, b ased on the Engineering and Traffic Survey s completed, the City Council finds and determines that the speed limits set forth in the table below are those most appropriate to facilitate the orderly movement of traffic and are responsible and safe and shall be the prima facie speed limits for the areas identified herein.

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF GARDENA , CALIFORNIA, DOES HEREBY ORDAIN, AS FOLLOWS:

SECTION 1. Section 10.32.010 – “Increasing state speed limits in certain zones” of the Gardena Municipal Code is hereby amended to read as follows:

Section 10.32.010 – “Designated speed limits on certain zones.”

In accordance with the provisions of Section 22357 and Section 22358 of the Vehicle Code of the State of California, the City of Gardena hereby determines that the speed limits on certain streets are necessary for the orderly and safe movement of traffic i n the City of Gardena. Based on the Engineering and Traffic Surveys completed, the City Council finds Docusign Envelope ID: 05A42B0C-7B96-4201-8F55-5051B0C4D544 Ordinance No. 1885
2 and determines that the speed limits set forth below are those most appropriate to facilitate the orderly movement of traffic and are responsible and safe and shall be the prima facie speed limits for the areas identified herein.

Docusign Envelope ID: 05A42B0C-7B96-4201-8F55-5051B0C4D544 Ordinance No. 1885
3 Docusign Envelope ID: 05A42B0C-7B96-4201-8F55-5051B0C4D544 Ordinance No. 1885
4 SECTION 2. CEQA. The City Council finds that the adoption of the local amendments thereof is exempt from the California Environmental Quality Act (“CEQA”) under CEQA Guideline section 15061(b)(3) (the commonsense exemption). The action is largely administrative in nature and designed to improve and not degrade environmental quality such that there is no possibility that adopting this Ordinance would adversely affect the environment in any manner that could be significant. As such, staff is directed to file a Notice of Exemption pursuant to CEQA Guidelines sections 15061(b)(3).

SECTION 3. Severability. If any section, subsection, subdivision, paragraph, sentence, clause, or phrase of this ordinance, or any part thereof is for any reason held to be unconstitutional, such decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portion of this ordinance or any part thereof. The City Council hereby declares that it would have passed each section, subsection, subdivision, paragraph, sentence, clause or phrase thereof, Docusign Envelope ID: 05A42B0C-7B96-4201-8F55-5051B0C4D544 Ordinance No. 1885
5 irrespective of the fact that any one or more section, subsection, subdivision, paragraph, sentence, clause or phrase be declared unconstitutional.

SECTION 4. Certification. The City Clerk shall certify the passage of this ordinance and shall cause the same to be entered in the book of original ordinances of said City; shall make a minute passage and adoption thereof in the records of the meeting at which time the same is passed and adopted; and shall, within fifteen (15) days after the passage and adoption thereof, cause the same to be published as required by law, in a publication of general circulation.

SECTION 5. Effective Date. This Ordinance shall not become effective or be in force until thirty (30) days from and after the date of its adoption.

Passed, approved, and adopted this 26th day of August 2025.

TASHA CERDA, Mayor

ATTEST:

MINA SEMENZA, City Clerk

APPROVED AS TO FORM:

CARMEN VASQUEZ, City Attorney

Docusign Envelope ID: 05A42B0C-7B96-4201-8F55-5051B0C4D544

Engineering & Traffic Survey
211 Imperial Highway, Suite 208, Fullerton, CA 92835 || (714) 992-4592 || [email protected] Prepared for the
City of Gardena
July 2025

City of Gardena Engineering & Traffic Survey for Speed Limit Updates

CERTIFICATION

I, Ruben Perales, do hereby certify that this Engineering and Traffic Survey for the City of Gardena was performed under my supervision and is accurate and complete. I certify that I am both experienced in performing surveys of this type and duly registered in the State of California as a professional Traffic Engineer.

7/7/2025
Ruben Perales Date
RCE #83169, RTE #2838

Traffic No. 2838

City of Gardena Engineering & Traffic Survey for Speed Limit Updates

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section Page

1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................................ 1

2.0 Study Methodology................................................................................................. 3

3.0 Survey Results ......................................................................................................... 4

3.1 Street Surveillance ........................................................................................ 4

3.2 Accident Rate Analysis.................................................................................. 4

3.3 Spot Speed Survey ........................................................................................ 7

4.0 Survey Findings and Recommendations ................................................................. 9

4.1 Speed Limit Signing – General ...................................................................... 9

5.0 Summary and Conclusions .................................................................................... 13

Tables

1 2025 Speed Zone Survey – Collision Survey Analysis ............................................. 6 2 2025 City of Gardena Segment Spot Speed Survey .............................................. 10

Appendices

A Regulations Governing Speed Limits and Definition of Terms B Speed Zoning Regulations from Caltrans
C Traffic Radar Certifications
D Engineering and Traffic Survey Summary Reports
E Engineering and Traffic Survey Raw Data

City of Gardena Engineering & Traffic Survey for Speed Limit Updates

1 SECTION 1.0 – INTRODUCTION

The purpose of this report is to document the results of an Engineering and Traffic Survey (E&TS) conducted to update the speed limits at various segments throughout the City of Gardena.

The overall study was conducted to comply with existing State regulations concerning the increasing or decreasing of speed limits within city boundaries. Roadways within business and residential districts have an established speed limit of 25 miles per hour, while alleys and blind intersections are 15 miles per hour.

Both speed limits are designated by California law. As such they are not typically included in the study. Intermediate speed limits between 15 and 65 miles per hour may be established by local authorities based on engineering and traffic surveys.

It is a common belief that posting speed limit traffic signs will influence drivers to drive at that speed; however, the facts indicate otherwise. Driver behavioral research conducted in many parts of this country over a span of several decades shows that the average driver is influenced by the appearance of the highway itself and the prevailing traffic conditions in choosing the speed at which a person drives. Recognizing this, the California Vehicle Code (CVC) requires that speed limits be established in accordance with appropriate engineering practice and methods. Excerpts from the CVC regarding regulations governing speed limits and definition of terms used in speed zone surveys are detailed in Appendix A.

This report contains sufficient information to document that the conditions of the latest edition of the CVC Section 627 have been satisfied and that other conditions not readily apparent to motorists are properly identified. To legally use radar for speed enforcement, Section 40802 of the CVC requires that speed limits be established per Sections 22357 and 22358 of the CVC. The limits must be justified by an E&TS conducted within five years prior to the date of the alleged violation. However, a change in State law allows cities to extend the survey period up to seven or fourteen years depending on specific criteria

1. The latest edition of the CVC has highlighted bicycle and pedestrian safety as part of the study, and this aspect was considered as a part of this report. Additionally, effective January 1, 2022, several of the CVC sections mentioned above were amended and additional sections were added related to traffic safety and speed limits. These changes to the CVC were made in accordance with Assembly Bill No. 43 (AB 43) which was approved by the State of California on October 8, 2021. AB 43 is included in Appendix A for reference.

The following are some key highlights of AB 43:

- Allows a prima facie speed limit of 25 mph on State highways located in any business or residential district.

- Authorizes Caltrans and a local authority to declare a speed of 20 or 15 mph on State highways.

- Authorizes a lower speed limit on a section of highway contiguous to a business activity district.

Definition of “business activity district” is identified in AB 43 text.

1 Refer to Appendix A for specific survey criteria.

City of Gardena Engineering & Traffic Survey for Speed Limit Updates

2 - Authorizes a local authority to further reduce the speed limit beyond the 5 -mph reduction after June 30, 2024, if certain conditions are met.

- Extends the validity of speed surveys from 10 years to 14 years if evaluated by a registered engineer.

- Local authority may, by ordinance, retain the current speed limit or restore the immediately prior speed limit if that speed limit was established with an engineering and traffic survey and if a registered engineer has evaluated the section of highway and determined that no additional general-purpose lanes have been added to the roadway since completion of the traffic survey that established the prior speed limit.

The current study will validate and/or decrease the existing speed limits along the study segments based on the data and results of this survey. The surveys were conducted in February of 2025.

Spot speed surveys were taken at the project segments throughout the City of Gardena in conformance with the State law for conducting engineering and traffic surveys for the purpose of establishing prima facie speed limits. The data was collected per the 2014 California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CA MUTCD), Revision 9. Sections of the CA MUTCD detailing regulations for conducting the required “Engineering and Traffic Survey” are presented in Appendix B.

The actual speed zone surveys were conducted by National Data and Surveying Services, Inc. (NDS) and AGA Engineers, Inc. (AGA). A California registered traffic engineer from AGA reviewed the streets, the survey data, and the crash statistics to arrive at the recommended speed limits for each segment.

City of Gardena Engineering & Traffic Survey for Speed Limit Updates

3 SECTION 2.0 – STUDY METHODOLOGY

The study involved three categories of data collection and analysis: (1) geometric and characteristic street surveillance; (2) collision rate analysis; and (3) spot speed survey.

The street surveillance process used field observations to determine the existing roadway characteristics, condition and placement of signs and pavement markings, land uses, pedestrian and bicycle activity, and other roadway characteristics that may not be readily apparent to motorists.

Historical collision data was obtained from the Statewide Integrated Traffic Records System (SWITRS) for the period from January 1, 2023, to December 31, 2024 (i.e., two years) for the roadway segments. The collision rate was calculated and considered in recommending the speed limit by using the average daily traffic (ADT) volumes provided by the City.

Spot speed surveys, utilizing a calibrated radar gun, were conducted at sixty-three (63) segment locations to determine existing vehicular travel speeds. A copy of the “Traffic Radar Certification” is provided in Appendix C. Typically, a minimum of 100 observations were recorded, 50 for each direction of travel, on all the streets included in the study. This data was used to calculate statistical information such as the 85th percentile travel speed, 10 mile per hour (mph) pace speed, percentage of vehicles within the 10-mph pace, median speed, and other pertinent data for analysis.

City of Gardena Engineering & Traffic Survey for Speed Limit Updates

4 SECTION 3.0 – SURVEY RESULTS

3.1 Street Surveillance

Section 2B.13 “Speed Limit Signs” of the CA MUTCD (see Appendix B) states that the speed limit should be established at the nearest five mile per hour increment (rounded per standard mathematical practice) to the 85th percentile speed recorded during the spot speed survey. However, in matching existing conditions with the traffic safety needs of the community, engineering judgment may indicate the need for a further change in speed. Whenever such factors are considered to establish the speed limit, they sho uld be documented in the speed survey or in the accompanying engineering report.

The survey streets were reviewed by Mr. Ruben Perales, P.E., T.E, Vice President at AGA Engineers, Inc., who is a registered Traffic Engineer in the State of California. The roadway characteristics, location of speed limit signs, conditions not readily app arent to the driver, land use types adjoining the street (commercial, residential, school zone, parks, etc.), and type of roadway (divided, undivided, number of lanes, etc.) were recorded as part of the study. The roadway characteristics were used to determine if any physical conditions warranted consideration of a five mile per hour reduction of the recommended speed in accordance with CVC Section 627 and if roadway segments have changed since the preparation of the previous E&TS dated June 2021. The speed survey segment roadway characteristics for each segment are indicated on the Engineering and Traffic Survey Summary sheets in Appendix D.

3.2 Accident Rate Analysis

The collision rate for each speed survey segment was determined using the most recent available collision records as required by CVC Section 627. The mid-block collision totals are based on a review of the collision reports from SWITRS from (January 1, 2023, to December 31, 2024. Subsequently, these totals were used to calculate the mid-block collision rate, which also uses ADT volume data. ADT count data was provided by the City for all project segments and is included in Appendix E. The mid-block collision rate for each street surveyed was calculated in terms of “collisions per million vehicle miles traveled” (C/MVM) and is shown on the Engineering and Traffic Survey Summary Reports. The following shows a sample calculation.

The rate was calculated using the following equation:

Collision Rate =
Number of Midblock Collisions × 106
24-hour volume × 365 × segment length × number of years

The number of mid-block collisions is based on three years’ collision data (January 1, 2023, to December 31, 2024), recent 24 -hour traffic volume (for both directions) within the survey segment, and the segment’s length given in miles.

City of Gardena Engineering & Traffic Survey for Speed Limit Updates

5 Example:

Segment: Artesia Boulevard between Western Avenue and Normandie Avenue:

Collision Rate =
9 × 106
46,982 × 365 × 0.59 × 2
= 0.44 C/MVM

The Average Expected Collision Rate for this segment is 0.87 and is based on the “2022 Crash Data on California State Highways2. Therefore, the calculated collision rate of 0.44 is well below the expected rate for this segment.

The results of the collision rate calculations, including the Average Expected Collision Rates for each type of roadways, are shown in Table 1 on the following page and detailed in Appendix E. The following Average Expected Collision Rates were obtained from “2022 Crash Data on California State Highways” published by the California Department of Transportation (Caltrans):

♦ Conventional 2 lanes or less (<45 mph): 1.07 C/MVM
♦ Conventional 2 lanes or less (> 45 mph): 0.61 C/MVM
♦ Undivided 4 lanes (<45 mph): 0.66 C/MVM
♦ Undivided 4 lanes (> 45 mph): 0.77 C/MVM
♦ Divided 4 lanes (<45 mph): 0.64 C/MVM
♦ Divided 4 lanes (> 45 mph): 0.93 C/MVM
♦ Divided 5 lanes or more (<45 mph): 0.75 C/MVM
♦ Divided 5 lanes or more (> 45 mph): 0.87 C/MVM

2 2022 Crash Data on California State Highways, State of California Department of Transportation.

City of Gardena Engineering & Traffic Survey for Speed Limit Updates

6 City of Gardena Engineering & Traffic Survey for Speed Limit Updates

7 3.3 Spot Speed Survey

Spot speed surveys were conducted at each street segment to assess the actual behavior of the majority of motorists. A reasonable and effective speed limit is based on the premise that a speed limit, thus established, conforms to the actual behavior of the majority of motorists. The speed limit should typically be established at the five mph increment nearest the 85th percentile speed recorded for the surveyed segment. However, engineering judgment and other factors such as street surveillance (Section 3.1) and collision rates (Section 3.2) may indicate the need for further reduction in establishing reasonable and effective speed limits.

The criteria used in conducting the radar survey are listed in Appendix B. The information collected and data calculated for the radar speed survey are as follows:

City of Gardena Engineering & Traffic Survey for Speed Limit Updates

8 ♦ Date and time of speed survey ♦ Collision history and rate ♦ Direction of survey ♦ Posted speed limit
♦ Number of vehicles observed ♦ Average speed
♦ Pedestrian and bicycle activity ♦ Range of speeds
♦ Road description ♦ 50th and 85th Percentile speed
♦ Average Daily Traffic ♦ 10 mph and percent over pace speed

Appendix D contains information about vehicular speed data observed, collision data, street classification, and any unusual conditions at the location.

City of Gardena Engineering & Traffic Survey for Speed Limit Updates

9 SECTION 4.0 – SURVEY FINDINGS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

In accordance with the State-imposed speed limit establishment regulation as defined by CVC Section 627 and the recently adopted Assembly Bill No. 43, there are several factors that may be considered to justify setting the prima facie speed limits five miles per hour below the observed 85th percentile speed.

It should be noted that the regulations found in Appendix B also state that “the establishment of a speed limit of five mph below the 85
th percentile speed should be done with great care”.

The factors to be considered are:

- Most recent accident record (mid-block) - Profile condition - Roadway design speed - Intersection spacing offsets - Safe stopping sight distance - Commercial driveway characteristics (land use) - Super-elevation - Pedestrian traffic with and without sidewalks - Grades - Pedestrian and bicycle safety
- Shoulder condition

The above factors for each roadway segment surveyed are listed in the Engineering and Traffic Survey Summary sheets in Appendix D. The 85th percentile speed and the above factors were considered in verifying existing speed limits and recommending speed limit changes (increase or decrease). The 2025 Accident Survey Analysis (Table 1) lists the total number of accidents, calculated accident rate, and the expected accident rate. Table 2 on the next page shows the surveyed road segments with posted and recommended speed limits. California Vehicle Code sections are defined in Appendix A.

4.1 Speed Limit Signing

All California motorists are required to know the basic 15, 25, and 65 mph statutory or prima facie speed laws and are tested on the subject when applying for a driver’s license. The maximum speed limit on most California highways is 65 mph. However, drivers are permitted to travel 70 mph where posted as such.

Unless otherwise posted, the maximum speed limit in California is 55 mph on two-lane undivided highways and for vehicles towing trailers – provided the street is not within a business or residential d istrict.

Consequently, speed limit signs covering these prima facie conditions need not be posted on city streets.

Although not required by law, speed limit signs for these limits can be posted by a jurisdiction when an engineer determines doing so would enhance public awareness and compliance of the basic speed law.

Typically, such postings occur upon streets that have the following:

- Significant daily vehicular traffic volumes - Cut-through traffic problems - Significant grades - Continued violation of 25 mph speed zones - Safe stopping sight distance - Commercial driveway characteristics (land use) - Other unusual characteristics

City of Gardena Engineering & Traffic Survey for Speed Limit Updates

10 City of Gardena Engineering & Traffic Survey for Speed Limit Updates

11 City of Gardena Engineering & Traffic Survey for Speed Limit Updates

12 It is standard engineering practice to recommend the posting of speed limit signs only on streets that have specific speed limits enacted by city ordinance or determined to be justified by an engineer who has performed an E&TS.

When an E&TS shows that the statutory or prima facie speed limits are not applicable for the existing conditions, the speed limits can be altered with the posting of a different speed limit, which must be determined according to the findings of the study. CVC Section 22354 covers decreasing highway speeds from 65 mph, and CVC Section 22358 addresses decreasing local speed limits. The CVC does not address decreasing the speed limit below 55 mph on undivided highways; however, the CA MUTCD states that speed zones (other than statutory speed limits) shall only be established based on an E&TS that has been performed in accordance with traffic engineering practices. Even though it is not codified in the CVC, Caltrans has established the practice of using an E&TS for any reduction below a statutory 55 mph speed limit. Law enforcement agencies and courts are accustomed to seeing surveys for these areas and it may be difficult to defend a speed violation citation without one.

Speed limit signs should be installed at approximately every one-half mile on streets which have been speed zoned. Signs are typically installed at the beginning of the speed zone on the departure side of a traffic signal-controlled intersection. It is also advisable to install signs at key intersections where there is high side street vehicle entry. It is important that motorists be given adequate notice of the speed limit without over signing, since doing so increases maintenance costs and rarely results in increased compliance.

The CA MUTCD outlines speed limit sign size specifications based on the type of roadway facility. Sign sizes vary from a minimum of 24 -inches by 30-inches on a single lane conventional roadway to 48 -inches by 60-inches on a freeway. It is also important to post signs in a manner that they are clearly visible to approaching traffic from a distance. Care should be taken to maintain landscaping and other vegetation, so it does not grow to block the motorist’s view of the signs. In certain circumstances, when an engineer has determined that additional motorist awareness of the speed limit is needed, the speed limit can also be painted on the roadway surface immediately adjacent to a speed limit sign.

Enforcement problems can occur when, (a) the highway is posted with inappropriate speed limit signs, (b) the highway is improperly or inadequately posted, or (c) the highway is not posted nor covered by ordinance and therefore falls under the basic speed law. In any of these events, the result is a debatable validity that may be questioned in court cases where citations are issued and contested.

Gardena City CouncilAugust 12, 2025

Gardena City Council
August 12, 2025